Components

Business Coder

Overview

The Business Coder component searches for Business Demographics data based on the address and company name.

You can use the Business Coder component to:

• Search for businesses using the phone number, stock ticker, and web address.

• Discover business SIC codes, sales volumes, employee sizes, phone numbers, etc.

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Business Coder Component for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

Advanced Configuration is located in the Business Coder Component under File > Advanced Configuration.

Set up the Business Coder Advanced Configuration.

Melissa Cloud

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

Caution

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for Business Coder to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the maximum number of records to send per transaction.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for Business Coder to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times Business Coder should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

After entering the License Key, click the Test Configuration button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Test Configuration (Business Coder)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest Business Coder software installed on your system.

Business Coder SSIS Component	Version	The version number of the component installed on your local system.
	Build Number	The build number of the component installed on your local system.
Business Coder Web Service	Service Request	This will indicate if the Business Coder Component was able to successfully connect to the Business Coder Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the component was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the Business Coder Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the Business Coder Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the Business Coder Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the Business Coder Web Service.

Settings

Business Coder Tabs

• Input
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output
• Options
• Output Filter

The Input tab configures the input fields for the Business Coder Component.

Existing field names can be selected using the drop-down boxes.

Company Name and Phone	Company Name	The name of the business.
	Company Phone	The phone number of the business.
Melissa Address Key (MAK)	MD Address Key	A propietary unique key identifier for an address. This is derived from Address Checking.
Input Address Field	Address Line 1	The first address line of the business.
	Address Line 2	The second address line (suite) of the business.
	City	The city (locality).
	State	The state (Administrative Area).
	Postal Code	The postal code.
	Country	The country.
Web Site and Stock Info	Web Address	The web address/domain for a company.
	Stock Ticker	A unique abbreviation/symbol assigned by the stock exchange for listed companies.

This shows a list of the columns in your input table. Add a column to the Pass Through list to include the original contents in the output table.

Pass Through	Specify whether or not a field should be passed through to the output table(s) by checking the box to include the field.
Field Name	The field names from the original input table.
Current Usage	Where the field is currently being used as input.

This tab lets you specify which groups or columns you want to output.

Output Groups/Columns	Click Select All to enable all output columns or De-select All to disable all of the output columns. You can also individually choose which columns you want by navigating the fields and checking their respective check boxes.
Group/Column Details	Category Description	The selected group’s description.
	Column Name	The selected column’s name.
	Column Details	The selected column’s description.
Output Contacts	Returns NameFirst, NameLast, Gender, Title, and Email of one or more contacts. This will filter into a primary key of your choosing based on your input.
Limit Contacts To	Allows you to return up to as many contacts as you decide.

This tab lets you specify which groups or columns you want to output.

Business Dominant Option	When checked, this option returns the dominant business name and demographics for a particular site when the company information is missing or does not match.
	When unchecked, this will not return the dominant business name when the company information is missing or does not match.

The Business Coder Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box.
Output Filter	A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component can have pre-built filters for common applications:
	Custom Filter	A custom rule example could be: “(FS01 OR FS02) AND NOT FE01.” This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “FS01” or “FS02” were returned and the result code “FE01” was not returned. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (Business Coder)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Contact Verify

Overview

Contact Verify provides the ability to verify, correct, parse and standardize addresses, phone numbers, email addresses; parse full names and detect vulgarities; and append census and geographic information like latitude and longitude coordinates.

Address Verification

• Validate and Correct US and Canadian addresses

• Append missing suites with SuiteLink® and exclusive AddressPlus technology

• Determine delivery type (business vs. residential)

• Validate and Correct non-USPS addresses

Geocoding (Spatial Processing)

• Assign Latitude and Longitude to the Rooftop

• Census Tract and Block

• CBSA Information

• County Names and FIPS

• Place Names and Place Code

Name Processing

• Parse and genderize names and multiple names

• Detect vulgarities and suspicious words in name fields

• Detect and standardize companies in the name field

Phone Processing

• Verify telephone numbers to 7 - 10 digit level

• Determine Telco Switch location

• Detect landlines vs. cellular or VOIP

• Detect Residential, business, small office/home office phones

Email Processing

• Validate and correct email domains

• Detect mobile domains (restricted from email by FCC)

• Detect bad mailbox names (spam, noreply…)

• Correct common misspellings and syntax errors

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Contact Verify Component for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Contact Verify Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

License Key	Your License Key will activate the product for use.
Select Processing Mode	Community Edition	The Community Edition of Contact Verify allows you to explore the full capabilities of this component (with some limitations).
	On-Premise	Processing will be performed on this machine using local data files. This method is the fastest and most secure option as no data leaves your premises. It is ideal for large batch processing where speed and/or security is a concern, but requires periodic updates to be performed on each machine.
	Melissa Cloud	Processing will be performed on Melissa’s servers using Web service protocols over the internet. This method is slower but no maintenance is required. It is ideal for processing smaller files and for quickly running this component without installing the local data files.
	Dedicated Cloud	Processing will be performed on a dedicated Contact Verification Server using Web service protocols. These servers may be hosted locally or remotely and will be dedicated to your organization for increased speed and security.

Select which Processing Mode you will use.

Processing Mode

• Community
• On-Premise
• Melissa Cloud
• Dedicated Cloud

Data File Path:

This should point to the folder on the local system that contains the Contact Verify Component and its data files. The default path should work unless you install the component to a different folder.

After entering the Data Path, click the Test Configuration button immediately below the Data File Path to verify that the Data Path was entered correctly.

Test Configuration (Contact Verify Community)

The Test Configuration screen for On-Premise Processing displays basic information about the object libraries being used by the Contact Verify.

All Objects

Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date when the Contact Verify Component License Key will expire.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Contact Verify Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Name Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Name Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Name Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Parse Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Parser.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Phone Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Phone Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Phone Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Email Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Email Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Email Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.

Data File Path:

This should point to the folder on the local system that contains the Contact Verify Component and its data files. The default path should work unless you install the component to a different folder.

Enable Local Geologging:

When enabled, this will create a log file containing the Customer ID, Date/Time, GS01-GS06 result code counts, and a Checksum. You can choose a folder location for this file.

After entering the Data Path, click the Test Configuration button immediately below the Data File Path to verify that the Data Path was entered correctly.

Test Configuration (Contact Verify On-Premise)

The Test Configuration screen for On-Premise Processing displays basic information about the object libraries being used by the Contact Verify.

All Objects	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date when the Contact Verify Component License Key will expire.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Contact Verify Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Name Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Name Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Name Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the Name Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Database Expiration	Displays the date when the Name Object data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
Address Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Address Object.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the Address Object US data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Database Expiration	Displays the date when the Address Object US data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Canadian Database Date	Displays the date of the Address Object Canadian data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Canadian Database Expiration	Displays the date when the Address Object Canadian data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	RBDI Database Date	Displays the date of the Address Object RBDI data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Address Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
GeoCoder/GeoPoint Object (US & Canada)	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the GeoCoder Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the GeoCoder Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the GeoCoder Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Database Expiration	Displays the date when the GeoCoder Object data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Geo Code Last Usage	If your license key has logging enforced, you will be able to see this button.
		This is a diagnostic tool, to aid in diagnosing issues with GeoCoder and Geologging.
Phone Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Phone Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Phone Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the Phone Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
Email Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Email Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Email Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the Email Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Database Expiration	Displays the date when the Email Object data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for Contact Verify to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for Contact Verify to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times Contact Verify should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (Contact Verify Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest Contact Verify software installed on your system.

Contact Verify Component	Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest CVC software installed on your system.
	Version	The version number of the component installed on your local system.
	Build Number	The build number of the component installed on your local system.
Name Parser Web Service	Service Response	This will indicate if the CVC was able to successfully connect to the Name Parser Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the CVC was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the Name Parser Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the Name Parser Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the Name Parser Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the Name Parser Web Service.
Address Verifier Web Service	Service Response	This will indicate if the CVC was able to successfully connect to the Address Verifier Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the CVC was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the Address Verifier Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the Address Verifier Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the Address Verifier Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the Address Verifier Web Service.
Delivery Indicator Web Service	Service Response	This will indicate if the CVC was able to successfully connect to the Delivery Indicator Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the CVC was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the Delivery Indicator Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the Delivery Indicator Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the Delivery Indicator Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the Delivery Indicator Web Service.
GeoCoder Web Service	Service Response	This will indicate if the CVC was able to successfully connect to the GeoCoder Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the CVC was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the GeoCoder Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the GeoCoder Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the GeoCoder Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the GeoCoder Web Service.
Phone Verifier Web Service	Service Response	This will indicate if the CVC was able to successfully connect to the Phone Verifier Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the CVC was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the Phone Verifier Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the Phone Verifier Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the Phone Verifier Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the Phone Verifier Web Service.
Email Verifier Web Service	Service Response	This will indicate if the CVC was able to successfully connect to the Email Verifier Web Service and authorize your License Key. If the CVC was unable to connect to the service or your License Key is not authorized to use the Email Verifier Web Service, this will be indicated in this box. To add access to the Email Verifier Web Service to your account, contact your Melissa sales representative at 1-800-MELISSA. If this indicates that you could not connect to the Email Verifier Web Service, check your Internet connectivity before contacting Melissa Technical Support.
	Version	The current version number of the Email Verifier Web Service.

Server URL	This is the internet or intranet address of the server to be used by the Contact Verify for processing. Check with your network administrator if you need help with this setting.
Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for Contact Verify to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Enable Compression	Check this to enable GZip compression. This can have up to a 10% increase in speed.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Appliance to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent in a single request. A single request may contain between 1 – 100 records. It is recommended to set this value to 100 for optimal throughput.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for Contact Verify to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times Contact Verify should re-send a request to the Appliance due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Enable this option to stop file processing when any exception is thrown. Disabling this option will disregard any exceptions and continue processing your file.
Failover to MD Servers	Check this box to use Cloud (Melissa Cloud) processing as a redundant backup for Local Appliance (Dedicated Cloud) processing. You must have a valid License Key and also configure the Web settings in addition to the Local Appliance settings.

Add Component

To add Contact Verify Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Contact Verify Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Contact Verify Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Contact Verify Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Contact Verify Component to bring up the interface. See Contact Verify Component Settings

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Contact Verify Tabs

• Name
• Address
• GeoCode
• Phone/Email
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

The Name tab configures the fields that will be used for the name parsing functionality of the Contact Verification Component. Existing field names can be selected using the drop-down boxes. New field names can be created by typing the name into the box.

Input Name	The Name Parse tab requires data from a single field in order to populate its output fields.
	Full Name	Select or enter the field name that will contain the name information to be parsed. This field can contain one or two full names, such as “Mr. John Q. Smith, Jr.” or “John Q. and Mary S. Smith.” If you do not set a field for Full Name, the Component will not parse name information.
Output Components	The output section consists of two sets of return fields. The first name detected will be returned by the first set of fields. If a second name is detected, it will be returned by the second set of fields.
	Prefix	This field returns any part of the name that precedes the given name, such as “Mr.,” “Ms.,” or “Dr.,” for each full name detected.
	First Name	This field returns the given name for each first name detected. Contact Verify can attempt to correct misspelled first names. To enable this feature, see the Name Parse Options screen.
	Middle Name	This field returns the middle names or initials for each full name detected.
	Last Name	This field returns the family name for each full name detected.
	Suffix	This field returns any part of the name that follows the family name, such as degrees (“MD” or “PhD”) and generational indicators (“IV” or “Jr.”), for each full name detected.
	Gender	This field returns a gender indicator for each full name detected. Gender is based on the first name. See the Name Parse Options screen for how to adjust how the Component assigns gender to a name.
	Salutation	This field returns a salutation constructed from the first full name detected. To control how this salutation is formatted, see the Name Parse Options screen.
	Standardized Company Name	This field returns a standardized company name.
Name Parse Options	To access Name Parse Options, click the Name Parse Options button on the Name tab
	Correct Misspellings in First Name	The Component uses a database of common given names to correct obvious misspellings. To enable this feature, check the box.
	Name Order Hint	The Name Order Hint tells the Component in what order the name components will be found in the input full name, normal name order, last name first, or a mixture. The default is “Varying.” The options are: Option Description DefinitelyFull Name will always be treated as normal name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation. VeryLikelyFull Name will be treated as normal name order unless inverse order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation. ProbablyFull If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward normal name order. Varying If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with no bias toward either name order. ProbablyInverse If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward inverse name order. VeryLikelyInverse Name will be treated as inverse name order unless normal order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation. DefinitelyInverse Name will always be treated as inverse name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation. MixedFirstName Name field is expected to only contain prefixes, first, and middle names. MixedLastName Name field is expected to only contain last names and suffixes.
	Gender Aggression	This option controls how the CVC assigns gender to a name, based on the first name. First names are rated on a 1 to 7 scale on the likelihood that they are a male or female name, with 7 being “always male” and 1 being “always female.” The Gender Aggression setting (Conservative, Neutral, or Aggressive) controls how the CVC treats names that fall between those two extreme
	Gender Population	This option controls the gender assumed for the input data: predominantly female, predominantly male, or an even split. The effect of the Gender Aggression and Gender Population settings is shown on this chart. Male Female Aggression Always [7] Often [6] Normally [5] Neutral [4] Normally [3] Often [2] Always [1] Conservative Even M N N N N N F Male M M N N N N F Females M N N N N F F Neutral Even M M N N N F F Male M M M N N F F Females M M N N F F F Aggressive Even M M M N F F F Male M M M M N F F Females M M N F F F F
	Salutation Prefix	The Component will begin every salutation with the text entered in this box. The default setting is “Dear.”
	Salutation Suffix	The Component will end every salutation with the text entered in this box. The default setting is a semicolon.
	Salutation Slug	The Component will use this text for a salutation if the input data did not contain enough information to construct a salutation from the parsed data. The default setting is “Dear Customer;.”
	Middle Name Logic	The Component will parse the Middle Name depending on the method selected. The default setting is Parse Logic. Option Description Parse Logic In the absence of a hyphen, recognizable last names in the middle of a full name are treated as part of a hyphenated last name. Hyphenated Last The middle word is assumed to be part of the last name. Middle Name The middle word is assumed to be a middle name.
	Salutation Preference	Use this box to change the order of preference for salutation formats. The highest format will be used if possible, followed by the second, until all possibilities are exhausted. If you do not wish a format to be used, place it below the selection for “Blank.” To change the order of preference, select the items on the list and click the arrow buttons to move the selection up and down the list.

The Address Tab configures the fields that will be used for data enrichment and validation for addresses. It can correct, standardize, parse and provide additional information such as the plus4, delivery point, congressional district, etc. Use this to select the database fields that will contain the address data to be verified and standardized.

Contents

Input Address Additional Input Columns Output Address

Additional Output Columns Address Verify Options Address Handling

For address verification, you must map fields for street address, city, and state, or street address and ZIP Code™.

Input Address

Last Name	The last name is required for the AddressPlus feature. You have the option of using the contents from one of the Last Name output fields from the Name Parse tab or select an existing field in the input database.
Company Name	Select the field in the input database that contains the company name information. This field is also required for the component to append secondary addresses to non-residential address records via SuiteLink™. Some companies have an assigned unique ZIP Code™ for certain facilities, so the Company Name field will allow the Component to assign the correct ZIP + 4® in these cases.
Address	Select the field in the input database that contains the first line of street address information. It may also contain secondary address information such as suite and private mailbox numbers. This field must be mapped for address verification to occur.
Address2	Select the field in the input database that contains the second line of a street address information, if any. For more information on how the Component handles the Address and Address2 fields, see Address Handling.
City	Select the field in the input database that contains the city information.
State	Select the field in the input database that contains the state information.
Zip/Postal Code	Select the field in the input database that contains the postal code information.
Country Code	Select the field in the input database that contains the abbreviation for the country, United States or Canada, where the address is located.

Additional Input Columns

Click the Additional Input Columns… button to map additional input fields.

Suite	Select the field in the input database that contains the secondary address information, if any.
Urbanization	Select the field in the input database that contains the urbanization information, if any. Urbanization is used to break ties between similar addresses in Puerto Rico. The urbanization name tells the address checking logic which “neighborhood” to look in if more than one likely address candidate is found. If just one address is found, the address checking logic can correct the address and return the urbanization name.
Plus 4	Select the field in the input database that contains the Plus 4 extension for US ZIP codes, if this information is stored separately. If no address, city or state fields are mapped, this field and ZIP/Postal Code must be mapped for the GeoCoder output fields to be populated with nine-digit ZIP + 4 accuracy.

Output Address

Use this column to map the field names that will receive the verified and standardized address information. You may select existing fields or create new fields by entering the field names in the boxes.

Address	Map the field that will receive the standardized street address that was used for verification. This may be the contents of the Address2 input field, if address swapping has occurred.
Address2	Map the field that will receive the standardized street address that was not used for verification, if two address lines were present.
City	Map the field that will receive the city name. The information returned may be different than the contents of the City input field, if the preferred city name has been substituted for a vanity city name or if the address was coded to a different zip code instead.
State	Map the field that will receive the two-character state abbreviation.
Zip/Postal Code	Map the field that will receive the five-digit U.S. ZIP Code or the six-character Canadian Postal Code.
Country Code	Map the field that will receive the abbreviation for the country, United States or Canada, where the address is located.
Address Key	The Address Key is an eleven-digit numeric string value that uniquely identifies each address. It is used by other parts of the CVC to speed up their data retrieval.

Additional Output Columns

Address Information	Suite	Map the column that will receive the formatted suite information. If the suite column is not mapped, the suite information will be appended to Address2. If Address2 is not mapped the suite information will be appended to Address1.
	Private Mailbox	Map the column that will receive the private mailbox number. This column is populated if the primary address was identified as a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) and the secondary address information is present. This column would also be populated if the secondary address information contains the string “PMB,” thus identifying the address as a private mailbox.
	Urbanization	Map the column that will receive the Urbanization name, if any.
	Plus 4	Map the column that will receive the four-digit extension from the ZIP + 4®. If this column is not mapped the Plus4 will be appended to the ZIP column.
	Delivery Point & Check Digit	The deliver point, when combined with the check digit, is a three-digit number that combined with the ZIP + 4, generates a unique number for each address in that ZIP + 4. This number is used to generate barcodes, so if you plan to use this address data for commercial mailing, it would be necessary to map an output column for this information.
	Carrier Route	The Carrier Route is a four-character code that indicates which mail carrier delivers to the input address. The first character of this Carrier Route is always alphabetic and the last three characters are numeric. For example, “R001” or “C027” would be typical carrier routes. The alphabetic letter indicates the type of delivery associated with this address. Code Description B PO Box C City Delivery G General Delivery H Highway Contract R Rural Route
	ZIP Code Type	The type of ZIP Code can indicate a specialized address, such as military or PO Box complexes. Code Description P A ZIP Code used only for PO Boxes U Unique: A ZIP Code assigned to an organization or government institution such as the IRS M Military: A ZIP Code assigned to an APO/FPO Empty This is a standard ZIP Code
	Address Type Code & Address Type String	These two columns return a one-character code indicating the type of address that was processed and a text description of the address type. For U.S. addresses, the Component will return one of the following codes. Code Description F Firm or Company address G General Delivery address H High Rise or Business complex P PO Box address R Rural Route address S Street or Residential address For Canadian addresses, the Component will return one of the following codes. Code Description 1 Street 2 Street Served By Route and GD 3 Lock Box 4 Route Service 5 General Delivery A Building B LVR Street C Government Street D LVR Lock Box E Government Lock Box L LVR General Delivery
	CMRA	If this column returns the string “Y,” the primary input address is a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA), such as the UPS Store® or similar private mailbox business location.
	eLot® Number	This number indicates where the current address falls in the delivery order within the ZIP + 4®. The eLot columns may be required if you are sending the data on to be presorted for mailing using USPS® Standard Mail® rates.
	eLot Order	The eLot Order returns the letters “A” or “D” to indicate whether the Post Office™ delivers mail within the ZIP + 4® in ascending eLot Number order or descending. Therefore, if the eLot Number is 1 and the eLot Order is “D,” then the address is typically the last delivery of the day.
	Delivery Indication	This column returns a one-character code indicating whether the submitted address is “R,” a residence; “B,” a business; or “U,” the status is unknown.
Geographic Information	City Abbreviation	If the name returned by the City column is longer than 13 letters, the City Abbreviation column will return the official abbreviation the Post OfficeTM has associated with that city or municipality name. For example, the City Abbreviation column will return the abbreviation “Rcho Sta Marg” for “Rancho Santa Margarita.” If the value returned by the City column is 13 letters or shorter, the City Abbreviation column will return the full city or municipality name.
	County Name	This column returns the name of the county where the input address is located.
	County FIPS	This column returns the six-digit Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) code for the county where the input address is located.
	Congressional District	This column returns the standard postal abbreviation for the state, followed by a two-digit number that indicates the congressional district where the input address is located.
	Time Zone	This column returns the name of the time zone where the verified input address is located.
	Time Zone Code	This column returns a one- or two-digit number code for the time zone where the verified input address is located. The number also indicates the number of hours that the time zone is behind UTC/GMT. In other words, Eastern Standard Time has a time zone code of 5, indicating that the Eastern time zone is five hours behind UTC/GMT. This number does not indicate differences due to daylight savings time.
Parsed Address Columns	Address Range	This column returns the street number.
	Pre-directional	This column returns any directional indicators that precede the street name. The directionals are returned as one- or two-character abbreviations. If the input data contained “Southwest,” it would be shortened to “SW.”
	Street Name	This column returns only the street name, minus the suffixes or directionals. For “SW Main Street,” this would return “Main.”
	Suffix	This column returns the standard abbreviations for the street types: “RD,” “ST,” “AVE,” “BLVD,” etc.
	Post-directional	This column returns any directional indicators that follow the street name. The directionals are returned as one- or two-character abbreviations. If the input data contained “Southwest,” it would be shortened to “SW.”
	Suite Name	This column returns the descriptive portion of the secondary address: “SUITE,” “APT,” “UNIT,” etc.
	Suite Number	This column returns the numeric portion of the secondary address.
	Private Mailbox Name	This column returns the descriptive portion of the private mailbox number. A private mailbox, or PMB, is a secondary address associated with a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA). Because the CMRA may itself be located in a suite, such an address may have both a suite number and a PMB number. The name portion of the PMB will normally be either “#” or “PMB.”
	Private Mailbox Number	This column returns the numeric portion of the private mailbox number.
	Route Service	This column returns the route service number for a Canadian address. Route Service is typically used to designate an address in a rural area.
	Lock Box	This column returns the lock box number for a Canadian address. Lock boxes are similar to PO Boxes and the terms are often used interchangeably.
	Delivery Installation	This column returns the delivery installation information for a Canadian address. The delivery installation is the Canada Post facility that services the address.
	Extra Information	This column returns any text from the street address column that does not fit into one of the above categories.

Address Verify Options

Click the Address Verify Options button on the Address tab to access this screen. These options control the level of verification and enable or disable certain features of the Contact Verify Component.

Remember that DPV®, LACSLink®, and SuiteLink® processing are required in order to generate a CASSTM form 3553. If a CASSTM form is not required for some reason, disabling one or more of these features will reduce the memory requirements and speed up processing.

Address Verify Options	Country	Select U.S., Canada, or both. If you only need to verify Canadian or U.S. addresses, selecting the option for just that country prevents the data files for the other country from being loaded, reducing memory requirements and increasing the processing speed.
	Perform DPV®	DPV processing verifies that a record contains a deliverable address, down to the secondary address (suite) level. Uncheck the box to disable DPV processing. This will speed up processing but the Component will only be able to validate that the address falls within a valid street range of addresses and assign the ZIP + 4 code accordingly. DPV processing is required to generate a CASS Form 3553.
	Perform LACSLink® Lookups	Some rural route addresses are converted to city-style addresses to allow emergency services (ambulance, police, fire, and so on) to find these addresses faster. The LACSLink service matches the old address with the updated address and corrects it as part of the address verification process. Uncheck the box to disable LACSLink processing. This will speed up processing but the Component will not update addresses that have changed. LACSLink processing is required to generate a CASS Form 3553.
	Perform SuiteLink® Lookups	SuiteLink is a service from the U.S. Postal Service® that links a high rise business address to a suite number and updates address records with missing suite information. Uncheck the box to disable SuiteLink processing. This will speed up processing but the Component will not update business addresses that are missing suite information. SuiteLink requires a Company input column. SuiteLink processing is required to generate a CASS Form 3553.
	Perform AddressPlus Lookups	AddressPlus appends secondary address information, such as apartment numbers, to residential addresses and some business addresses not covered by the SuiteLink database. Uncheck the box to disable AddressPlus processing. AddressPlus requires a last name. This can either be a last name column from the input data, or one of the last name output columns mapped on the Name Parse tab.
	Perform Delivery Indicator Lookups	Delivery Indicator indicates whether a given address is residential or business. Since some shipping rates are different for residential or business addresses, this information can potentially save a great deal of money.
	Use Preferred City Names	For every city, there is an official name that is preferred by the U.S. Postal Service. There may be one or more unofficial or “vanity” names in use. Normally, the Component allows you to verify addresses using known vanity names. If this box is checked, the Component will substitute the preferred city name for any vanity name when it verifies an address.
	Diacritic Mode	This setting controls how the Component will handle diacritic characters in French words for addresses located in Quebec. The default setting is for the Component to return data with diacritic characters if they were already present, otherwise not. The other settings are to always return data from Quebec addresses with diacritic characters, even if they were not present in the input data, or to always replace the diacritic characters if they were present in the input data.
US 3553 CASS Form	If the box is checked, the Component will generate a CASS Form 3553 after processing all records. In that case, the address information boxes must be filled out with the contact information for the company that owns the data being processed. A couple of the columns require further explanation.
	Processor Name	This is the name of the company performing the processing, if different from the list owner. In simple terms, this is the name of the company that owns the copy of Component being used to process the current list.
	List Name	This is a name or ID number that identifies the list being processed.
	Save in File	Click the folder button and browse to the location where you want the Component to save the HTML file containing the CASS Form 3553.
	Canadian SOA Form	If you want the Component to generate a Summary of Addresses (SOA) form, check the box and fill in the address columns.
	Save in File	Click the folder button and browse to the location where you want the Component to save the HTML file containing the SOA Form.
	Saving the Options Settings	Click the OK button to save the current settings and close the Address Verify Options screen.

Address Handling

A key concept for address verification is understanding how the Component handles address data. The Component can accept two lines of street address information via the Address and Address 2 input fields.

The value passed to the Address input field will typically contain the primary street address (Street number, street name, plus any directionals and street suffixes). It may or may not contain also a secondary address, such as a suite number, address number, unit number, or a private mailbox located at a commercial mail receiving agency (CMRA).

The value passed to the Address 2 input field will often contain the secondary address information, if it is not submitted via Address or Suite input fields. The Address 2 input field may also be used if there is another primary address, either a Post Office Box or a separate street address, that is part of the same record.

If secondary address information is submitted via the Address 2 input field, the Component will append this information to the value passed to the Address input field before processing the record.

Example 1:

If the following were submitted:

Address Line 1: 1234 Main Street

Address Line 2: Suite #101

This is the address that would actually be verified:

Address Line 1: 1234 Main Street Suite #101

Address Line 2: <empty>

If an additional primary address was sent to the Address 2 input field, such as a P.O. Box or a second street address, and the address sent to the Address input field cannot be verified, then the Component will attempt to verify the second address line.

Example 2:

If the following were submitted:

Address Line 1: 1234 Main Street

Address Line 2: P.O. Box 101

Assuming that the first address didn’t contain a verifiable address, this is when the Component would consider the contents of the second address line.

If the second address line contains a verifiable address, then the values submitted via the Address 2 field will be used.

In that case, the Component will swap the values submitted via the Address and Address 2 input fields and return the standardized contents of these fields in this order:

The Address output field returns “P.O.Box 101.”

The Address 2 output field returns “1234 Main St.”

If the contents of neither field can be successfully verified, the Component will flag the record as unverified and the values submitted to the Address and Address 2 input fields will be returned in their original order:

The Address output field returns “1234 Main Street.”

The Address 2 output field returns “P.O.Box 101”

Secondary Addresses

Secondary addresses include suite numbers, unit numbers and residential apartment numbers. It could also refer to a private mailbox (PMB) at a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA). The secondary address can be passed at the end the first address line, as the address 2 input field or via the Suite input field. The National Postal database identifies certain primary addresses as high rises, business parks and apartment buildings. Therefore, the Component would be able to assign the correct secondary address designator to the following address:

1234 Main St #101

For example, if the primary address were an apartment complex, the Component would return “Apt 101” as the suite information. CMRAs like the UPS Store® and other mailbox stores are a special case. These are often located at shopping centers and the store itself will have a suite number. This means that addresses located at a CMRA will often have both a suite number and a PMB number, like this:

1234 Main Street

Suite C1 PMB#101

CMRAs are identified in the national address database as this kind of business.

Example

1234 Main Street #101

Assuming that 1234 Main Street is identified in the national database as a CMRA, the “#101” portion would be returned by the Private Mailbox columnrather than the GetSuite function. Be aware that the Component will always treat a second item of secondary address information as a PMB number.

Example

1234 Main Street

Suite C1 #101

Whether or not the primary address is identified in the database as a CMRA, the Component will identify the “#101” portion of the second line as a PMB number and return this number in the Private Mailbox field. Even if an address is identified as a CMRA, if a secondary address is explicitly identified as a suite or anything other than private mailbox, this information will be treated as a suite and not a PMB.

Example

1234 Main Street

Suite 101

Assuming that the primary address belongs to a CMRA, because the secondary address was supplied as “Suite 101,” this will be treated as a suite number and not a PMB number. If the number 101 was meant to refer to a PMB and there is not Suite 101 at this address, this would probably cause the address to fail verification.

City or Postal Code Information

In order to verify an address, the Component requires information on the city, the state or province, and a ZIP or Postal code. With the city and the state/province, the Component will determine the correct ZIP/Postal code and use this to verify the address. Conversely, if supplied with a correct ZIP/Postal code, the Component can look up the city and the state/province. Therefore the ZIP/Postal code or the city plus the state/province are required. If the supplied city and state/province do not match the ZIP/Postal code, the Component will use the city and state/province to look up the ZIP/Postal code.

GeoCode determines the longitude and latitude of an address. This can be based on the centroid of the five-digit ZIP Code or the nine-digit ZIP + 4, but in many cases it can be accurate to rooftop level when there is sufficient address data available.

Contents

Input Address Reprocessed Inputs

Output Columns

Input Address

There are four options that control how the GeoCoder feature of the CVC acquires the data it needs for geocoding. The first, Not GeoCoding, disables the feature completely.

Output results of Address Process	If you are using the Address Verify features of the CVC, you can use the results based on those input columns as input for the GeoCoder. To do this, you must meet the minimum requirements for Address Verify: Address and ZIP Code, or address and city/state.
Address Key Column	If you have previously used the Address Verify feature on the input data, or used a similar product, such as Melissa’s Address Object or WebSmart Address Verifier service, you may have an Address Key available. You can use this column as the input for the GeoCoder feature.
Address Components	If you are GeoCoding new data and are not using the Address Verify features of the CVC, you can map the following columns here instead of the Address tab: Address, Address 2, City, State, ZIP/Postal Code.

Reprocessed Inputs

This will prevent records previously coded with GeoCoder Object from being counted towards your overall usage. By setting these properties to the values previously returned from GeoCoder Object, any records whose current values match the values set in the properties will not be counted against your total usage.

Output Columns

Latitude	This column returns a string value containing the latitude for the centroid of the location described by the submitted address. Latitude is the geographic coordinate of a point measured in degrees north or south of the equator. The Web service uses the WGS-84 standard for determining latitude. Since all North American latitude coordinates are north of the equator, this value will always be positive.
Longitude	This field returns a string value containing the longitude for the centroid of the location described by the submitted address. Longitude is the geographic coordinate of a point measured in degrees east or west of the Greenwich meridian. The Web service uses the WGS-84 standard for determining longitude. Since all North American longitude coordinates are west of the Greenwich meridian, this value will always be negative
Additional Columns	To map additional GeoCoder results, click the Additional Output Columns… button.
	Geographic Information	County Name	This column returns the name of the county where the input address is located.
		County FIPS	This column returns the six-digit Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) code for the county where the input address is located.
		Place Code	This column returns the Census Bureau Place Code for the physical location of the input address. This information is useful when the boundaries of the ZIP + 4 overlap city limits.
		Place Name	This column returns the official Census Bureau name for the location indicated by the Place Code.
		Time Zone	This column returns the name of the time zone where the verified input address is located.
		Time Zone Code	This column returns a one- or two-digit number code for the time zone where the verified input address is located. The number also indicates the number of hours that the time zone is behind UTC/GMT. In other words, Eastern Standard Time has a time zone code of 5, indicating that the Eastern time zone is five hours behind UTC/GMT. This number does not indicate differences due to daylight savings time.
	Census Information	The following columns return information useful in determining the demographic characteristics for the location of the input address.
		CBSA Code	Metropolitan and micropolitan statistical areas (metro and micro areas) are geographic entities defined by the U.S. Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for use by Federal statistical agencies in collecting, tabulating, and publishing Federal statistics. The term “Core Based Statistical Area” (CBSA) is a collective term for both metro and micro areas. A metro area contains a core urban area of 50,000 or more population, and a micro area contains an urban core of at least 10,000 (but less than 50,000) population. Each metro or micro area consists of one or more counties and includes the counties containing the core urban area, as well as any adjacent counties that have a high degree of social and economic integration (as measured by commuting to work) with the urban core. The CBSA Code is a five-digit code for the specific CBSA of the input address.
		CBSA Level	This column returns the level of the CBSA for the submitted address: micropolitan or metropolitan.
		CBSA Title	This column returns the official U.S. Census Bureau name for the Core Based Statistical Area (CBSA) of the input address.
		CBSA Division Code	This column returns the numeric code for the division within the Core Based Statistical Area (CBSA), if any. Some CBSA’s are broken into parts known as divisions. In this case, the CBSA Division columns will also be populated. If not, these columns will be empty. Each division also has a Code, Level, and Title.
		CBSA Division Level	This column returns the level of the CBSA division for the submitted address: micropolitan or metropolitan.
		CBSA Division Title	This column returns the official U.S. Census Bureau name for the CBSA division of the input address.
		Census Block	This column returns the Census Block number for the input data. Census blocks, the smallest geographic area for which the Bureau of the Census collects and tabulates decennial census data, are formed by streets, roads, railroads, streams, and other bodies of water, other visible physical and cultural features, and the legal boundaries shown on Census Bureau maps. A Census Block Group is a cluster of blocks having the same first digit of their 3-digit identifying numbers within a Census Tract or Block Numbering Area (BNA). For example, Census Block Group 3 within a Census Tract or BNA includes all blocks numbered between 301 and 397. In most cases, the numbering involves substantially fewer than 97 blocks. Census Block Groups never cross Census Tract or BNA boundaries, however, they may cross the boundaries of county subdivisions, places, American Indian and Alaskan Native areas, urbanized areas, voting districts, and congressional districts. Census Block Groups generally contain between 250 and 550 housing units, with the ideal size being 400 housing units. Census Blocks are small areas bordered on all sides by visible features such as streets, roads, streams, and railroad tracks, and by invisible boundaries such as city, town, township, county limits, property lines, and short, imaginary extensions of streets and roads. The Census Block function returns a 4-character string. The first digit is the Block Group and the last three characters (if any) are the Block Number.
		Census Tract	This column returns the Census Tract number for the input data. Census Tracts are small, relatively permanent statistical subdivisions of a county. Census Tracts are delineated for all metropolitan areas (MA’s) and other densely populated counties by local census statistical areas committees following Census Bureau guidelines (more than 3,000 Census Tracts have been established in 221 counties outside MA’s). This column returns a four or six-character string value. The Census Tract is usually returned as a 4-digit number. However, in areas that experience substantial growth, a Census Tract may be split to keep the population level even. When this happens, a 6-digit number will be returned.

Contents

Input Phone Output Phone Components

Input Email Output Email Components

Input Phone

This is where you map the input columns containing the original phone numbers.

Phone Number

The Phone input column requires a 10-digit phone number in a standard format.

Output Phone Components

Use these columns to map output columns for the geographical and parsed phone number data. Because of number portability, the geographic information may not reflect the actual location of the phone number’s owner for wireless or VOIP numbers.

Phone Number	The Phone output column name.
Format	Select the format to be used for phone numbers in your data.
Area Code	This column returns the Area Code portion of the parsed phone number.
Prefix	This column returns the three-digit prefix portion of the parsed phone number.
Suffix	This column returns the four-digit suffix portion of the parsed phone number.
Extension	If the input phone number contained any extension information, that would be returned by this column.
Additional Output Columns	Click the Additional Output Columns… button to map columns for information beyond basic phone number parsing.
	City	This column returns the city associated with the phone number’s area code and prefix.
	State/Province	This column returns the two-character state abbreviation associated with the phone number’s area code and prefix.
	County Name	This column returns the five-digit county FIPS code associated with the phone number’s area code and prefix.
	Country Code	This column returns the country code associated with the input phone number. This is the two-character abbreviation for the United States or Canada and not the numeric international dialing code.
	Time Zone	This column returns the name of the time zone where the input area code and prefix are located.
	Time Zone Code	This column returns a one- or two-digit number code for the time zone where the area code and prefix are located. The number also indicates the number of hours that the time zone is behind UTC/GMT. In other words, Eastern Standard Time has a time zone code of 5, indicating that the Eastern time zone is five hours behind UTC/GMT. This number does not indicate differences due to daylight savings time.

Input Email

Email Address

This column returns the complete email address, standardized, and corrected according to the options selected in the Email Standardize Options.

Output Email Components

Email Address	This column returns the complete email address, standardized, and corrected according to the options selected in the Email Standardize Options.
Standardization Options & Additional Output Columns	Click the Standardization Options & Additional Output Columns… button to control how the CVC corrects and standardizes the email address and map the parsing and information columns.
	Email Standardization Options	Correct Email Syntax	If this box is checked, the Component will do the following: Remove any illegal characters from the address. This would include excess “@” characters. Correct misspelled domain names. For example, yaho.com would be replaced by yahoo.com. Correct misspelled top-level domain names. For example, .con would be replaced with .com.
		Standardize Casing	If this box is checked, the Component will reset the input email address to all lowercase letters. For example, JSmith@MelissaData.com would become jsmith@melissadata.com
		Update Domains	If this box is checked, the Component will attempt to update the domain name of the email address. One domain name can replace another in cases such as a change in corporate ownership. For example, the domain of subscribers to the @Home cable Internet service was switched from home.com to cox.net.
	Lookup Options	Perform Database Lookup	If this box is checked, the domain name is checked against the Email Object’s local database of known valid and invalid domain names. This is faster but may not include recently registered domains.
		Perform DNS Lookup	If this box is checked, the Component will attempt to validate the input email address by locating an MX (Mail Exchange) record or an A (Address Name) record for the domain on a DNS server. This is slower than a database lookup but potentially more accurate if the domain name is either obscure or new.
		Perform Fuzzy Lookup	If this box is checked, the Component will attempt to validate the input email address by applying fuzzy matching algorithms to the input domain. This is slower than database lookup but potentially more accurate if the domain name contains a common or transposed typo.
		Perform Web Service Lookup	If this box is checked, the Component will attempt to validate the input email address by locating the domain from a compiled and continuously updated list of valid domains. This is slower than a database lookup but potentially more accurate if the domain name is either obscure, new, or no longer valid.
	Output Columns	Mail Box Name	This column returns the portion of the email address that precedes the “@” character. For ray@melissadata.com, this column would return ray.
		Domain Name	This column returns the domain name from the parsed email address, minus the top level domain. For ray@melissadata.com, this column would return melissadata (without the .com).
		Top Level Domain	This column returns the top level domain (TLD) indicator from the input email address. For ray@melissadata.com, this would return the dot com portion.
		Top Level Domain Description	This column returns the official text description associated with the top level domain. Not all TLDs have a description.

This shows a list of the columns in your input table. Add a column to the Pass Through list to include the original contents in the output table.

Pass Through	Specify whether or not a column should be passed through to the output table(s).
Column Name	The column names from the original input table.
Current Usage	Where the column is currently being used as input.

The Contact Verify Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box.
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: Full Address Matches - The record is valid only with a valid and deliverable mailing address. Street Address Matches - The record is valid if the street address is deliverable, even if the suite information is missing. Full Address Match and Deliverable by all carriers - The record is valid only with a valid and deliverable mailing address that is also served by alternate delivery services such as Fed Ex and UPS. Non-Questionable Names - The record is valid if the name information was complete and contains no questionable information (vulgarities or common nuisance names). Valid Email Domains - The record is valid if the domain for the email address was either confirmed to be valid or, at the very least, is not known to be invalid. Valid and Allowable Email Domains - The record is valid if the domain for the email address was either confirmed to be valid or is not known to be invalid, and is not a mobile email address (which are not deliverable per FCC regulations). Full Phone Matches - The record is valid only if the phone number was verified to the 10-digit level. Full and Partial Phone Matches - The record is valid if the phone number was verified to either the 10-digit or 7-digit level.
	Custom Filter	A custom rule that would be equivalent to Pre-built rule #6 would read: “(ES01 OR ES03) AND NOT ES04.” This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “ES01” or “ES03” were returned and the result code “ES04” was not returned. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (Contact Verify)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Fuzzy Match

Overview

The Fuzzy Match Component leverages a toolbox of state-of-the-art fuzzy matching algorithms and allows user-specified granular control on match thresholds and even fine tuning of the algorithms.

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Fuzzy Match for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Fuzzy Match Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Licensing	License Key	Your License Key will activate the product for use.
Default Settings	The options selected here will be the initial settings for every comparison added from the Matches Tab.
	Upper Matching Threshold	If a comparison produces a percentage above this percentage, it will be considered a match.
	Lower Matching Threshold	If a comparison produces a percentage below this percentage, it will be considered a non-match.
	Remove Whitespace	Checking this will cause the Fuzzy Match Component to ignore any space characters as well as letter casing.
	Regular Expression Search	The Fuzzy Match Component will use this regular expression to match text in the source field and replace it according to the contents of the Regular Express Replace Field below.
	Regular Expression Replace	If this field is blank, any text that matches the Regular Express Search will be deleted from the source data.
Regular Expression Behavior	Checking the box will cause the Fuzzy Match Component to ignore upper and lower case when using the Regular Expression Search.

Test Configuration (Fuzzy Match)

The Test Configuration screen displays basic information about the component.

Customer ID	Displays the Customer ID associated with the License Key.
Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
License Expiration	Displays the date when the Fuzzy Match Component License Key will expire.
Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Global Verify Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Fuzzy Match Component.

Add Component

To add Fuzzy Match Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Fuzzy Match Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Fuzzy Match Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Fuzzy Match Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Fuzzy Match Component to bring up the interface. See Fuzzy Match Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Fuzzy Match Tabs

• Matches
• Advanced Options
• Source Pass-Through Columns
• Compare Pass-Through Columns

The Matches tab of the Fuzzy Match Component sets up the relationships between fields in the Source and Compare tables, and determines which algorithms will be used to determine the level of matches.

Source	Select a field from the Source input table that will be compared to a field in the Compare input table.
Compare	Select the matching field in the Compare table.
Match Type	Select the fuzzy matching algorithm to use when comparing the two fields. For more information on the different algorithms, see Matching Algorithms.
Upper Threshold	Anything above this percentage will be considered an exact match. Anything below this threshold but above the Lower is considered a possible match.
Lower Threshold	Anything below this level will be considered a non-match. Anything above this threshold but below the Upper is considered a possible match.
WS	White Space. Check this box to ignore spaces in the data as well as letter casing.
Search	Enter a regular expression to search for this field in every record.
Replace	Enter the text to replace data that matches the regular expression entered in Search. If Search is filled and this field is left blank, the Fuzzy Match Component will delete any matching text.
Remove Current Row	Click this button to remove the currently selected comparison from the current setup.
N-Gram Size	This setting determines the size of the substring used by the following algorithms: N-Gram Dice’s Coefficient Jaccard Similarity Overlap Coefficient For more information on the different algorithms, see Matching Algorithms.

The selections on the Advanced Options tab refine the criteria to determine a match between two records (how many fields must match or how exact the overall level of matching must be). Use this tab to set up fields in the output table that will receive the comparison data used and the percentages that determine the level of matching.

Result Codes	Enter a field name and this field will be used to store the overall match percentage for each record.
Threshold Logic	Select a rule to use when determining if two records match. The options are: Every comparison must match. At least one comparison must match. The average match percentage must fall within a certain range. A minimum number of comparisons must match.
Match Diagnostic Fields	The Fuzzy Match Component will create and populate the indicated fields. Use these to determine why certain comparisons do not produce the expected results. Fuzzy matching will create and fill one set of fields per comparison, replacing the “%” character with the comparison number in the field name.
	Match Percentage	This field will contain the exact matching percentage for each comparison. The Output Match Percentage field will contain the average for every comparison.
	Comparison Type	This field will contain the name of the matching algorithm used for this comparison.
	Search Pattern	This field will contain the search string or regular expression (if any) entered for this comparison.
	Replace Pattern	This field will contain the replacement text for each comparison.
	Source Field Name	This field will contain the name of the source table field used by this comparison.
	Compare Field Name	This field will contain the name of the compare table field used by this comparison.
	Source Field Contents	This field will contain the contents of the source table field used by this comparison.
	Compare Field Contents	This field will contain the contents of the compare table field used by this comparison.

This tab allows you to select which fields in the source table will be included in the output table.

Place a check mark next to every field from the source table that you wish to pass through to the output table. In the text box, enter the text that will be pre-appended to the field name when added to the output table.

Place a check mark next to every field from the compare table that you wish to pass through to the output table. In the text box, enter the text that will be pre-appended to the field name when added to the output table.

Matching Algorithms

The Fuzzy Match Component can use any of the following matching algorithms on any column in your database:

Exact Matching	Determines whether two strings are identical.
Jaro	Gathers common characters (in order) between the two strings, then counts transpositions between the two common strings.
Jaro-Winkler	A variation to the Jaro algorithm. Strings that have matching characters at the beginning will be accounted for and are given additional weight to similarity.
N-Gram	Counts the number of common sub-strings (grams) of a specified length between the two strings.
Dice’s Coefficient	A variation of the N-Gram algorithm. Dice’s Coefficient counts matching n-Grams but does not count extra duplicate n-Grams.
Jaccard Similarity	A variation of the N-Gram algorithm. The Jaccard Similarity is identical to the N-Gram algorithm but uses a different formula for similarity computation.
Overlap Coefficient	A variation of the N-Gram algorithm. The Overlap Coefficient is identical to the N-Gram algorithm but uses a different formula for similarity computation.
Levenshtein	The Levenshtein algorithm computes for the similarity of two strings by taking into account the amount of character mistakes. Mistakes are based off the number of incorrect characters, inserted characters, and deleted characters.
Needleman-Wunsch	A variation of the Levenshtein algorithm. Levenshtein and Needleman-Wunsch are identical except that character mistakes are given different weights depending on how far two characters are on a standard keyboard layout. For example: A to S is given a mistake weight of 0.4, while A to D is a 0.6 and A to P is a 1.0.
Smith-Waterman-Gotoh	A variation of the Needleman-Wunsch algorithm. Needleman-Wunsch and Smith-Waterman-Gotoh are identical except that character deletions are given a different weight. This effectively adds the “understanding” that the keyboarder may have tried to abbreviate one of the words.
MDKeyboard	A variation of the Smith-Waterman-Gotoh algorithm. Smith-Waterman-Gotoh and MDKeyboard are identical except that character transpositions are given a different weight. This effectively adds the “understanding” that the keyboarder may have typed in one character before another.
Longest Common Substring (LCS)	The LCS algorithm counts for the longest common set of adjacent characters between 2 strings.
Containment	The Containment algorithm will return 100% if one string is a subset of another. A 0% is returned otherwise.
Frequency	The Frequency algorithm will match the characters of one string to the characters of another without any regard to the sequence. For example “abcdef” would be considered a 100% match to “badcfe.”
SoundEx	SoundEx is a string transformation and comparison-based algorithm. For example, JOHNSON would be transformed to “J525” and JHNSN would also be transformed to “J525” which would then be considered a SoundExing match after evaluation. If the original strings are identical, SoundEx will return 100%. If the SoundEx’d strings are equal, the algorithm returns 99%. Otherwise, SoundEx will return 0%.
PhonetEx	A variation of the SoundEx Algorithm. PhonetEx takes into account letter combinations that sound alike, particularly at the start of the word (such as ‘PN’ = ‘N’, ‘PH’ = ‘F’).
Double Metaphone	A variation of the PhonetEx Algorithm. Double Metaphone performs 2 different PhonetEx-style transformations. It creates two PhonetEx-like strings (primary and alternate) for both strings. The logic used for Double Metaphone Similarity works as follows: If primary1 = primary2 and alternate1 = alternate 2, then we have a very good match (99%). If either primary1 = alternate2 or alternate1 = primary2, and alternate1=alternate2, then we have a good match (85%). If alternate 1 = alternate2, we have an acceptable match (75%).

Result Codes (Fuzzy Match)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Generalized Cleanser

Overview

Welcome to the Melissa Generalized Cleanser for SSIS. The Generalized Cleanser Component is a comprehensive tool that allows the user to standardize and cleanse their own data with respect to capitalization, punctuation, abbreviation, regular and custom expressions, and string replacement. This allows the user a high level of customization through combinations of these different actions, allowing easy standardization of any general data type.

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Generalized Cleanser Component for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Generalized Cleanser Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Either the component version or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

Generalized Cleanser SSIS Component	Component Version	The version number of the component installed on your local system.
	Build Number	The build number of the Generalized Cleanser installed on your local system.
	Generalized Cleanser Library Build	The build number of the Generalized Cleanser Library.
Licensing	License Key	This is where you enter your License Key given to you by your Melissa Sales Representative.
	License Expiration	This will show you when your License Key will expire.
	Customer ID	This will automatically update to your Customer ID if you have a valid License Key.
Generalized Cleanser Settings	Data File Path	This should point to the folder containing your .dat file for the Generalized Cleanser.
	Test Configuration	This will test your License Key and ensure you have authorization to use the Generalized Cleanser.

Add Component

To add Generalized Cleanser Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will add the Generalized Cleanser Component into your workflow.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as sources:

• Excel Files

• Flat Files

• Access Input Data Sources

Connect this Data Source to the Generalized Cleanser Component by clicking on your Data Source and dragging to the Generalized Cleanser Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Generalized Cleanser Component to bring up the interface. See Generalized Cleanser Component Settings.

Connect Output

Select the desired output destination type and click and drag from the Generalized Cleanser Component to the Destination Output. Once they are connected, configure your output.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save All to save everything in your project.

Run Project

Now the project is ready to run.

Settings

Generalized Cleanser Fields

• Component
• Expression Builder

Contents

Cleansing Details

Triggers

Cleansing Details

These are the operations you are creating to cleanse your data. The following operations are available for your use:

Case	Cleanses the casing for your data (e.x. MeLiSa DaTA → Melissa Data)
Punctuation	Cleanses the punctuation for your data (e.x. FIND EXAMPLE)
Expression	Removes your data and replaces with an expression
Regular Expression Search Replace	Searches for an expression and will replace that expression with another expression or data. (E.x. Resumé → Resum)
Adding a Search & Replace Table	The Text Search Replace Operation has the functionality to add a Search & Replace table. The Search & Replace table is used as a dictionary that contains the values to search for and the values to replace them with. Generalized Cleanser will then use the Search & Replace table during processing to make the updates to the values contained in the table. It must adhere to the following format: Regular Search Expression, followed by a TAB, the replace expression and a CR/LF. See the example below: It contains vehicle models to search for and the values to replace it with. Select the Source Field you would like to apply the Search & Replace table to. Press the + sign to add an Operation and Select the Operation Text Search Replace. Then select the Use Search & Replace Table File option. Enter the path to the search & replace table or select using the Folder option. Once added and the options are selected, press ok.
Text Search Replace	Searches for a string to replace with another string. (E.x. Volvo → Toyota)

Triggers

There are 3 triggers that you can use to determine whether or not a rule should be used for a record:

None	This will trigger on every record.
Expression	Only trigger when a record matches this expression.
Regular Expression	Only trigger when a record matches this regular expression.

You can use our Expression Elements to build your expressions, each element will have a description of what it is and does when you hover your mouse over it. You may also directly type your expression into the “Use the specified expression” box above. Once you are finished creating your expression, you have the option to test that expression for valid syntax. You may also click the “Save the above expression as a new Pre-Build Expression” for future use.

Contents

Column Names Variables String Functions/ Operators Numeric Functions/ Operators

Boolean Functions/ Operators Date/Time Functions/Operators Misc. Functions/ Operators DataType Casts

Column Names	The Columns names section lists the columns available from the input.
Variables	The Variables section lists the following system variables:
	Variable Name	Data Type	Description
	__INPUT__
String Functions/ Operators	The String Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:
	Operators	Operator	Description
		Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
		Less (<)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than the second one.
		Greater (>)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than the second one.
		Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
		Concatenate (+)	Concatenates two expressions.
		Greater or Equal (>=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second one.
		Less or Equal (<=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than or equal to the second one.
	Functions	Function	Description
		Lower()	Returns a character expression after converting uppercase characters to lowercase characters.
		Left()	Returns part of a character string starting at a specified number of characters from the left.
		LTrim()	Returns a character expression after removing leading spaces.
		Len()	Returns the number of characters in a character expression.
		PadLeft()	Retruns a character expression after padding a specified string to the left of a specified character.
		FindString()	Returns the one-based index of the specified occurrence of a character string within an expression.
		Upper()	Returns a character expression after converting lowercase characters to uppercase characters.
		Trim()	Returns a character expression after removing leading and trailing spaces.
		SubString()	Returns a part of a character expression.
		Reverse()	Returns a character expression in reverse order.
		PadRight()	Retruns a character expression after padding a specified string to the right of a specified character.
		Right()	Returns part of a character string starting at a specified number of characters from the right.
		RTrim()	Returns a character expression after removing trailing spaces.
		Replace()	Returns a character expression after replacing a string within the expression with either a different string or an empty string.
		Replicate()	Returns a character expression, replicated a specified number of times.
Numeric Functions/ Operators	The Numeric Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:
	Operators	Operator	Description
		Multiply (*)	Multiplies two numeric expressions.
		Modulus (%)	Provides the integer remainder after dividing the first numeric expression by the second one.
		Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
		Less (<)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than the second one.
		Divide (/)	Divides the first numeric expression by the second one.
		Greater (>)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than the second one.
		Subtract (-)	Subtracts the second numeric expression from the first one.
		Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
		Add (+)	Adds two numeric expressions.
		Greater or Equal (>=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second one.
		Less or Equal (<=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than or equal to the second one.
		Bitwise OR (|)	Perform a bitwise OR on two numbers.
		Bitwise AND (&)	Perform a bitwise AND on two numbers.
		Bitwise XOR (^)	Perform a bitwise EXCLUSIVE OR on two numbers.
		Bitwise NOT (~)	Perform a bitwise NOT on two numbers.
	Functions	Function	Description
		Abs()	Returns the absolute, positive value of a numeric expression.
		Sqrt()	Returns the square root of a numeric expression.
		Floor()	Returns the largest integer that is less than or equal to a numeric expression.
		Round()	Returns a numeric expression that is rounded to the specified length or precision.
		Sign()	Returns the positive (+), negative (-), or zero (0) sign of a numeric expression.
		Ln()	Returns the natural logarithm of a numeric expression.
		Log()	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a numeric expression.
		Exp()	Returns the exponent to base e of the specified expression.
		Ceiling()	Returns the smallest integer that is greater than or equal to a numeric expression.
		Square()	Returns the square of a numeric expression.
		Power()	Returns the result of raising a numeric expression to a power.
Boolean Functions/ Operators	The Boolean Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:
	Operators	Operator	Description
		Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
		Conditional (?:)	Returns one of two expressions based on the evaluation of a Boolean expression.
		Logical NOT (!)	Negates a Boolean operand.
		Logical AND (&&)	Performs a logical AND operation.
		Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
		Logical OR (||)	Performs a logical OR operation.
	Functions	Function	Description
		IsIBAN()	Returns a Boolean result based on whether an expression is a valid international bank account number (IBAN).
		IsNull()	Returns a Boolean result based on whether an expression is null.
Date/Time Functions/Operators	The Date/Time Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:
	Operators	Operator	Description
		Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
		Less (<)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than the second one.
		Greater (>)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than the second one.
		Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
		Greater or Equal (>=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second one.
		Less or Equal (<=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than or equal to the second one.
	Functions	Function	Description
		Day()	Returns an integer that represents the day of the specified date.
		GetUTCDate()	Returns the current date of the system in UTC time (Universal Time Coordinate or Greenwich Mean Time).
		Year()	Returns an integer that represents the year of the specified date.
		DateAdd()	Returns a new DT_DBTIMESTAMP value by adding a date or time interval to a specified date.
		DateDiff()	Returns the number of date and time boundaries crossed between two specified dates.
		GetDate()	Returns the current date of the system.
		DatePart()	Returns an integer representing a datepart of a date.
		Month()	Returns an integer that represents the month of the specified date.
Misc. Functions/ Operators	The Misc. Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:
	Operators	Operator	Description
		Conditional(?:)	Returns one of two expressions based on the evaluation of a Boolean expression.
	Functions	Function	Description
		Null()	Returns a null value of a requested data type.
		IsNull()	Returns a Boolean result based on whether an expression is null.
DataType Casts	The DataType Casts section lists the following system variables:
	Data Type		Description
	DT_STR		A null-terminated ANSI/MBCS character string with a maximum length of 8000 characters. (If a column value contains additional null terminators, the string will be truncated at the occurrence of the first null.)
	DT_DATE		A date structure that consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, seconds, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a fixed scale of 7 digits. The DT_DATE data type is implemented using an 8-byte floating-point number. Days are represented by whole number increments, starting with 30 December 1899, and midnight as time zero. Hour values are expressed as the absolute value of the fractional part of the number. However, a floating point value cannot represent all real values; therefore, there are limits on the range of dates that can be presented in DT_DATE. On the other hand, DT_DBTIMESTAMP is represented by a structure that internally has individual fields for year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. This data type has larger limits on ranges of the dates it can present.
	DT_DECIMAL		An exact numeric value with a fixed precision and a fixed scale. This data type is a 12-byte unsigned integer with a separate sign, a scale of 0 to 28, and a maximum precision of 29.
	DT_NUMERIC		An exact numeric value with a fixed precision and scale. This data type is a 16-byte unsigned integer with a separate sign, a scale of 0 - 38, and a maximum precision of 38.
	DT_BOOL		A Boolean value.
	DT_DBTIMESTAMP		A timestamp structure that consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a fixed scale of 3 digits.
	DT_STR		Convert expression to a Unicode string of maximum length <len>
	DT_TEXT		Convert expression to a ANSI/MBCS string using code page <codepage>
	DT_NTEXT		Convert expression to a Unicode string.
	DT_I1		Convert expression to an 8-bit signed integer.
	DT_I2		Convert expression to a 16-bit signed integer.
	DT_I4		Convert expression to a 32-bit signed integer.
	DT_I8		Convert expression to a 64-bit signed integer.
	DT_UI1		Convert expression to an 8-bit unsigned integer.
	DT_UI2		Convert expression to an 16-bit unsigned integer.
	DT_UI4		Convert expression to an 32-bit unsigned integer.
	DT_UI8		Convert expression to an 64-bit unsigned integer.
	DT_R4		Convert expression to a single-precision (32-bit) floating point number.
	DT_R8		Convert expression to a double-precision (64-bit) floating point number.
	DT_CY		Convert expression to a fixed-point decimal with a scale of 4.
	DT_DBDATE		Convert expression to a date. yyyy-mm-dd
	DT_DBTIME		Convert expression to a time. hh:mm:ss
	DT_DBTIME2		Convert expression to a time. hh:mm:ss[.fffffff]
	DT_DBTIMESTAMP		Convert expression to a timestamp. yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss[.fff]
	DT_DBTIMESTAMP2		Convert expression to a timestamp. yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss[.fffffff]
	DT_DBTIMESTAMPOFFSET		Convert expression to a timestamp offset. yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss[.fffffff] [{+|-} hh:mm]
	DT_FILETIME		Convert expression to a filetime. yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:fff

Result Codes (Generalized Cleanser)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Global Verify

Overview

• Verifies international addresses for over 240 countries.

• Transliterates many major character sets and displays output in either native or Roman characters

• Geocodes international postal addresses by adding a latitude-longitude coordinate.

• Verifies phone numbers from over 230 countries and territories, append useful geographic information, and perform, premium real-time checks to distinguish live numbers and phone types.

• Verifies and parse email addresses, correct common typographical errors, and standardize email addresses. Features real-time email mailbox validation which removes up to 95% of bad emails.

• Parse, genderize, and standardize personal names as well as able to standardize company names

• List of supported Countries

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Global Verify for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Global Verify Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Melissa Cloud

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for the Global Verify Component to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent to the Melissa Cloud per request.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for the Global Verify Component to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times the Global Verify Component should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (Global Verify Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

Global Verify Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Global Verify Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Web Services Connectivity Info	Connect	Displays an icon indicating if there is a connection to the web service or not.
	Web Service	Displays the name of the web service.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the Property Web Service.
	Service Request	Displays the Web Service request status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.

On-Premise

For Melissa On-Premise processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly. If you have an on-premise License Key, the on-premise settings buttons should now appear. Please check the countries you want to be processed locally on your machine by clicking the checkbox. Make sure to put the data file path where all of your global data files are stored.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for the Global Verify Component to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous objects to be initialized and threaded to run in parallel. Recommended one thread per core.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent to the object per request.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for the Global Verify Component to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems or hard drive I/O.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times the Global Verify Component should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (Global Verify On Premise)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

Global Verify Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Global Verify Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Web Services Connectivity Info	Connect	Displays an icon indicating if there is a connection to the web service or object initialization.
	Web Service	Displays the name of the web service or object.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the Web Service or Object DLL.
	Service Request	Displays the Web/On-Premise Service request status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.

Add Component

To add the Global Verify Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Global Verify Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Global Verify Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Global Verify Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Global Verify Component to bring up the interface. See Global Verify Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Global Verify Tabs

• Name
• Address
• Phone
• Email
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

Parse and genderize a full name into its respective components.

Input Columns	Full Name	Select the field name that will contain the name information to be parsed. This field can contain one or two full names, such as “Mr. John Q. Smith, Jr.” or “John Q. and Mary S. Smith.”
	Company	If the database records may be business type, include the company name here.
	Country	The Country name input will be used during processing as a reference point to use the selected Country’s common language for more efficient Name parsing. The Country name, abbreviation or ISO code can be used.
Name Options	Name Order Hint	The Name Order Hint tells the Component in what order the name components will be found in the input full name, normal name order, last name first, or a mixture. The default is Varying. The options are:
		Option	Description
		DefinitelyFull	Name will always be treated as normal name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation.
		VeryLikelyFull	Name will be treated as normal name order unless inverse order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation.
		ProbablyFull	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward normal name order.
		Varying	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with no bias toward either name order.
		ProbablyInverse	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward inverse name order.
		VeryLikelyInverse	Name will be treated as inverse name order unless normal order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation.
		DefinitelyInverse	Name will always be treated as inverse name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation.
		MixedFirstName	Name field is expected to only contain prefixes, first, and middle names.
		MixedLastName	Name field is expected to only contain last names and suffixes.
	Middle Name Logic	This option controls how the Component will parse the Middle Name, depending on the method selected. The default setting is Parse Logic.
		Option	Description
		Parse Logic	In the absence of a hyphen, recognizable last names in the middle of a full name are treated as part of a hyphenated last name.
		Hyphenated Last	The middle word is assumed to be part of the last name.
		Middle Name	The middle word is assumed to be a middle name.
	Correct Misspellings in First Name	If checked, the Component will use a database of common given names to correct obvious misspellings.
Company Output	Company	The company name.
Output Name Columns	Name 1	These fields apply to the first full name detected.
	Name 2	These fields apply to the second full name detected. If the FullName input property contains multiple names, they’ll be located under Name 2.
	Prefix	This field returns any part of the name that precedes the given name, such as “Mr.,” “Ms.,” or “Dr.”
	First Name	This field returns the given name.
	Middle Name	This field returns the middle names or initials.
	Last Name	This field returns the family name.
	Suffix	This field returns any part of the name that follows the family name, such as degrees (“MD” or “PhD”) and generational indicators (“IV” or “Jr.”.)
	Gender	This field returns a gender indicator.
	Nickname	This is a string value of an identified nickname from an inputted full name. A nickname is defined as an internal string surrounded by one of the nickname identifying characters [double quote], [single quote] or [parenthesis]. The identified nickname will be returned unstandardized with the identifier intact.
	Professional Title	This is a string value of the professional title from an inputted full name. Many countries within the European Union identify professional titles as a datatype preceding the first name but separate from a name prefix.

Attention

Global Verify Address On Premise - 32bit mdGlobalAddr.dll deprecation

The Global Address Object 32bit mdGlobalAddr.dll file was deprecated on April 24th 2023. SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise users will be directly affected and will not be able to continue using SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise option. For more information, check SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise Users – Global Address Object 32bit dll Deprecation below.

SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise Users – Global Address Object 32bit dll Deprecation

The reason for deprecating the 32bit mdGlobalAddr.dll is due to issues encountered with backwards compatibility. As Visual Studio is a 32bit program and utilizes the 32bit directory during processing. The 32bit mdGlobalAddr.dll deprecation will directly affect functionality for SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise users. SSIS Global Verify Cloud users will not be affected by this change.

Transition Recommendations

Existing SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise clients are encouraged to transition over to Melissa’s other Global Address Verification platforms, such as:

Global Address Verification Web Service	Provides identical functionality to Melissa’s SSIS Global Verify Address On Premise product but over a Cloud environment. The Global Address Web Service is not slated for deprecation any time soon. Global Address Verification Docs page: Global Address Verification
Unison by Melissa	Is a platform as a service that provides access to Melissa’s powerful Global Address Verification service. The Unison Platform allows enterprise level clients to create a self-hosted system housing the entire set of Melissa libraries and capabilities into one extensible platform. Unison by Melissa Docs page: Unison
Global Address Object API	Consume the Global Address Object directly. This includes the libraries and data files needed to get started with Melissa’s powerful Global Address Verification API. Global Address Object API Docs page: Global Address Object

For assistance for transitioning to Melissa’s Global Address Web Service contact Tech@melissadata.com

Contents

Input Columns Address Options

Output Columns Additional Output Columns

Map the address input and output fields. Navigate between pages 1 to 4 by using the Next and Back buttons on the bottom of the window.

Input Columns

Organization	The name of any organization associated with the address record.
Address Line 1-8 (Address Line 1 Required)	Input fields for the address. Should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs. At least one Address Line is required.
Last Name (US only)	This field has been added to allow the use of a Melissa proprietary database. For addresses missing a secondary like a suite or apartment, we can use the last name and append that information for residential addresses. This feature is only available for the US.
Double-Dependent Locality	The smallest population center data element. Depends on the Locality and Dependent Locality elements.
Dependent Locality	A smaller population center data element. Depends on the Locality element. US Term: Urbanization. In terms of US Addresses, this element applies only to Puerto Rican addresses. It is used to break ties when a ZIP Code is linked to multiple instances of the same address.
Locality (Required)	The most common population center data element. US Term: City. Canadian Term: Municipality. See Note: For US and Canada Only.
Sub-Administrative Area	The smallest geographic data element. US Term: County.
Administrative Area (Required)	The most common geographic data element. US Term: State. Canadian Term: Province. See Note: For US and Canada Only.
Sub-National Area	The administrative region within a country on an arbitrary level below that of the sovereign state.
Postal Code (Required)	The complete postal code for a particular delivery point. US Term: ZIP. Canadian Term: Postcode. See Note: For US and Canada Only.
Country (Required)	The country name, abbreviation, or code.
If Country field is not specified or is empty, use country	If the Country field is not specified or empty, select a country in the drop-down menu to use.
Note For US and Canada Only You must set either Locality and Administrative Area or Postal Code. If all three elements are provided and the Postal Code is incorrect, it can be corrected from the data on the Locality and Administrative Area.

Adddress Options

Country of Origin	This is used to determine whether or not to include the country name as the last line in Formatted Address Acceptable Value: Any valid ISO-3166-1 Alpha-2, ISO-3166-1 Alpha-3, or ISO-3166-1 Numeric code. If blank, invalid, or the same as the destination country, then the destination country is not appended to the end of the formatted address. If valid and different from the destination country, then the destination country is appended to the formatted address. US or US Territory: If Country of Origin and destination country being verified are both US or US Territories then the country will not be appended to Formatted Address. US Territories will have “Unite States of America” appended if the Country of Origin is not a US Territory, but the Country Name and ISO codes will be that of the territory. Canada is treated like any other non-US Territory.
Output Script	The character set to use to format the output data. Match Input: Return the output in the same script used in the input. Latin: Convert all output to the latin character set.
Line Separator	The delimiter to use to separate multiple lines in the data returned by Formatted Address.
Delivery Lines	Select the addressing style that best describes the type of data that you would like to output.
*Applies to US or CA Addresses*
USPreferredCityNames	If set to on, we will override and return only the USPS preferred city name. When set to off it will leave valid vanity city names as preferred by the USPS.
USStandardizationType	When set to Auto this uses the input as a guide for how to standardize. When set to Short (Default) will leave the US address in short abbreviated form as preferred by the USPS. For example Short: 100 W Main St East For example Long: 100 West Main Street East
DetailedResults	This is for users that have experience or code using Address Object and would like to have those codes alongside the Global Address result codes. When set to ON (For US and CA addresses only) this will return more detailed and different result codes that come from our Address Object product. When set to OFF (Default) No extra result codes will be returned.

Output Columns

Organization	Matches the organization input field. It is not modified or populated by Global Verify Component.
Address Line 1-8	Will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
Country	The country name, abbreviation, or code.
Latitude (US and Canada Only)	This is parsed from the input.
Longitude (US and Canada Only)	This is parsed from the input.
Dependent Locality	A district, area, or neighborhood (Turkey) within a Locality required to uniquely identify an address.
Locality	A city (US), town, or municipality (Canada) that is the most common population center element within an Administrative Area.
Administrative Area	A state (US), province (Canada), or canton (Switzerland) contained within a Country.
Postal Code	The postal code or ZIP code (US) for the input address.
Formatted Address	The address in the correct format for mailing from the country specified. This includes the Organization as the first line, one or more lines in the origin country’s format, and the destination country (if required).
Address Type (US and Canada Only)	Returns a one-character code for the type of address coded. For a complete list of these codes, see Address Type Codes.
Address Key (US and Canada Only)	This is a unique key for the address. The Address Key can be used by other Melissa services, such as Geocoder or Delivery Indicator.
ISO 3166-1 Country Code	Alpha-2	Letter code of the output country. Ex: For United States; Canada; and the Philippines: US; CA; PH.
	Alpha-3	Letter code of the output country. Ex: For United States; Canada; and the Philippines: USA; CAN; PHL.
	Numeric	Numeric code of the output country. Ex: For United States; Canada; and the Philippines: 840; 124; 608.
	Country Subdivision Code	This is the ISO3166-2 code for country subdivisions, usually tied to the administrative area for a country. The format is the 2 letter country code followed by a dash followed by 2 or 3 characters or two numbers. Examples are: US-CA, CN-16, or AU-VIC. Currently, this field is only populated for some countries. These countries are: AE, AR, AT, AU, BB, BE, BH, BR, BS, CA, CH, CL, CN, CO, CR, DE, DK, DM, DO, ES, FI, FJ, FR, GB, GH, GT, GY, HN, ID, IE, IL, IN, IS, IT, JP, KR, KW, LT, LU, LV, MX, MY, NC, NG, NI, NL, NO, NZ, PE, PH, PK, PL, PR, PT, RS, SA, SG, SI, SV, TH, TR, UA, US, UY, VN. Disclaimer - On-Premise does not support this field and will return empty.

Additional Output Columns

Content

Parsed Dependent Thoroughfare Columns Parsed Regional Columns Parsed Postal Facility Columns Parsed Thoroughfare Columns

Parsed Sub-Premises Columns Output Columns Extra US Only

Parsed Dependent Thoroughfare Columns

Thoroughfare	Name of the street or block data element.
Pre-Direction	Prefix directional contained within the Thoroughfare field.
Leading Type	Leading thoroughfare type indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Name	Name indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Trailing Type	Trailing thoroughfare type indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Post-Direction	Postfix directional contained within the Thoroughfare field.

Parsed Regional Columns

Double-Dependent Locality	An area or village (UK) within a Dependent Locality required to uniquely identify an address.
Sub-Administrative Area	Not commonly used. An arbitrary region smaller than a Country but larger than an Administrative Area.
Sub-National Area	A county (US) or region larger than the Locality but smaller than the Administrative Area.

Parsed Postal Facility Columns

Post Box

Post box information for a particular delivery point.

Parsed Thoroughfare Columns

Premises Type	Leading premise type indicator within premises field.
Thoroughfare	Name of the street or block data element.
Pre-Direction	Prefix directional contained within the Thoroughfare field.
Leading Type	Leading thoroughfare type indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Premises Number	Alphanumeric indicator within premises field.
Name	Name indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Trailing Type	Trailing thoroughfare type indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Post-Direction	Postfix directional contained within the Thoroughfare field.

Parsed Sub-Premises Columns

Building	Descriptive name identifying an individual location.
Sub Premises	Alphanumeric code identifying an individual location.
Sub-Premises Type	Sub premises type indicator within the premises field.
Sub-Premises Number	Sub premises number indicator within the premises field.

Output Columns

MelissaAddressKey	This is a globally unique and persistent key for the location, even if parts of the address change. When an address is fully validated this field returns a 10-digit proprietary key for the address. With AddressKey (US and Canada only), if an address zip code changes, the AddressKey would also change. Melissa Address Key (MAK) is independent and will not change. This makes MAK a good way to permanently identify and locate addresses. Once you have a MAK it can be used as an input in most Melissa services and thus is a good tool for deduping. Currently available for US, CA, GB, IT, SI, PT, FR, AU, SG, NL, VN, BM, and TR with many more countries planned for the future.
MelissaAddressKeyBase	Every full address has its own Melissa Address Key (MAK). If that address is a suites or apartment, we will also return a Melissa Address Key Base (BaseMAK) that corresponds to the overall building. This provides a link between all the individual MAK addresses that belong to the same building. This field also returns a 10-digit proprietary key. Note, if we can validate the address to the building but not the suite, we can return just the BaseMAK. Currently available for countries that have support for MelissaAddressKey.
DeliveryIndicator	This field returns a one character code that indicates if the address is a residence (R), business (B), or unknown (U). It is not available for all countries. Currently, it is available only for the US but more countries are planned for future inclusion.
PostalCodeType	This is a country dependent field. This field returns an identifier that represents the type of postal code returned. Currently only the US uses this field.
	Code	Definition
	P	PO Box Postal Code
	U	Unique Postal Code usually assigned to a large organization or government institution.
	M	Military Postal Code
	Empty	Regular postal code
SubPremiseLevel	This is a secondary piece of subpremise information used to describe a more generic division of the subpremise. For example, if you have an address like “1123 Market Way, Floor 12 Apt 25A” then the Subpremises will be “Apt 25A” and the SubPremiseLevel will be “Floor 12”. This value is not widely used in official address data. SubPremiseLevelType and SubPremiseLevelNumber make up the SubPremiseLevel. In our example, the SubPremiseLevelType is “Floor” and the SubPremiseLevelNumber is “12”.
SubBuilding	This value describes a smaller division of the building. For example, if an address has a building name that is a part of a larger set of buildings, then the subbuilding may be populated. SubBuildingType and SubBuildingNumber make up the parts of SubBuilding.
UTC	Returns the Coordinated Universal Time number in format of UTC+#. Note that there are timezones that are not whole hours only, like UTC+9:30.
DST	Returns a Y or a N based on if the country or area of the input observes daylight savings time. Note that the value returned by the UTC output does not change based on whether the country/area is currently in daylight savings time for not. We will only return the standard timezone and this flag to indicate is daylight savings is observed.
CensusKey	This is a country dependent field. It is designed to return a code that correspond to the census division information for a country. Currently, this field is only returned for the US.
	Code	Definition
	US	The CensusKey for the US is a 15 or 16 digit code that is made up of the following components: FIPS Code, Census Tract, Census Block, and CensusBlockGroup if it exists
PostOfficeLocation	This field, if available for a country, returns the value that is associated to the location of the post office in relation to the address. This value may or may not be used in the official mailing address for the country in question. Currently, these are the countries we will return the data for: Serbia and Slovakia.
	Code	Definition
	Serbia	The PostOfficeLocation contains the old 5 digit postal number and name. The postal code field will contain the new 6 digit PAK number.
	Slovakia	The PostOfficeLocation returns the name of the post office location if it is not the same as the delivery address locality.
DeliveryPointSuffix	This is a country dependent field. This field returns an identifier that represents a suffix code usually tied to a delivery point. For US This returns the 2 digit delivery point assigned by the USPS to an DPV validated address. For GB This is a 2 character (first is numerical, 2nd character is alphabetic) that is assigned by Royal Mail. When added to the postal code, this allows each live delivery point to be uniquely identified.

Extra US Only

Extras option	This element is usually not populated but is reserved to be able to return less used fields if the user requests. Currently, we are using this to return some US only fields. This output requires an additional output Destination component to be added to the project. If Extras is ON, we can return additional outputs. These outputs are presented in a different format. They will look like this below.
	Field	Definition
	CBSA Outputs	Core-Based Statistical Areas (CBSA) outputs. These values are assigned by the US Census.
	CBSACode
	CBSADivisionCode
	CBSADivisionLevel
	CBSADivisionTitle
	CBSALevel
	CBSATitle
	CarrierRoute	Carrier Route Code assigned by the USPS.
	CensusBlock	The Census block number from the most recent yearly census
	CensusTract	The Census tract number from the most recent yearly census
	CongressionalDistrict	The congressional district number for the address
	CountyFIPS	The Census FIPS number from the most recent yearly census
	CountyName	The county name that corresponds to the county FIPS code
	CountySubdivisionCode	The county subdivision code value as defined by the US Census
	CountySubdivisionName	The county subdivision name value as defined by the US Census
	DeliveryPointCheckDigit	The single digit value that acts as a checksum to the delivery point code
	DeliveryPointCode	The 2 digit delivery point code as assigned by the USPS
	ElementarySchoolDistrictCode	Returns a 5 digit string representing the elementary school district code for the address
	ElementarySchoolDistrictName	Returns a 5 digit string representing the elementary school district code for the address
	PlaceCode	The FIPS Place code as defined by the Census
	PlaceName	The FIPS Place name as defined by the Census
	SecondarySchoolDistrictCode	The secondary school district code for the address
	SecondarySchoolDistrictName	The secondary school district name for the address
	StateDistrictLower	Returns a 3 digit string representing the Lower State District Code for the requested record
	StateDistrictUpper	Returns a 3 digit string representing the Upper State District Code for the requested record
	UnifiedSchoolDistrictCode	Returns a 5 digit string representing the Unified School District Code if the address is in a unified school district
	UnifiedSchoolDistrictNameString	Returns a 5 digit string representing the Unified School District Name if the address is in a unified school district

Verify a phone number as valid and append geographic information for the wire center.

Input Columns	Phone Number	The phone number for the input column.
	Country	The country name or code associated with the input phone number. If the above Country field is empty, use country Use this if no Country field is specified or a record’s country field is blank. Select the Country from which dialing is done Specify the Country the dialing is done from.
Output Columns	Phone Number	The standardized output phone number.
	Phone Subscriber Number	The subscriber number associated with the inputted phone number. The subscriber number contains significant leading digits that further define the local exchange area and/or service.
	County Name	The name of the country for the inputted phone number.
	Phone Country Dialing Code	A digit, or combination of digits dialed after the international prefix.
	International Prefix	The international exit code needed to call a number outside of the dialing country. If the input country and country of origin differ, this will return the digit(s) required to be dialed before the country code.
	National Prefix	A digit, or combination of digits that must be dialed before an area (city) code when calling a number within the same country but outside the numbering area.
	National Destination Code	A digit, or combination of digits that identifies a numbering area within a country (or group of countries) and/or network/services.
	Locality	City. The locality associated with the inputted phone number.
	Administrative Area	State. The administrative area associated with the inputted phone number.
	Language	The predominant language of the phone’s detected geographical location.
	UTC	The universal time code for the time zone associated with the inputted phone number. The format will be: +/- hh:mm.
	DST	Daylight Savings Time. Returns a ‘Y’ (for yes) or ‘N’ (for no) to distinguish whether the region of the inputted phone number observes daylight savings time.
	Latitude	The geographic coordinate of the locale, city, municipality, or other geographically identifiable service area of the exchange measured in degrees north or south of the equator.
	Longitude	The geographic coordinate of the locale, city, municipality, or other geographically identifiable service area of the exchange measured in degrees east or west of the Greenwich Meridian.
	Carrier	Returns the name of the phone’s carrier.
	Country Abbreviation	Returns the abbreviation of the country for the inputted phone number.
	International Phone Number	This is the number you would dial, given your output fields, in order to successfully send a call. This number can change based on whether a Country of Origin is submitted or not.
	Postal Code	The zip code that corresponds to a locality inside the United States. Since this is US only, all other countries will have PostalCode blank.
Phone Number Verification Options	Express Mode	This option will do the following lookups in the order shown: ITED lookup Cassandra MasterPhone cache lookup (check HLR Country Coverage section for more info).
	Premium Mode	This option will do the following lookups in the order shown: ITED lookup Cassandra MasterPhone cache lookup If the phone belongs in a country that our third-party vendor supports Active Line validation for* AND lookup is more than 30 days, then do HLR lookup
	DefaultCallingCode	Is used when the country could not be detected from the phone number or country input. A calling code is a sequence of digits often found after the leading ‘+’ and is unique to a country/region. By default, this value is blank. For more information on country calling codes, please see https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_country_calling_codes.

Verify the domain of an email address as well as correct syntax, typos, and update older domain names.

Input Columns	Email Address	Select the field containing the input email address.
Output Columns	Email Address	The name for the email address output column.
	Mail Box Name	The name for the mail box output column.
	Domain Name	The name for the domain output column.
	Top Level Domain	The name for the top level domain output column.
	Top Level Domain Description	The name for the top level domain description output column.
	Domain Age Estimated	The estimated age of the domain in days.
	Domain Expiration Date	The date the domain expires/expired in the YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS format.
	Domain Created Date	The date the domain was created in the YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS format.
	Domain Updated Date	The date the domain was last updated in the YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS format.
	Domain Email	The email associated with the domain.
	Domain Organization	The organization associated with the domain.
	Domain Address 1	The street address associated with the domain.
	Domain Locality	The locality associated with the domain.
	Domain Administrative Area	The administrative area associated with the domain.
	Domain Postal Code	The postal code associated with the domain.
	Domain Country	The country associated with the domain.
	Domain Country Code	The country code associated with the domain.
	Domain Availability	Check to see if domain is available for purchase.
	Domain Private Proxy	Check if domain is behind a private proxy.
	Deliverability Confidence Score	Returns the probability [0-100]% of an email sent to this mailbox will be successfully delivered.
	Privacy Flag	The top level domains or countries that may be sensitive to privacy laws. Returns Y for yes and N for no.
	MX Server	Returns which MX Server was used to validate the email address. Only available in Premium Mode.
Mailbox Verification Options	Express	Check the Email Address against the Web Service Email Reference Data.
	Premium	Check the Email Address against the Web Service Email Reference Data. If the Email has not been verified within the last 3 days in the Web Service Reference Data, run the Email through real-time Email Verification. Note: The ‘Off’ and ‘Mixed’ options have been deprecated.
Advanced Email Options	Days Since Last Verified	Premium Mode Only You can choose how fresh you want your data. By setting a higher value, you will receive faster responses but the data will not be as fresh. You can set this value from 3 to 365 days.
	Domain Correction ON/OFF	Activates fuzzy email domain correction if the domain is a suspected typo.
	Domain Information ON/OFF	Activates output fields for WhoIS domain information.

This shows a list of the columns in your input table. If you check the box next to a column name, the contents of that column will be passed to the output table without modification. Add a column to the Pass Through list to include the original contents in the output table.

Column Name	Column names from the original input table
Current Usage	Column is currently being used as input

The Global Verify Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with a pre-built filter for a common application: Fully Verified DeliveryPoint Addresses Only (AV24 and AV25) Fully Verified Addresses Only (AV2*) Partially Verified Address or Better (AV*) Partially Verified Addresses Only (AV1*)
	Custom Filter	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (Global Verify)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

• Address Type Result Codes

IP Locator

Overview

• Returns geographic data for a given IP address

• Latitude, Longitude, City, State, Zip Code, County, and ISP Information are all returned

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of IP Locator for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the IP Locator Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Processing Mode	License Key	Your License Key will activate the product for use.
	Community Edition	The Community Edition of IP Locator allows you to explore the full capabilities of this component (with some limitations). Contact a Melissa sales representative (call 1-800-MELISSA) for licensing information to unlock this component’s full functionality.
	On-Premise	Processing will be performed on this machine using local data files. This method is the fastest and most secure option as no data leaves your premises. It is ideal for large batch processing where speed and/or security is a concern, but requires periodic updates to be performed on each machine.
	Melissa Cloud	Processing will be performed on Melissa’s servers using Web service protocols over the internet. This method is slower but no maintenance is required. It is ideal for processing smaller files and for quickly running this component without installing the local data files.
	Dedicated Cloud	Processing will be performed on a dedicated Contact Verification Server using Web service protocols. These servers may be hosted locally or remotely and will be dedicated to your organization for increased speed and security.

Processing Mode

• Community Edition
• On-Premise
• Melissa Cloud
• Dedicated Cloud

Data File Path:

This should point to the folder on the local system that contains the IP Locator Component and its data files. The default path should work unless you install the component to a different folder.

After entering the Data Path, click the Test Configuration button immediately below the Data File Path to verify that the Data Path was entered correctly.

Test Configuration (IP Locator Community)

The Test Configuration screen for On-Premise Processing displays basic information about the object libraries being used by the IP Locator.

Community Object	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date when the IP Locator Component license will expire.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the IP Locator Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	IP Locator Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the IP Locator Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the IP Locator Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.

Data File Path:

This should point to the folder on the local system that contains the IP Locator Component and its data files. The default path should work unless you install the component to a different folder.

After entering the Data Path, click the Test Configuration button immediately below the Data File Path to verify that the Data Path was entered correctly.

Test Configuration (IP Locator On-Premise)

The Test Configuration screen for On-Premise Processing displays basic information about the object libraries being used by the IP Locator.

IP Locator SSIS Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date when the IP Locator Component license will expire.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the IP Locator Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
IP Locator Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the IP Locator Object.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the IP Locator Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the IP Locator Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Database Expiration Date	Displays the date when the IP Locator Object data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for IP Locator to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for IP Locator to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times IP Locator should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (IP Locator Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest IP Locator software installed on your system.

IP Locator Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the IP Locator Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
IP Locator Web Service	Service Response	Displays the Web Service response status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the IP Locator Web Service.

Server URL	This is the internet or intranet address of the server to be used by the IP Locator for processing. Check with your network administrator if you need help with this setting.
Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for IP Locator to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Enable Compression	Check this to enable GZip compression. This can have up to a 10% increase in speed.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Appliance to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent in a single request. A single request may contain between 1 – 100 records. It is recommended to set this value to 100 for optimal throughput.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for IP Locator to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times IP Locator should re-send a request to the Appliance due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Enable this option to stop file processing when any exception is thrown. Disabling this option will disregard any exceptions and continue processing your file.
Failover to MD Servers	Check this box to use Cloud (Melissa Cloud) processing as a redundant backup for Local Appliance (Dedicated Cloud) processing. You must have a valid License Key and also configure the Web settings in addition to the Local Appliance settings.

Add Component

To add IP Locator Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the IP Locator Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the IP Locator Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the IP Locator Component.

Configure Component

Double click the IP Locator Component to bring up the interface. See IP Locator Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

IP Locator Tabs

• Input/Output
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

Input Column	The Input/Output tab requires data from a single field in order to populate its output fields.
	IP Address	Select or enter the field IP Address that will contain the IP Address information to be parsed. This field accepts a string value that must contain a full, well-formed IP address. A well formed IP address contains four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by periods. If you do not set a field for IP address, the Component will not parse name information.
Output Columns	Use this column to map the column names that will receive the verified IP address information. You may select existing columns or create new columns by entering the column names in the boxes.
	Domain	This field returns the domain name associated with the submitted IP address. If the institution that owns the submitted IP address holds a domain name, such as “melissadata.com” or “cox.net,” this function will return that name.
	ISP Name	This field returns the name of the internet service provider (ISP) to which the submitted IP address is assigned.
	City	This field returns the name of the city where the institution owning the submitted IP address is located, if available.
	State/Region	This field returns a string value containing the name of any regional subdivision within the country of origin for the submitted IP address. For IP addresses based in the United States, this function will return the name of the State in which the IP address is located. In other countries, this field may return the name of the city, another regional description or an empty string.
	Zip/Postal Code	This field returns the ZIP Code associated with the submitted IP address.
	Country	This field will return a country name if the matching IP address record also contains a city and, in the U.S., a ZIP Code. Records that do not contain these pairs will not return country information.
	Country Abbreviation	This field will return a country name if the matching IP address record also contains a city and, in the U.S., a ZIP Code. Records that do not contain these pairs will not return country information Records for ISP located within the following U.S. territories will return the territory name and abbreviation for the country, rather than that of the United States.
	Latitude	This field returns the city latitude for the submitted IP address.
	Longitude	This field returns the city longitude for the submitted IP address.
	Connection Speed	This field returns the connection speed for the submitted IP address.
	Connection Type	This field returns the connection type for the submitted IP address.
	Proxy Description	This field returns the proxy description for the submitted IP address.
	Proxy Type	This field returns the proxy type for the submitted IP address.
	UTC	This field returns the UTC for the submitted IP address.
	Continent	This field returns the continent for the submitted IP address.

This shows a list of the columns in your input table. If you check the box next to a column name, the contents of that column will be passed to the output table without modification. Add a column to the Pass Through list to include the original contents in the output table.

Column Name:

Column names from the original input table

Current Usage:

Column is currently being used as input

The IP Locator Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: IP Address Found in Database IP Address Unknown IP Address is a proxy IP Address was empty or not well formed IP not Initialized
	Custom Filter	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (IP Locator)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

MatchUp

Overview

The MatchUp Component is an extremely fast and powerful tool that is used to find and eliminate duplicate records, specifically in the contact record domain. The MatchUp Component enhances the efficiency and effectiveness of your database by giving you the ability to eliminate duplicated customer and prospect records with user specified customizable criteria to realize a single, accurate view of each customer.

Editions

The MatchUp Component for SSIS has three different editions. Each edition has a different level of utility, with the Professional edition offering the full functionality of MatchUp.

The following chart displays the level of utility of each edition.

Edition	Community Edition	Lite Edition	Standard Edition
Available Matchcodes	Address	Address	Address
	Address, Last	Address, Last	Address, Last
	Address, Last, First	Address, Last, First	Address, Last, First
	Address, APT	Address, APT	Address, APT
	Address, APT, Last	Address, APT, Last	Address, APT, Last
	Address, APT, Last, First	Address, APT, Last, First	Address, APT, Last, First
	Address, Fuzzy Last	Address, Fuzzy Last	Address, Fuzzy Last
	International Address	International Address	International Address
	General (40)	General (40)	General (40)
		Address, Last Name, Gender	Address, Last Name, Gender
		Address, Company	Address, Company
		Address, Company AND Last Name	Address, Company AND Last Name
		Address, Company AND Last Name, First Name	Address, Company AND Last Name, First Name
		Address, Company OR Last Name	Address, Company OR Last Name
		Address, Company OR Last Name, First Name	Address, Company OR Last Name, First Name
		United Kingdom Address	United Kingdom Address
		Address, Fuzzy Last Name, Init First Name	Address, Fuzzy Last Name, Init First Name
		Address, Fuzzy Last Name, Nickname	Address, Fuzzy Last Name, Nickname
		Name, Address, Proximity Match	Name, Address, Proximity Match
Custom Matchcodes	✗	✗	✓
Record Limit	50,000	1,000,000	Unlimited
License Required	✗	✓	✓

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of MatchUp for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the MatchUp Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

On-Premise

The On-Premise Settings dialog is where you enter the basic information required for the MatchUp Component to connect to the underlying Melissa libraries.

License Key	Your License Key will activate the product for use.
Data File Path	This should point to the folder on the local system that contains the MatchUp Component and its data files. The default path should work unless you install the component to a different folder.
Temporary Work File Path	Enter the path to the folder where MatchUp component will create temporary files. These files will be deleted automatically once the process is finished.

Test Configuration (MatchUp On-Premise)

The Test Configuration screen for On-Premise Processing displays basic information about the object libraries being used by MatchUp.

SSIS Component	Customer ID	Displays the Customer ID associated with the License Key.
	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Version	Displays the License Key version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date when the MatchUp Component License Key will expire.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the MatchUp Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
MatchUp Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the MatchUp Object.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the MatchUp Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Database Expiration Date	Displays the date when the MatchUp Object data files will expire. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the MatchUp Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.

Add Component

To add MatchUp Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the MatchUp Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the MatchUp Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the MatchUp Component.

Configure Component

Double click the MatchUp Component to bring up the interface. See MatchUp Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

MatchUp Tabs

• Matchcode
• Field Mapping
• Options
• Survivorship/Pass-Through
• Lookup Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

Matchcodes are sets of rules that tell MatchUp component which data fields to consider when determining if two records are duplicates. MatchUp component uses the matchcode to construct a “match key”, a simplified string of characters that represents the information within the record, enough to determine if the given records is unique or a duplicate.

If you would like to copy and edit one of these default matching strategies, or create a new matchcode from scratch, select File from the menu and click Matchcode Editor.

For more information on the Matchcode Editor, see Matchcode Editor.

This tab maps which source column and its corresponding datatype will be used for each matchcode component.

Source Mapping	These are the mappings for the table used to provide the records to be deduped for output. For a single table process, this Source is required. You cannot configure the component with a single Input source mapped into the Lookup pin.
Lookup Mapping	These are the mappings for the table used as a filter when matched against Source records. The Options tab allows you to specify whether only the Source records matching the Lookup records (intersected) will be output, or whether these matches will be suppressed from the output.
*Lookup Mapping is HIDDEN when there is only a single input source connected to the MatchUp Component.
Matchcode Data	For each component in a matchcode, this is the associated data type.
Input Column	For every matchcode component, you must map in the table column which will provide the data needed to compare records. You are only required to map one address line if the source contains a single address column.
Input Data Type	For each input column provided, an additional mapping is required to tell the component the format of the incoming data. This allows you to process tables in various formats without having to pre-parse input data to satisfy matchcode component datatypes. For example, a matchcode requiring a last name can receive a FullName, LastName, InverseName, etc. as inputs. The component will correctly parse and extract the input data needed to build the match key.

The Options tab allows you to specify which of the available output results you want returned.

Quick Access - Golden Record

Last Updated Most Complete

Data Quality Score Custom Expressions

Output Columns	In addition to the source data, you will often want to output processing information about the disposition of a record. This allows you to analyze the results in a number of ways.
	Result Codes	This field displays the results of the comparison, whether the record is unique or is a duplicate, was suppressed or intersected, which matchcode combination resulted in a match, etc. See MatchUp Result Codes for a list of possible Result Codes that the component can return.
	Dupe Group	Each group of matching records is assigned a sequential unique group number. This field displays the group number that the record, whether unique or a member of a duplicate grouping, is in.
	Dupe Count	This field displays the number of matching records in each Dupe Group.
	Matchcode Key	Based on the matchcode and matchcodes component used to process the source table(s), every record has a matchkey built. It is this key, a representation of the record, that is used in deduping. This field will be populated with the key and is useful in analyzing the output results.
Lookup Options	*This section is GREYED-OUT When there is only a single upstream source connected to the MatchUp Component.
	When a second upstream data source is connected to the Lookup pin, that data source will be used as a filter.
	List Suppress	Source pin records that match any record from the Lookup Pin will not be returned with an Output Result Code. They will be marked as Suppressed.
	List Intersect	Only Source pin records that match any record from the Lookup Pin will be returned with an Output Result Code (Unique or Has Duplicate result code). The second to nth Source records that match the Lookup record will be marked with a Duplicate Result Code. Source pin records that do not match any Lookup pin records will be returned with a Non-Intersected Result Code.
	No Purge	Source pin records that match other Source pin records will not be matched. In other words, a suppressed group or an intersected group will be returned as suppressed or intersected, but each record will have their own Dupe Group number.
Golden Record Selection	The Golden Record Selection Options allow for intelligent selection of the Golden or Master Record using different logic and algorithms. These algorithms include selecting the Golden Record according to: Last Updated, Most Complete, Data Quality Score, and Custom Expressions.
	See Golden Record below for more information.

Golden Record

The Golden Record Selection Option is used for selecting the best record amongst a group of duplicate records as your remaining Master Record. This allows for having a single accurate representation of each entity in your data. Thus in a group of duplicate records for example:

Name	Address	Last Update
John Doe	123 Main St	10/25/2003
John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012
John Doe	123 Main St	8/6/2008

We can prioritize the selection of the Golden Record by latest update. The selected remaining record will be:

Name	Address	Last Update
John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012

The component allows for using pre-defined algorithms that are commonly used to select the Golden Record, or you can also write your own custom expressions for flexible rule generation.

There are four algorithms that can be modified by clicking the “..” button to the right of its respective algorithm.

Multiple algorithms can be selected to evaluate the Golden Record. The algorithms are ordered from 1-4 in order of priority. Select the rule and click either the up arrow or down arrow to change this order. Golden Record selection will first be evaluated by the first selected algorithm in the list. If a Golden Record cannot be determined using the first selected algorithm, it will automatically cascade down to the second selected algorithm to re-evaluate the ties. The component will continue to cascade through all selected algorithms until a single golden record can be evaluated or until all the selected algorithms have been applied.

The four algorithms are Last Updated, Most Complete, Data Quality Score, and Custom Expressions.

Last Updated

This algorithm allows for selecting the Golden Record based on the newest or oldest Date/Time.

“Last Updated” Column:

Input requires a valid column of type Date/Time (DT_Date).

Oldest/Newest Date:

Select whether the Golden Record should be selected based on which one has the Oldest/Newest Date. Example

For the following data:

Name	Address	Last Update
John Doe	123 Main St	10/25/2003
John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012
John Doe	123 Main St	8/6/2008

Selecting the Newest Date for the “Last Update” column will yield the following results:

Name	Address	Last Update	Results
John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012	MS02
John Doe	123 Main St	8/6/2008	MS03
John Doe	123 Main St	10/25/2003	MS03

The record containing MS02 is the selected Golden Record.

Most Complete

This algorithm allows for selecting the Golden Record based on the completeness/length of information.

The options allows for selecting multiple columns for evaluation. In a group of duplicate records, the Golden Record will be selected based on the selected columns has the longest concatenated string.

Example:

For the following data:

Name	Address
Joseph Doe	123 Main St
Joe Doe	123 Main St
J. Doe	123 Main St

Selecting the Name and Address columns will yield the following results:

Name	Address	Results
Joseph Doe	123 Main St	MS02
Joe Doe	123 Main St	MS03
J. Doe	123 Main St	MS03

The record containing MS02 is the selected Golden Record.

Data Quality Score

This algorithm allows for selecting the Golden Record based on the Quality of Your Data. The Data Quality Score is required to be used in tandem with the Melissa Contact Verify Component (CVC).

For more information on the Contact Verify Component, see CVC Overview.

Column Containing Result Codes	Input requires a valid column containing the Melissa Returned Result Codes returned by the CVC. For more information on the CVC Results, see CVC Settings > Contact Verify Tabs > Output Filter.
Rule	There are a total of 6 rules that can be utilized. Check the box next to the rule(s) that you wish to use. Rules are also ordered from 1-6 in order of priority. Select the rule and click either the up arrow or down arrow to change this order.
	Address Quality Score	The Address Quality Score evaluates your Address Results and selects which one has the best address composition and most deliverable.
	Name Quality Score	The Name Quality Score evaluates your Name Results and selects which one has the most probable real person’s name.
	Phone Quality Score	The Phone Quality Score evaluates your Phone Results and selects which one has the most valid 10-digit phone number.
	Email Quality Score	The Email Quality Score evaluates your Email Results and selects which one has the most correct and deliverable email address.
	GeoCode Quality Score	The GeoCode Quality Score evaluates your GeoCode Results and selects which one has the highest level of GeoCoding accuracy.
	Data Quality Score	The Data Quality Score evaluates all possible results combined from Address, Email, Name, Phone and GeoCode in a single column.

Custom Expressions

The Custom Expression Algorithm allows you to set up a custom expression of your own design.

Expression	Use a pre-built expression	To use a pre-built expression, select one from the drop-down list. You may also remove the selected pre-built expression by clicking the self-titled button.
	Use the specified expression	Alternatively, you may create your own expression in this field. Clicking the text button will check your custom expression for correct syntax. To save your custom built expression, click the “Save the above expression as a new Pre-Built Expression…” button.
Precedence	Choose one of the two radio buttons here to designate which result takes precendence over another when comparing two results. The result with the Lowest Value The result with the Highest Value
Expression Elements	Double-clicking any element in the expression elements section will insert it into the “Use the specified expression:” field. For more information, see Custom Expression Elements. The following elements are available for your use: Columns Variables String Numeric Functions/Operators Boolean Functions/Operators Date/Time Functions/Operators Misc. Functions/Operators DataType Casts For further information on SSIS Operators, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms137538(v=sql.100).aspx. For further information on SSIS Functions, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141671(v=sql.100).aspx.

Contents

Source Pass-Through Columns Advanced Survivorship Prioritization

Source Expression Builder

Select Use Simple Pass-Through if you would like the contents of the checked field names to be passed to the Source output stream without modification, in addition to the Output Columns specified in Options.

Select Use Advanced Survivorship if you would like to gather data from other matching records to pass into a single output stream record.

Source Pass-Through Columns

This tab allows you to add specific fields from the input Source file to the output file.

Pass Through	Check this box if you would like the contents of the checked field name to be passed to the Source output stream without modification, in addition to the Output Columns specified in Options.
Column Name	The column names from the original input table.
Current Usage	Where the field is currently being used as input.
Data Type	The data type of each column.
Length	Maximum number of bytes returned.
Precision	Maximum number of digits.
Scale	Maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

Advanced Survivorship

Survivorship can merge data from matching record(s) into a single output record. This allows you to establish criteria for each data column individually instead of using the default method of writing full record content to output.

For example, consider the following matching records:

Name	Address	Last Update	Amount
John Doe	123 Main St	10/25/2003	420
John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012	100
Mr John Doe	123 Main St	8/6/2008	56

Using the Golden Record selection by latest update, the selected remaining record would be:

Name	Address	Last Update	Amount
John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012	100

But if we set survivorship for longest name and greatest amount, we can populate our remaining record with values from other matching records.

Name	Address	Last Update	Amount
Mr John Doe	123 Main St	4/16/2012	420

Output Column Name	The output column name. You choose this name when you add a column through the “Add Column” button. Double-click an existing column name to change its name.
Consolidation Method	This method determines how matching data is merged. Specify the consolidation method to be used on the selected output column. The following examples that have Prioritization use the Lowest Salary Prioritization.
	First Data
	First Non-Empty
	Join
	Join With Spaces
	Add
	Average
	Most Frequent
	Stack Group
Source Column or Expression	This is where you specify the source of the data which will populate the output column. As with Simple Pass-through, the most common usage is to use the contents of a Source Column, although you can also use a custom expression which may concatenate two fields for example. Ex. An custom expression like column ZIP + “ “ + CUST_ID could be used to populate a new column with a proprietary account number. To bring up the Survivorship Expression editor, double-click the respective cell.
Prioritization	When MatchUp identifies a group of duplicates, configuring Prioritization allows you to order the column values, enabling you to select the lowest or highest value (left to right for strings) to output. For more information, see Prioritization. Click the ... button under the prioritization column to open the prioritization window for the selected row.

Prioritization

When MatchUp identifies a group of duplicates, configuring Prioritization allows you to order the column values, enabling you to select the lowest or highest value (left to right for strings) to output.

Source

Specify the source of the data which will populate the output column. As with Simple Pass-through, the most common usage is to use the contents of a Source Column, although you can also use a custom expression which may concatenate two fields for example.

For Example: A custom expression like column ZIP + “ “ + CUST_ID could be used to populate a new column with a proprietary account number.

Default

By default, the output column will be populated with contents from source column contents. This option will be greyed out if the output column is a newly created column, which does not exist in the source table.

Use a Custom Expression

You can have the output column populated with data other than the contents of the source column by creating a custom expression. A valid expression may be the contents of a different field, data concatenated from multiple fields, or custom values created with any valid expression. Select the button to the right to access the expression builder to help you select any of the available valid options. For more information, see Expression Builder.

Expression Builder

The Expression Builder allows for creating custom expressions for Survivorship. The expression editor includes Industry Standard Functions and Operators for building custom rules. Also included are Melissa proprietary functions for prioritization according to the quality of data. The Expression Builder also allows for selecting which set of data will be outputted as the surviving data.

Expression	Specify the expression to be used.
	Use a pre-built expression	Select a pre-built expression from the drop down menu.
	Use the specified expression	You can choose to make your own custom expression. Use the Expression Elements (see below) section for lists of the various elements you can use in your custom expression.
Expression Elements	Contains categorized lists of the possible elements you can use in a custom expression. Double-click an element to have it inserted into the “Use the specified expression:” text field. See MatchUp Tabs > Options > Golden Record > Custom Expression for a detailed explanation of the Expression Builder.

Note

This tab is HIDDEN when there is only a single upstream source connected to the MatchUp Component.

This shows a list of the fields in your input Lookup stream. When there is only a single input source connected, this tab will not be visible.

Pass Through	Check this box if you would like the contents of the checked field name to be passed to the Lookup output stream without modification, in addition to the Output Columns specified in Options.
Column Name	The column names from the original input table.
Current Usage	Where the field is currently being used as input.
Data Type	The data type of each column.
Length	Maximum number of bytes returned.
Precision	Maximum number of digits.
Scale	Maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

The MatchUp Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: Deduped Records (MS01 or MS02)
	Custom Filter	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Custom Expression Elements

Columns

The Columns section lists the columns available from the input.

Variables

The Variables section lists the following system variables:

Variable Name	Data Type	Description
ContainerStartTime	DateTime	The start time of the container.
CreationName	String	The name of the task.
LocaleID	Int32	The locale that the task uses.
ParentContainerGUID	String
TaskID	String	The unique identifier of a task instance.
TaskName	String	The name of the task instance.
TaskTransactionOption	Int32	The transaction option that the task uses.
CancelEvent	Boolean	Indicates whether the event handler stops running when an error, warning, or query cancellation occurs.
CreationDate	DateTime	The date that the package was created.
CreatorComputerName	String	The computer on which the package was created.
CreatorName	String	The name of the person who built the package.
ExecutionInstanceGUID	String	The unique identifier of the executing instance of a package.
FailedConfigurations	String	The names of package configurations that have failed.
InteractiveMode	Boolean	Indicates whether the package is run in interactive mode. If a package is running in SSIS Designer, this property is set to True. If a package is running using the DTExec command prompt utility, the property is set to False.
LastModifiedProductVersion
MachineName	String	The name of the computer on which the package is running.
OfflineMode	Boolean	Indicates whether the package is in offline mode. Offline mode does not acquire connections to data sources.
PackageID	String	The unique identifier of the package.
PackageName	String	The name of the package.
ProductVersion
StartTime	DateTime	The time that the package started to run.
UserName	String	The account of the user who started the package. The user name is qualified by the domain name.
VersionBuild	Int32	The package version.
VersionComments	String	Comments about the package version.
VersionGUID	String	The unique identifier of the version.
VersionMajor	Int32	The major version of the package.
VersionMinor	Int32	The minor version of the package.

Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141788.aspx

String Functions/Operators

The String Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:

Operators	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms137538(v=sql.100).aspx
	Operator	Description
	Concatenate (+)	Concatenates two expressions.
	Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
	Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
	Greater (>)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than the second one.
	Greater or Equal (>=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second one.
	Less (<)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than the second one.
	Less or Equal (<=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than or equal to the second one.
Functions	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141671(v=sql.100).aspx
	Function	Description
	CodePoint()	Returns the Unicode code value of the leftmost character of a character expression.
	FindString()	Returns the one-based index of the specified occurrence of a character string within an expression.
	Hex()	Returns a string representing the hexadecimal value of an integer.
	Len()	Returns the number of characters in a character expression.
	Left()	Returns part of a character string starting at a specified number of characters from the left.
	Lower()	Returns a character expression after converting uppercase characters to lowercase characters.
	LTrim()	Returns a character expression after removing leading spaces.
	PadLeft()	Retruns a character expression after padding a specified string to the left of a specified character.
	PadRight()	Retruns a character expression after padding a specified string to the right of a specified character.
	Replace()	Returns a character expression after replacing a string within the expression with either a different string or an empty string.
	Replicate()	Returns a character expression, replicated a specified number of times.
	Reverse()	Returns a character expression in reverse order.
	Right()	Returns part of a character string starting at a specified number of characters from the right.
	RTrim()	Returns a character expression after removing trailing spaces.
	SubString()	Returns a part of a character expression.
	Trim()	Returns a character expression after removing leading and trailing spaces.
	Upper()	Returns a character expression after converting lowercase characters to uppercase characters.

Numeric Functions/Operators

The Numeric Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:

Operators	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms137538(v=sql.100).aspx
	Operator	Description
	Add (+)	Adds two numeric expressions.
	Subtract (-)	Subtracts the second numeric expression from the first one.
	Multiply (*)	Multiplies two numeric expressions.
	Divide (/)	Divides the first numeric expression by the second one.
	Modulus (%)	Provides the integer remainder after dividing the first numeric expression by the second one.
	Bitwise OR (|)	Performs a bitwise OR operation of two integer values.
	Bitwise AND (&)	Performs a bitwise AND operation of two integer values.
	Bitwise XOR (^)	Performs a bitwise exclusive OR operation of two integer values.
	Bitwise NOT (~)	Performs a bitwise negation of an integer.
	Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
	Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
	Greater (>)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than the second one.
	Greater or Equal (>=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second one.
	Less (<)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than the second one.
	Less or Equal (<=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than or equal to the second one.
Functions	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141671(v=sql.100).aspx
	Function	Description
	Abs()	Returns the absolute, positive value of a numeric expression.
	Exp()	Returns the exponent to base e of the specified expression.
	Ceiling()	Returns the smallest integer that is greater than or equal to a numeric expression.
	Floor()	Returns the largest integer that is less than or equal to a numeric expression.
	Ln()	Returns the natural logarithm of a numeric expression.
	Log()	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a numeric expression.
	Power()	Returns the result of raising a numeric expression to a power.
	Round()	Returns a numeric expression that is rounded to the specified length or precision.
	Sign()	Returns the positive (+), negative (-), or zero (0) sign of a numeric expression.
	Sqrt()	Returns the square root of a numeric expression.
	Square()	Returns the square of a numeric expression.

Boolean Functions/Operators

The Boolean Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:

Operators	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms137538(v=sql.100).aspx
	Operator	Description
	Logical OR (||)	Performs a logical OR operation.
	Logical AND (&&)	Performs a logical AND operation.
	Logical NOT (!)	Negates a Boolean operand.
	Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
	Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
	Conditional (?:)	Returns one of two expressions based on the evaluation of a Boolean expression.
Functions	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141671(v=sql.100).aspx
	Function	Description
	IsNull()	Returns a Boolean result based on whether an expression is null.

Date/Time Functions/Operators

The Date/Time Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:

Operators	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms137538(v=sql.100).aspx
	Operator	Description
	Equal (==)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are equal.
	Not Equal (!=)	Performs a comparison to determine if two expressions are not equal.
	Greater (>)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than the second one.
	Greater or Equal (>=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is greater than or equal to the second one.
	Less (<)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than the second one.
	Less or Equal (<=)	Performs a comparison to determine if the first expression is less than or equal to the second one.
Functions	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141671(v=sql.100).aspx
	Function	Description
	DateAdd()	Returns a new DT_DBTIMESTAMP value by adding a date or time interval to a specified date.
	DateDiff()	Returns the number of date and time boundaries crossed between two specified dates.
	DatePart()	Returns an integer representing a datepart of a date.
	Day()	Returns an integer that represents the day of the specified date.
	GetDate()	Returns the current date of the system.
	GetUTCDate()	Returns the current date of the system in UTC time (Universal Time Coordinate or Greenwich Mean Time).
	Month()	Returns an integer that represents the month of the specified date.
	Year()	Returns an integer that represents the year of the specified date.

Misc. Functions/Operators

The Misc. Functions/Operators section lists the following functions/operators:

Operators	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms137538(v=sql.100).aspx
	Operator	Description
	Conditional(?:)	Returns one of two expressions based on the evaluation of a Boolean expression.
Functions	Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141671(v=sql.100).aspx
	Function	Description
	AddressScore()	Returns a quality score for the address results codes.
	DataQualityScore()	Returns a quality score for the results codes.
	EmailScore()	Returns a quality score for the email results codes.
	GeoCodeScore()	Returns a quality score for the geocode results codes.
	IsNull()	Returns a Boolean result based on whether an expression is null.
	NameScore()	Returns a quality score for the name results codes.
	Null()	Returns a null value of a requested data type.
	PhoneScore()	Returns a quality score for the phone results codes.

DataType Casts

The DataType Casts section lists the following system variables:

Data Type	Description
DT_STR	A null-terminated ANSI/MBCS character string with a maximum length of 8000 characters. (If a column value contains additional null terminators, the string will be truncated at the occurrence of the first null.)
DT_WSTR	A null-terminated Unicode character string with a maximum length of 4000 characters. (If a column value contains additional null terminators, the string will be truncated at the occurrence of the first null.)
DT_TEXT	An ANSI/MBCS character string with a maximum length of 231-1 (2,147,483,647) characters.
DT_NTEXT	A Unicode character string with a maximum length of 230 - 1 (1,073,741,823) characters.
DT_I1	A one-byte, signed integer.
DT_I2	A two-byte, signed integer.
DT_I4	A four-byte, signed integer.
DT_I8	An eight-byte, signed integer.
DT_UI1	A one-byte, unsigned integer.
DT_UI2	A two-byte, unsigned integer.
DT_UI4	A four-byte, unsigned integer.
DT_UI8	An eight-byte, unsigned integer.
DT_R4	A single-precision floating-point value.
DT_R8	A double-precision floating-point value.
DT_CY	A currency value. This data type is an eight-byte signed integer with a scale of 4 and a maximum precision of 19 digits.
DT_DECIMAL	An exact numeric value with a fixed precision and a fixed scale. This data type is a 12-byte unsigned integer with a separate sign, a scale of 0 to 28, and a maximum precision of 29.
DT_NUMERIC	An exact numeric value with a fixed precision and scale. This data type is a 16-byte unsigned integer with a separate sign, a scale of 0 - 38, and a maximum precision of 38.
DT_BOOL	A Boolean value.
DT_DATE	A date structure that consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, seconds, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a fixed scale of 7 digits. The DT_DATE data type is implemented using an 8-byte floating-point number. Days are represented by whole number increments, starting with 30 December 1899, and midnight as time zero. Hour values are expressed as the absolute value of the fractional part of the number. However, a floating point value cannot represent all real values; therefore, there are limits on the range of dates that can be presented in DT_DATE. On the other hand, DT_DBTIMESTAMP is represented by a structure that internally has individual fields for year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. This data type has larger limits on ranges of the dates it can present.
DT_DBDATE	A date structure that consists of year, month, and day.
DT_DBTIME	A time structure that consists of hour, minute, and second.
DT_DBTIME2	A time structure that consists of hour, minute, second, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a maximum scale of 7 digits.
DT_DBTIMESTAMP	A timestamp structure that consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a fixed scale of 3 digits.
DT_DBTIMESTAMP2	A timestamp structure that consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a maximum scale of 7 digits.
DT_DBTIMESTAMPOFFSET	A timestamp structure that consists of year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and fractional seconds. The fractional seconds have a maximum scale of 7 digits. Unlike the DT_DBTIMESTAMP and DT_DBTIMESTAMP2 data types, the DT_DBTIMESTAMPOFFSET data type has a time zone offset. This offset specifies the number of hours and minutes that the time is offset from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone offset is used by the system to obtain the local time. The time zone offset must include a sign, plus or minus, to indicate whether the offset is added or subtracted from the UTC. The valid number of hours offset is between -14 and +14. The sign for the minute offset depends on the sign for the hour offset: If the sign of the hour offset is negative, the minute offset must be negative or zero. If the sign for the hour offset is positive, the minute offset must be positive or zero. If the sign for the hour offset is zero, the minute offset can be any value from negative 0.59 to positive 0.59.
DT_FILETIME	A 64-bit value that represents the number of 100-nanosecond intervals since January 1, 1601. The fractional seconds have a maximum scale of 3 digits.

Reference: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms141036(v=sql.105).aspx

Matchcode Editor

The Matchcode Editor is a Windows-based application that creates and edits the matchcode file used by MatchUp Object. This program allows you to customize copies of the preset matchcodes or create new matchcodes from scratch.

The Matchcode Editor has the following features:

Matchcode List Component List

Component Properties Algorithms

Matchcode Evaluation

Optimized Matchcode

This Matchcode’s properties satisfy the condition needed for efficient clustering. Benchmarking test should return high throughput.

Sub Optimal Matchcode

This Matchcode’s first component does NOT satisfy the conditions needed for efficient clustering. We don’t recommend using this Matchcode for batch processes with considerable record volume.

Warning Matchcode

At least one component in this Matchcode does NOT satisfy the conditions needed for efficient clustering. Benchmarking tests should be performed before usage in production as throughput may not be optimal.

Matchcode List

This top portion of the interface contains a list of all the matchcodes found in the current matchcode file.

To the right of the list are four buttons: Create Matchcode, Remove Matchcode, Copy Matchcode, and Rename Matchcode.

Add a New Matchcode	Click the Create Matchcode button. Type a name for the new matchcode in the pop-up and click OK. The Matchcode Editor will present a blank matchcode screen with no components. Add components.
Remove an Existing Matchcode	Select the matchcode to be deleted. Click the Remove Matchcode button. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Make a Copy of an Existing Matchcode	Select the matchcode to be copied. Click the Copy Matchcode button. Type a name for the new matchcode in the pop-up box and click OK.
Rename an Existing Matchcode	Select the matchcode to be renamed. Click the Rename Matchcode button. Type a new name for the matchcode in the pop-up box and click OK.

Component List

Below the matchcode list is a list of components used by the currently-selected matchcode.

The list also shows the basic settings for each combination. The right side of the list contains a grid that shows the combinations in which component is used.

For more information on how combinations of components are used, see Component Combinations.

Add a New Component to the Matchcode	Select the Select Data Type dropdown list. The Matchcode Editor displays a list of 35 available Data Types and an additional General Data Type to choose from. Select the settings for the new component. You can click on the different sections of the added component for more settings. Click OK. The new component is added as the last component in the matchcode.
Remove a component from a matchcode	Select the Component Data Type dropdown list. Navigate to the top of the list and select Remove Component. Place the focus on another control and the component will be removed from the component list.
Change the order of components in a matchcode	Click on the name of the component. Drag the component to the new position.

Component Properties

Data Types

The following table lists all the available matchcode components in MatchUp.

Component	Description
Prefix	Prefix of a personal name (Mr, Mrs, Ms, Dr)
First Name	A first name
Middle Name	A middle name
Last Name	A last name
Suffix	A suffix from a personal name
Gender	Male/Female/Neutral
First/Nickname	A representative nickname for a first name
Middle/Nickname	A representative nickname for a middle name
Department/Title	A title and/or department name [1]
Company	A company name
Company Acronym	A company’s acronym [2]
Street Number	The street number from an address line [3]
Street Pre-Directional	“South” in “3 South Main St”
Street name	The street name from an address line
Street Suffix	An address suffix (St, Ave, Blvd)
Street Post-Directional	“North” in “3 Main St North”
PO Box	PO Boxes also include Farm Routes, Rural Routes, etc.
Street Secondary	Apartments, floors, rooms, etc.
Address	A single unparsed address line [4]
City	A city name, ZIP or Postal code is usually more accurate
State/Province	A state or province name
Zip9	A full ZIP + 4 code (9 digits) [5]
Zip5	The ZIP Code (5 digits)
Zip4	The +4 extension of a ZIP + 4 code (4 digits)
Postal Code (Canada)	A Canadian Postal Code
City (UK)	A city in the United Kingdom
County (UK)	A county in the United Kingdom
Postcode (UK)	A United Kingdom Postcode
Country	A country
Phone/Fax	A phone number [6]
E-mail Address	An e-mail address [7]
Credit Card Number	A credit card number
Date	A date [8]
Numeric	A numeric field [9]
Proximity	Allows you to specify a maximum distance in miles between records in which a match will be possible [10]
General	Any general information, ID, birthday, SSN, etc.

1. Company, Company Acronym, Department/Title

   Frequently these components don’t match exactly because of ‘noise words’ such as “the,” “and,” “agency,” and so on. MatchUp strips these words from these components.

2. Company Acronym

   MatchUp converts any multi-word company name into an acronym (for example, “International Business Machines” is squeezed into “IBM”). Single-word company names are left as they are. This conversion is done after noise words are removed.

3. Street Address Components

   The seven street address components (Street Number, Street Pre-Directional, Street Name, Street Suffix, Street Post-Directional, PO Box, Street Secondary) are obtained by splitting up to three address lines. Note that PO Box and/or Street Secondary do not have to appear on their own line, or in a particular field. MatchUp’s proprietary “street smart” splitter does all of the work.

4. Full Address

   When using the Full Address component, you are at the mercy of every little deviation in data entry. Because MatchUp’s street splitter is so powerful, it is preferable to use street address components instead of the Full Address in nearly all cases. The only exception may be when processing foreign addresses that don’t conform very well to US, Canadian or UK addressing formats. This is discussed in more detail starting on page 178.

5. Zip9, Zip5, Zip4, Canadian Postal Code

   MatchUp removes dashes and spaces from Zip codes. When processing a mix of Canadian Postal Codes and US Zip Codes, use the Zip9 component.

6. Phone Number

   MatchUp removes non-numeric characters from phone numbers. Leading ‘1-’ and trailing extensions are stripped if present. Numbers lacking an area code are right justified so that the local dialing code and number are aligned with numbers having area codes. If a data table often has missing or inaccurate area codes (i.e., after a recent area code split), start at the 4th position of the phone number component. Do not use the right-most 7 positions, as badly formatted extensions can sometimes cause the phone number to get coded improperly.

7. E-Mail Address

   MatchUp removes illegal characters from e-mail addresses. Incomplete, changed, and commonly misspelled domain names are corrected using the Email Address data table.

8. Date

   MatchUp allows you to specify a number of days for which a match will be possible if the records being compared fall within the set number of days apart.

9. Numeric

   This allows you to specify an integer number for which a match will be possible if the record’s unit difference falls within the set number.

10. Proximity

    The proximity component requires you to map in Latitude / Longitude coordinates (Not determined by MatchUp. Can be determined by a product such as GeoCoder or Contact Verify) allowing you to match addresses within a maximum distance setting for this component.

Global Data Types

These Global data types will not be visible unless you create a global matchcode.

Component	Description
Postal Code	(Zip &/ plus 4) Complete postal code for a particular delivery point.
Premises Number	(Street Number) Alphanumeric indicator within premises field.
Double Dependent Locality	Smallest population center data element
Dependent Locality	(Urbanization) Smaller population center data element. Dependent on Locality.
Sub Administrative Area	(County) Smallest geographic data element.
Sub National Area	Arbitrary administrative region below that of the sovereign state.
Locality	(City) Most common population center data element.
Administrative Area	(State) Most common geographic data element.
Thoroughfare Leading Type	Leading thoroughfare type indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Thoroughfare Pre-Directional	(Street Pre Direction) Prefix directional contained within the Thoroughfare field.
Thoroughfare Name	(Street Name) Name indicator within the Thoroughfare field
Thoroughfare Trailing Type	(Street Suffix) Trailing thoroughfare type indicator within the Thoroughfare field.
Thoroughfare Post-Directional	(Street Post Direction) Postfix directional contained within the Thoroughfare field.
Dependent Thoroughfare Pre-Directional	Prefix directional contained within the Dependent Thoroughfare field.
Dependent Thoroughfare Leading Type	Leading thoroughfare type indicator within the Dependent Thoroughfare field.
Dependent Thoroughfare Name	Name indicator within the Dependent Thoroughfare field
Dependent Thoroughfare Trailing Type	Trailing thoroughfare type indicator within the Dependent Thoroughfare field.
Dependent Thoroughfare Post-Directional	Postfix directional contained within the Dependent Thoroughfare field.

• Size

  The maximum number of characters from this component to be used by this matchcode. If the data has fewer characters, it will be padded with spaces. Sizing is done after all other properties are applied

• Label

  (Optional) A description of the data found in this component. Not all component types use this field. Not all fields allow the label to be edited. This is most useful for clarifying the contents of General fields that don’t fit any of the other component types.Max size of description is 20 characters.

• Maximum Number of Words

  This limits the number of words that MatchUp will extract from a field when building the match key. For example, if maximum words for a last name were set for 1 and the last name field was “Von Richtofen”, MatchUp would only use “VON” as the last name.

• Start

  This property determines where MatchUp begins counting when applying the Size property.

  • Left (beginning)

    Starts from the first character of the field. This is the most commonly used option.

  • Right (end)

    Starts from the last character of the field. In other words, if the data included a phone number of “949-589-5200” and the size was 7, MatchUp would use “5895200” for the match key.

  • Position

    Starts form a specific position within the field.

  • Word

    Starts from the beginning of a specific word. This should only be used if a particular field always has more than one word and first word (or more) can safely be ignored.

• Trim

  This property tells MatchUp to remove excess spaces from the beginning of a piece of data, the end or both. Usually, this property is always enabled.

Matching Strategies (Fuzzy)

These properties allow for matching of non-exact components. These options are mutually exclusive, so you can only select one at a time.

Phonetex	(pronounced “Fo-NEH-tex”) An auditory matching algorithm. It works best in matching words that sound alike but are spelled differently. It is an improvement over the Soundex algorithm described below.
Soundex	Another, older, auditory matching algorithm. Although the Phonetex algorithm is measurable superior, the Soundex algorithm is presented for users who need to create a machcode that emulates one from another application.
Containment	Match when one record’s component is contained in another record. For example, “Smith” is contained in “Smithfield”
Frequency	Matches the characters in one record’s component to the characters in another without any regard to the sequence. For example “abcdef” would match “badcfe”
Fast Near	A typographical matching algorithm. It works best in matching words that don’t match because of a few typographical errors. Exactly how many errors is specified on a scale from 1 to 4 (1 being the tightest). The Fast Near algorithm is a faster approximation of the Accurate Near algorithm described below. The tradeoff for speed is accuracy; sometimes Fast Near will find false matches or miss true matches.
Accurate Near	This is a typographical matching algorithm. The Accurate Near algorithm produces better results than the Fast Near algorithm, but is slower.
Frequency Near	Similar to Frequency matching except that a slider lets you specify how many characters may be different between components.
UTF-8 Near	Similar to levenstein (Accurate Near). It counts the number typos, i.e. character substitutions count as one typo, transposed characters count as two typos. This algorithm differs from others in that it will account for character storage sizes due to different encoding.
Vowels Only	Only vowels will be compared. Consonants will be removed.
Consonants Only	Only consonants will be compared. Vowels will be removed.
Alphas Only	Only alphabetic characters will be compared.
Numerics Only	Only numeric characters will be compared. Decimals and signs are considered numeric.

Fuzzy Advanced

Please research the definitions of the following advanced algorithms before implementing in a matchcode.

Jaro	Gathers common characters (in order) between the two strings, then counts transpositions between the two common strings.
Jaro-Winkler	Just like Jaro, but gives added weight for matching characters at the start of the string (up to 4 characters).
n-Gram	Counts the number of common sub-strings (grams) between the two strings. Substring size ‘N’, is currently defaulted as 2 in MatchUp.
Needleman-Wunch	Similar to Accurate Near, except that inserts/deletes aren’t weighted as heavily and as compensation for keyboarding mis-hits, not all character substitutions are weighted equally.
Smith-Waterman-Gotoh	Builds on Needleman-Wunch, but gives a non-linear penalty for deletions. This effectively adds the ‘understanding’ that the keyboarder may have tried to abbreviate one of the words.
Dice’s Coefficient	Like Jaro, Dice counts matching n-Grams (discarding duplicate n-Grams).
Jaccard Similarity Coefficient	Very similar to Dice’s Coefficient with a slightly different calculation.
Overlap Coefficient	Again, very similar to Dice’s Coefficient with a slightly different calculation. String similarity algorithm based on a substring calculation.
Longest Common Substring	Finds the longest common substring between the two strings.
Double MetaPhone	Performs 2 different Phonetex-style transformations. Returns a value dependant on how many of the transformations match (ie, 1 versus 1, 1 versus 2, 2 versus 1, 2 versus 2).
MD Keyboard	An algorithm developed by Melissa which counts keyboarding mis-hits with a weighted penalty based on the distance of the mis-hit and assigns a percentage of similarity between the compared strings.

Distance

This is the property where you set a range for which two records will still match. This field is context sensitive, depending on the Data Type and Fuzzy algorithm.

The following matchcode component Data Types use a specific unit of measure when specifying the Distance:

• Proximity: Distance in miles. Range: 0-4000

• Numeric: Integer number.

• Date: Number of days.

For example: If the Distance is set to 60:

• Two records with dates 20161225 and 20161031 will match. (they are within 60 days)

• Two records with dates 20161225 and 20160430 will match. (they are further tham 60 days apart)

When using the following fuzzy algorithms, the Distance uses a scale of 1-4, rather than a unit of measure or percentage of similarity.

• Fast Near: Number of typographical errors. Range: Tight(1) - Loose(4) with respect to length of strings.

• Accurate Near: Number of typographical errors. Range: Tight(1) - Loose(4) with respect to length of strings.

Note

Since these algorithms are not published and the range was originally developed to represent a general sliding scale (narrow choice of precision), we recommend using Near:1 and carefully test before you consider using the higher settings in production, as doing so can quickly return false duplicates. In other words, the 1-4 scale is like when someone rates something on a 1-10 scale – it’s a general scale, not a specific grade.

The following algorithms use a percentage range of 0-100%, indicating the minimum percentage of similarity which will return a match between two strings.

N-Gram Jaro Jaro-Winkler LCS Needleman-Wunch MD Keyboard

Smith-Waterman-Gotoh Dice’s Coefficient Jaccard Similarity Coefficient Overlap Coefficient Double MetaPhone

For example, if using the Jaro-Winkler algorithm with the Distance set to 80:

• Two records which MatchUp finds to be 84% similar according to the Jaro-Winkler algorithm will match.

• Two records which MatchUp finds to be 62% similar according to the Jaro-Winkler algorithm will not match.

More information on the publically published algorithms can be found here: Advanced Algorithms.

Short/Empty Settings

These settings control matching between incomplete or empty fields. They are not mutually exclusive, meaning that any combination of these settings may be selected.

Match if both fields are blank	Match this component if both records contain no data. This is a very important concept in creating matchcodes. See Blank Field Matching later in this chapter for more information.
Match if one field is blank	Will match a full word to no data (for example, “John” and “”).
Match initial to full field	Will match a full word to an initial (for example, “J” and “John”).

Combinations

Uses these check boxes to select which of the sixteen possible combinations will use this component. This matrix will grow as you add more components and combinations.

It is easier to visualize the effects of these boxes if you look at the list of matchcode components as well:

It is important to note that each VERTICAL column of check marks designates one acceptable matchcode. For example, the illustration above shows a combination that is made up of 4 matchcodes:

1. Zip5, Last Name, First Name, Street Number, Street Name

2. Zip5, Last Name, First Name, PO Box

3. Zip5, Company, Street Number, Street Name

4. Zip5, Company, PO Box

Since boxes 1 and 3 in the Street Number row have check marks, the Street Number field is included in matchcode 1 and 3.

Swap Match Pairs

Swap matching is the ability to compare one component to another component.

For example, if you were to swap match a First Name component and a Last Name component, you could match “John Smith” to “Smith John.” Swap matching is always defined for a pair of components. MatchUp allows you to specify up to 8 swap pairs (named “Pair A” through “Pair H”). It is strongly recommended that the other properties of both member components are identical.

Configure a Swap Pair

1. Click the button for a swap pair.

2. The Matchcode Editor displays the swap pair editing dialog.

3. Select the two components that will be used for this swap pair. The first component is automatically disabled, since it cannot be used with swap matching.

4. Select the swapping rule:

   

   • Both components must match - The contents of both components must be a match according to fuzzy matching strategy in use for both components. “John Smith” matches “Smith John” but not “Smith <blank>.”

   • Either component can match - At least one of the components must match “John Smith” matches both “Smith John” and “Smith <blank>.”

5. Click OK.

   For more ideas on how to use Swap Matching, see Swap Matching Uses.

Algorithms

The MatchUp Editor can use the following matching algorithms:

Exact Matching	Determines whether two strings are identical.
Soundex	SoundEx is a string transformation and comparison-based algorithm. For example, JOHNSON would be transformed to “J525” and JHNSN would also be transformed to “J525” which would then be considered a SoundExing match after evaluation. If the original strings are identical, SoundEx will return 100%. If the SoundEx’d strings are equal, the algorithm returns 99%. Otherwise, SoundEx will return 0%.
Phonetex	A variation of the SoundEx Algorithm. PhonetEx takes into account letter combinations that sound alike, particularly at the start of the word (such as ‘PN’ = ‘N’, ‘PH’ = ‘F’).
Containment	Matches when one record’s component is contained in another record. For example, “Smith” is contained in “Smithfield.”
Frequency	Matches the characters in one record’s component to the characters in another without any regard to the sequence. For example “abcdef” would match ”badcfe.”
Fast Near	A typographical matching algorithm. It works best in matching words that don’t match because of a few typographical errors. Exactly how many errors is specified on a scale from 1(Tight) to 4(Loose). The Fast Near algorithm is a faster approximation of the Accurate Near algorithm described below. The tradeoff for speed is accuracy; sometimes Fast Near will find false matches or miss true matches.
Accurate Near	An implementation of the Levenshtein algorithm. It is a typographical matching algorithm. The Accurate Near algorithm produces better results than the Fast Near algorithm, but is slower.
Frequency Near	The Frequency algorithm will match the characters of one string to the characters of another without any regard to the sequence. For example “abcdef” would be considered a 100% match to “badcfe.”
Vowels	Only vowels will be compared. Consonants will be removed.
Consonants	Only consonants will be compared. Vowels will be removed.
Alphabetic	Only alphabetic characters will be compared.
Numeric	Only numeric characters will be compared. Decimals and signs are considered numeric.
N-Gram	Counts the number of common sub-strings (grams) between the two strings. Substring size ‘N’, is currently defaulted as 2 in MatchUp.
Jaro	Gathers common characters (in order) between the two strings, then counts transpositions between the two common strings.
Jaro-Winkler	Just like Jaro, but gives added weight for matching characters at the start of the string (up to 4 characters).
Longest Common Substring (LCS)	Finds the longest common substring between the two strings.
Needleman-Wunch	A variation of the Levenshtein algorithm. Levenshtein and Needleman-Wunsch are identical except that character mistakes are given different weights depending on how far two characters are on a standard keyboard layout. For example: A to S is given a mistake weight of 0.4, while A to D is a 0.6 and A to P is a 1.0.
MD Keyboard	An algorithm developed by Melissa which counts keyboarding mis-hits with a weighted penalty based on the distance of the mis-hit and assigns a percentage of similarity between the compared strings. This effectively adds the “understanding” that the keyboarder may have typed in one character before another.
Smith-Waterman-Gotoh	A variation of the Needleman-Wunsch algorithm. Needleman-Wunsch and Smith-Waterman-Gotoh are identical except that character deletions are given a different weight. This effectively adds the “understanding” that the keyboarder may have tried to abbreviate one of the words.
Dice’s Coefficient	A variation of the N-Gram algorithm. Dice’s Coefficient counts matching n-Grams but does not count extra duplicate n-Grams.
Jaccard Similarity Coefficient	A variation of the N-Gram algorithm. The Jaccard Similarity is identical to the N-Gram algorithm but uses a different formula for similarity computation.
Overlap Coefficient	A variation of the N-Gram algorithm. The Overlap Coefficient is identical to the N-Gram algorithm but uses a different formula for similarity computation.
Double MetaPhone	A variation of the PhonetEx Algorithm. Double Metaphone performs 2 different PhonetEx-style transformations. It creates two PhonetEx-like strings (primary and alternate) for both strings. The logic used for Double Metaphone Similarity works as follows: If primary1 = primary2 and alternate1 = alternate 2, then we have a very good match (99%). If either primary1 = alternate2 or alternate1 = primary2, and alternate1=alternate2, then we have a good match (85%). If alternate 1 = alternate2, we have an acceptable match (75%).

Matchcodes Overview

Component Combinations

Every matchcode is composed of one or more possible combinations of components. These represent different possible situations in which this matchcode will detect a match between two records. A match found using any one of the combinations in a matchcode is considered a match. Programmers may think in terms of a series of OR conditions. Satisfying any one of them is considered a positive result.

MatchUp allows up to 16 different combinations of components per matchcode.

Basic Example

A good example of combinations would be a matchcode designed to catch last names as well as either street addresses or post office box addresses.

• Condition #1

  ZIP/PC, Last Name, Street Number, Street Name

• Condition #2

  ZIP/PC, Last Name, PO Box

Such a matchcode might look like this:

Component	Size	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	X	X
Last Name	5	X	X
Street #	4	X
Street Name	4	X
PO Box	10		X

Columns 3 through 16 have been omitted for the sake of clarity. The trick to understanding this table is to look at the vertical columns of X’s. For example, looking at column 1, there are X’s in ZIP/PC, Last Name, Street #, and Street Name, indicating the goal of condition #1 exactly. In column 2 are X’s in ZIP/PC, Last Name, and PO Box, matching condition #2.

Advanced Example

For a more advanced example:

Component	Size	1	2	3	4
ZIP/PC	5	X	X	X	X
Last Name	5	X	X
Company	10			X	X
Street #	4	X		X
Street Name	4	X		X
PO Box	10		X		X

This matchcode produced matches under the following 4 conditions:

• Condition #1

  ZIP/PC, Last Name, Street Number, Street Name

• Condition #2

  ZIP/PC, Last Name, PO Box

• Condition #3

  ZIP/PC, Company, Street Number, Street Name

• Condition #4

  ZIP/PC, Company, PO Box

This matchcode could be used on a mailing list containing a mixture of both personal and company names and either street or PO Box™ addresses.

First Component Restrictions

The first component in any matchcode is special. This is the component that is used for clustering records, an essential element in efficient deduping. Thus, this component has certain restrictions placed on it. The Matchcode Editor enforces these restrictions automatically.

1. It must appear in every combination.

2. It cannot use the following types of Fuzzy matching: Containment; Frequency; Fast Near; Frequency Near; Accurate Near. All others are allowed.

3. It cannot use Initial Only matching.

4. It cannot use One Blank Field matching.

5. It cannot use Swap Matching.

Blank Field Mapping

This needs a special discussion, as its importance is often overlooked. If this property is on, then the absence of data in both records would indicate a match. If this property is off, then two records with missing data, but matching in every other way, will not match. It would be reasonable to wonder if you would not want this behavior. However, it is undesirable in certain situations. Take the following matchcode (paying attention to the Blank column):

Component	Size	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	Yes	X	X
Last Name	5	Yes	X	X
Street #	4	Yes	X
Street Name	4	Yes	X
PO Box	10	Yes		X

As described above, this produces the following combinations:

• Condition #1

  ZIP/PC, Last Name, Street Number, Street Name

• Condition #2

  ZIP/PC, Last Name, PO Box

For this example, take the following records:

Name:	Joe Smith	Suzi Smith
Address:	326 Main Street	405 Main St
City/State/PC:	Pembroke MA 02066	Pembroke, MA 02066

The following matchcode keys would be generated:

Cond#	ZIP/PC	Last Name	Street #	Street Name	PO Box
1	02066	SMITH	326	MAIN
2	02066	SMITH	405	MAIN

According to these matchcode keys, it is clear that these two records do not satisfy condition #1. But because blank field matching is selected, they do satisfy condition #2. The Zip/PC, Last Name, and PO Box are exactly the same. Therefore, the two records do match.

Obviously, this is not the correct result. Making one change to the matchcode:

Component	Size	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	Yes	X	X
Last Name	5	Yes	X	X
Street #	4	Yes	X
Street Name	4	Yes	X
PO Box	10	No		X

The same comparison is done for combination #2, but the match is disallowed this time because the matchcode now indicates that missing (blank) information is not allowed to figure in the matching condition.

Looking at another example (using the same matchcode):

Name:	Joe Smith	Suzi Smith
Address:	PO Box 123	PO Box 456
City/State/PC:	Pembroke MA 02066	Pembroke, MA 02066

This pairing produces the following matchcode keys:

Cond#	ZIP/PC	Last Name	Street #	Street Name	PO Box
1	02066	SMITH			123
2	02066	SMITH			456

This record has the same problem as before, but this time combination #1 is the cause.

An even better matchcode would be:

Component	Size	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	Yes	X	X
Last Name	5	Yes	X	X
Street #	4	No	X
Street Name	4	No	X
PO Box	10	No		X

This is one matchcode that works well. There is one more possible tweak, however: Turn on Both Blank Fields for the Street # component. Occasionally, MatchUp Object may encounter records such as:

Name:	Joe Notarangello	Suzi Notarangello
Address:	Oceanfront Estates	Oceanfront Est.
City/State/PC:	Pembroke, MA 02066	Pembroke, MA 02066

This reflects a trend in up-scale neighborhoods, where neither street address has a Street # component, though it is very likely these records should match.

So this new improved matchcode will account for these situations:

Component	Size	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	Yes	X	X
Last Name	5	Yes	X	X
Street #	4	Yes	X
Street Name	4	No	X
PO Box	10	No		X

Matchcode Mapping

Matchcodes deal with the abstract. The components in a matchcode represent specific types of data, but they aren’t directly linked to the fields in databases. Mapping creates the link between the data and the matchcode.

For example, take the following matchcode:

Component	Size	Fuzzy	1
ZIP5	5	No	X
Last Name	5	No	X
First Name	5	No	X
Company	10	No	X

Add a database that contains the following fields:

NAME:	Contains full names (“Mr. John Smith”).
COMPANY:	Contains company names (“Melissa Data”).
ADD1:	Contains first (primary) address line (“22382 Avenida Empresa”).
ADD2:	Contains second (secondary) address line (“Suite 34”).
CSZ:	Contains City/State/Zip (“Rancho Santa Margarita, CA 92688”).

An application must create a link between a database’s fields (Name, Company, Add1, Add2 and CSZ) and the matchcode components (Zip5, Last Name, First Name, Company).

With the example above, it may appear that the application will have to contain extensive splitting routines. This is not the case. All that is necessary is to tell MatchUp what type of data is in a specific field and the format of that data.

In the example above, an application would use the following matchcode mapping:

Component	Database Field	Matchcode Mapping
ZIP5	CSZ	CityStZip
Last Name	NAME	FullName
First Name	NAME	FullName
Company	COMPANY	Company

This mapping tells MatchUp that the 5-digit ZIP Code information is in a field named “CSZ” which is described as a field containing city, state, and ZIP Code information. The Last Name can be found in a field called “NAME” and is described as a full name field (which is a full name sequenced: Pre, FN, MN, LN, Suf).

Five Mapping Rules

Matchcode mappings follow five rules:

1. For every Matchcode Component, the application must specify a mapping. The only exception is described in rule 2.

2. Actual Address components names (such as Street Number, Street Pre-Directional, Street Name, Street Suffix, Street Post-Directional, PO Box, and Street Secondary, and Global Components) are not listed for mapping purposes. Instead, the names Address Line 1 and Address Line 2 through Address Line 8 are used. The example below used four address components in the matchcode (Street #, Street Name, Street Secondary, PO Box). However, it only used two address lines.

3. If a matchcode uses any address components, Address Lines 1-8 will be listed after all other components regardless of where the address component appears in the matchcode. In the following example, the address components are listed before company in the matchcode, but Address Lines 1-8 are listed at the end (after company).

4. If a matchcode uses address components, Address Lines 1-8 will require at least one line to be mapped, but not all. If a database only has one address field, an application will only need to map Address 1 to that field. All other components must be mapped.

5. Address Lines should be mapped from the top down (Address Line 1, then 2 through 8).

Enhancing the matchcode in the previous example:

Component	Size	Fuzzy	1	2
ZIP5	5	No	X
Last Name	5	No	X
First Name	5	No	X
Street #	5	No	X
Street Name	5	No	X
Street Secondary	12	No	X
PO Box	10	No		X
Company	10	No	X	X

Again, MatchUp doesn’t use the individual address components. They are replaced with Address 1, Address 2, and Address 3. So, the application would use the following Matchcode Mapping:

Matchcode Component	Database Field	Matchcode Mapping
ZIP9	CSZ	CityStZip
Last Name	NAME	FullName
First Name	NAME	FullName
Company	COMPANY	Company
Address Line 1	ADD1	Address
Address Line 2	ADD2	Address
Address Line 3	(none)

Note on Rule #1

If a database does not contain a field for information called for by a component in a matchcode, such as company field in the above example, then that matchcode should not be used to dedupe that database.

Use a different matchcode or modify an existing matchcode, as outlined later in this chapter.

However, if a matchcode calls for last name, for example, and the database only has full name, then simply map the full name field to the last name and MatchUp Object will handle parsing the field.

Optimization

Some matchcodes process much faster than others in spite of the fact that they detect the same matches. This section will assist in creating the most efficient matchcodes. Ninety-nine percent of the time, clicking the Optimize button in the Matchcode Editor will sufficiently optimize a matchcode. This discussion is included so developers can better understand why certain things are done while optimizing, as well as what can be done to make the optimizer work more effectively.

Optimizing can make a significant difference in processing speed. 58-hour runs have been reduced to four hours simply by optimizing the matchcode.

It is important, however, that the developer verifies that a matchcode works in the intended way before attempting any optimizations. If a matchcode is not functioning properly, these optimizations will not help, and could quite possibly make the situation worse.

Component Sequence

As discussed in the previous section, the first component of a matchcode has certain restrictions:

• It must be used in every combination.

• It cannot use certain types of Fuzzy Matching: Containment; Frequency; Fast Near; Frequency Near or Accurate Near (other types are okay, though).

• It cannot use Initial Only matching.

• It cannot use One Blank Field matching.

• It cannot use Swap matching.

If the matchcode’s second component also follows these conditions, MatchUp Object will incorporate it into its clustering scheme (see MatchUp Hub > Matchcode Optimization for more information on clustering). Additional components, if they follow in sequence (third, fourth, and so on), will be used if they too satisfy these conditions. Incorporating a component into a cluster greatly reduces the number of comparisons MatchUp Object has to perform which, in turn, speeds up your processing.

This is a simple example of optimization:

Component	Size	Fuzzy	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	No	Yes	X	X
Street #	5	No	Yes	X
Street Name	5	No	No	X
PO Box	10	No	No		X
Last Name	5	No	Yes	X	X

As shown here, MatchUp Object will only cluster by ZIP/PC. But note that the last component satisfies all the conditions listed earlier.

Component	Size	Fuzzy	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	No	Yes	X	X
Last Name	5	No	Yes	X	X
Street #	5	No	Yes	X
Street Name	5	No	No	X
PO Box	10	No	No		X

This simple optimization will produce significant improvements in speed. The Matchcode Optimizer will always perform this optimization.

Fuzzy Algorithms

Fuzzy algorithms fall into two categories: early matching and late matching.

Early matching algorithms are algorithms where a string is transformed into a (usually shorter) representation and comparisons are performed on this result. In MatchUp, these transformations are performed during key generation (the BuildKey function in each interface), which means that the early matching algorithms pay a speed penalty once per record: as each record’s key is built.

Late matching algorithms are actual comparison algorithms. Usually, one string is shifted in one direction or another, and often a matrix of some sort is used to derive a result. These transformations are performed during key comparison. As a result, late matching algorithms pay a speed penalty every time a record is compared to another record. This may happen several hundred times per record.

Obviously, late matching is much slower than early matching. If a particular matchcode is very slow, changing to a faster fuzzy matching algorithm may improve the speed. Often, a faster algorithm will give nearly the same results, but it is a good idea to test any such change before processing live data.

The fuzzy algorithms, ranked from slowest to fastest:

Algorithm	Late or Early	Speed (10=fastest)
Jaro	Late	1
Jaro-Winkler	Late	1
n-Gram	Late	1
Needleman-Wunch	Late	1
Smith-Waterman-Gotoh	Late	1
Dice’s Coefficient	Late	1
Jaccard Similarity Coefficient	Late	1
Overlap Coefficient	Late	1
Longest Common Substring	Late	1
Double Metaphone	Late	1
Accurate Near	Late	1
Fast Near	Late	3
Containment	Late	4
Frequency Near	Late	4
Frequency	Late	6
Phonetex	Early	7
Soundex	Early	8
Vowels Only	Early	9
Numerics Only	Early	9
Consonants Only	Early	9
Alphas Only	Early	9
Exact	N/A	10

The speed values are only rough estimates.

Another benefit of using a faster fuzzy algorithm is that an application may be able to exploit the component sequence optimization shown earlier. All of the early matching algorithms satisfy the restrictions for first components.

The Matchcode Optimizer will not perform this optimization as it can have a significant impact on matching results.

Unnecessary Components

Components that are not used in any combinations (in other words, they have no X’s in columns 1 through 16) are a sign of poor matchcode design.

Take the following matchcode:

Component	Size	Fuzzy	Blank	1	2
ZIP/PC	5	No	Yes	X	X
Last Name	5	No	Yes	X	X
First Name	5	No	Yes
Street #	5	No	Yes	X
Street Name	5	No	No	X
PO Box	10	No	No		X

First name is not being used in any combination. Perhaps it was used in a combination that has since been removed from this matchcode, but is no longer necessary.

Unnecessary Combinations

Take the following matchcode:

Component	Size	Fuzzy	Blank	1	2	3	4
ZIP5	5	No	Yes	X	X	X	X
Last Name	5	No	Yes	X	X	X	X
First Name	5	No	Yes
Street #	5	No	Yes	X		X
Street Name	5	No	No	X		X
PO Box	10	No	No		X		X

Here are the four conditions for matching:

Condition #1:	ZIP/PC	Last Name	First Name	Street #	Street Name
Condition #2:	ZIP/PC	Last Name	First Name			PO Box
Condition #3:	ZIP/PC	Last Name		Street #	Street Name
Condition #4:	ZIP/PC	Last Name				PO Box

There is no match that will be detected by condition #1 that would not be detected by condition #3. Similarly, matches found by condition #2 will always be found by condition #4. In other words, condition 3 is a subset of condition 1, and condition 2 is a subset of condition 4. Subsets are rarely desirable.

So either conditions 1 and 2 aren’t needed or conditions 3 and 4 were a mistake. If conditions 1 and 2 are eliminated, the First Name component should also be removed, as it will not be needed.

Swap Matching

Swap matching is used to catch matches when two fields are flipped around. The most common occasion is catching the “John Smith” and “Smith John” records. But there are other uses:

Comparing Household Records

When there are two or three first or full names per record, a list provider may claim that every record is always “husband, wife, then children,” but records will read wife then child and husband:

In the above example, select Either component can match for Swap Pairs A, B, and C

Comparing up to Three Address Lines

Although the address splitter works well in the US and Canada, some European countries can cause problems. A typical Euro-Matchcode will not use street split components and look at three address lines instead. The swap matching ensures that every address line is compared with every other address line.

Again, select Either component can match for Swap Pairs A, B, and C.

Don’t always discard the street split component matchcodes because you are working with a foreign database. Sometimes the street splitter will yield usable results. Therefore, a combination of approaches will often work.

Result Codes (MatchUp)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Personator

Overview

Personator Component is an all-in-one contact verification and appending Web service. It allows you to pass in names, addresses, phone numbers, and email addresses; simultaneously parsing them, making conservative corrections, and even appending data derived from the input. It can also leverage all of these inputs to verify whole contact records. Personator Component can be configured to perform one or more of the primary actions the service provides: Verify and Append.

• Verifies name corresponds to address, email, and phone data.

• Appends missing name and company name, phone number, and/or email address.

• Provide current addresses for people and companies that have moved with 20+ years of history.

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Personator for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Personator Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Melissa Cloud

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for the Personator Component to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Enable Compression	Check this to enable GZip compression. This can have up to a 10% increase in speed.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent to the Melissa Cloud per request.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for the Personator Component to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times the Personator Component should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (Personator Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

Personator SSIS Component Info	Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Personator Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	License Expiration	Displays the date the License Key expires.
Personator Web Service Info	Service Response	Displays the Web Service response status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the Personator Web Service.

Add Component

To add Personator Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Personator Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Personator Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Personator Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Personator Component to bring up the interface. See Personator Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Personator Tabs

• Input
• Actions
• Processing Options
• Output
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

The input tab configures the fields that will be used for the Personator Component. Existing field names can be selected using the drop-down boxes. New field names can be created by typing the name into the box.

Apply Free Form:

Check this option to use the Free Form input.

Free Form	Free Form	Enter the whole address as one line, and the Personator component will attempt to identify, parse, and reorganize the input data.
Address Fields	Company Name	The company associated with the name/address.
	Address Line 1	The first line of street address information. It may also contain secondary address information such as suite and private mailbox numbers.
	Address Line 2	The second line of street address information, if any.
	City	The city.
	State	The state.
	Zip	The postal (ZIP) code.
	Country	The country. Personator currently supports the U.S. and Canada.
Melissa Address Key	MAK	This is a globally unique and persistent key for the location, even if parts of the address change. When an address is fully validated this field returns a 10-digit proprietary key for the address. With AddressKey (US and Canada only), if an address zip code changes, the AddressKey would also change. Melissa Address Key (MAK) is independent and will not change. This makes MAK a good way to permanently identify and locate addresses. Once you have a MAK it can be used as an input in most Melissa services and thus is a good tool for deduping.
Name Fields	If parsed First and Last Names are present, Fullname will not be used to verify a record.
	Full Name	This field can contain a full name. We will parse and check Names only if the First Name and Last Name fields are left blank.
	First Name	The given (First) name. Used for verifying a contact Name against other contact input data types (Address, Phone, etc.).
	Last Name	The family (Last) name. Used for verifying a contact Name against other contact input data types (Address, Phone, etc.).
Other Fields	Social Security	The social security number.
	Phone	The telephone number.
	Email	The email address.
	IP Address	Retrieve IP Address information
	Birth Day	Insert Birth Day DD
	Birth Month	Insert Birth Month MM
	Birth Year	Insert Birth Year YY

The Actions tab allows you to specify which actions you would like to perform.

Personator Actions	Choose which action you wish to perform with the Personator component.
	Verify	(Default) Will return the relationships between your different input data pieces. It can show you if your name, address, email, and phone number are correlated.
	Move	Updates the address when a move is found.
	Append	Allows you to enrich your contact records with data returned by the Personator component.
	Append Options	Blank	Append data when incoming information is blank.
		Always	Always append data with the information provided by Melissa.
		Check Error	Append data when incoming information cannot be verified.

Verify and Append Options	Centric Hint	Used to set which piece of information to use as the primary point of reference when verifying/appending data.
		Auto	(Default) First uses Address, if available, followed by Phone if no Address is available, and lastly Email if neither Address nor Email are available.
		Social Security	Uses Social Security number as the primary point of reference.
		Address	Uses Address as the primary point of reference.
		Phone	Uses Phone as the primary point of reference.
		Email	Uses Email as the primary point of reference.
		Name	Uses Name as the primary point of reference – This is not included in Centric Hint Auto option.
	Social Security Number Cascade Option	Personator will attempt to match on 4 scenarios: Full Name & Full SSN Last Name & Full SSN Full Name & SSN Last 4 Last Name & SSN Last 4 Returned Result codes will indicate the level of matching.
Name Options	Name Hint	Varying	(Default) If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with no bias toward either name order.
		Definitely Full	Name will always be treated as normal name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation.
		Very Likely Full	Name will be treated as normal name order unless inverse order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation.
		Probably Full	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward normal name order.
		Probably Inverse	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward inverse name order.
		Very Likely Inverse	Name will be treated as inverse name order unless normal order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation.
		Definitely Inverse	Name will always be treated as inverse name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation.
		Mixed First Name	Name field is expected to only contain prefixes, first, and middle names.
		Mixed Last Name	Name field is expected to only contain last names and suffixes.
	Middle Name Logic	Determines the handling of middle names.
		Parse Logic	(Default) Middle names that are typically last names are considered to be part of a hyphenated last name.
		Hypenated Last	The middle word is assumed to be part of the last name. For Example: “Matthew Edward Jones” is treated as “Matthew Edward-Jones.”
		Middle Name	The middle word is assumed to be a middle name. For example: “Matthew Svensson Jones”. “Svensson” would be considered a middle name instead of part of the last name.
	Salutation Format	Sets the salutation format for the response.
		Formal	(Default) Mr. Smith
		Informal	John
		First Last	John Smith
	Gender Population	Default is Mixed. Sets the gender balance of the source data, either predominantly Male, Female, or Mixed (evenly split).
	Gender Aggression	Default is Neutral. Sets how aggressive genderization is for neutral first names, either Neutral, Conservative, or Aggressive.
	Correct First Name	Checked by default. If checked, allows common spelling corrections for the First Name field.
	Standardize Company Name	Checked by default. If checked, the Company Name field will be returned with standard abbreviation, capitalization, and punctuation rules applied.
Geo Options	Decennial CensusKey Option	Using the drop down menu, set the preferred Census information returned, whether the latest version or the decennial version. 2020 - Return the 2020 static decennial census database released. 2010 - Return the 2010 static decennial census database released. Off - Default. Return the latest Census information available.
Address Options	Diacritics	Default is auto. If on, French language characters will be returned.
	Advanced Address Correction	AAC uses the Full Name/Company Name input to perform more advanced address correction.
	USPS Preferred City	Default is off. For every city in the United States, there is an official name that is preferred by the U.S. Postal Service. There may be one or more unofficial or “vanity” names in use. Normally, Personator Component allows you to verify addresses using known vanity names. If Preferred City is on, the preferred city name will be substituted for all vanity names when it verifies an address.
Phone Options	Phone Format	Choose one of six different available phone formats: 800-6245: (Default) Parenthesis with dash. 800 6245: Parenthesis with space. 800 800 6245: Spaces. 800-800-6245: Dashes. 800.800.6245: Periods. 8008006245: No space.
Email Options	Database Look up	Checked by default. If checked, verification of domain names will be attempted using a database of valid domains.
	Standardize Casing	Checked by default. If checked, all letters in the Email field will be changed to lower case before any checking occurs.
	Correct Syntax	Checked by default. If checked, the syntax of the Email field will be corrected.
	Update Domain	Checked by default. If checked, determines whether the domain name is out of date and updates it.

The Output Personator tab allows you to specify which fields to have in your output file.

Output Groups/Columns	These are preset groups for the output fields. Check the checkbox next to the groups/columns that you want to include in your output.
Details	When an output field is selected, any details about the column will be displayed here.

The Pass-Through Columns tab allows you to choose which columns, if any, you want to have in your output file.

Field Name	This displays the column name of fields from your input data.
Current Usage	The current usage of the field. E.g. Unused or as Input.
Data Type	The data type of the field.
Length	The maximum length of the field.

The Personator Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: Address and Name Verified - VR01 Full Address and Full Name Verified - VR01 AND NOT VS02 AND NOT VS12 Full Address and Full Company Verified - VR07 AND NOT VS02 AND NOT VS22 Address, Name, and Phone Verified - (VR01 AND VR04) OR (VR02 AND VR04) One or more components verified - VR* Appended one or more contact pieces - DA* Move Address Detected - AS12
	Custom Filter Expression	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (Personator)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

• Address Type Result Codes

Personator World

Overview

Melissa’s Personator World Component is a new ID verification solution makes it easy to check and verify your data in real time. Using trusted reference and national databases, the service can verify a person’s name, address, phone, email, date of birth and national ID. As a cloud web service, it can be integrated into applications and services that need to maintain trust in their data as well as detect and prevent fraud globally such as in shopping/eCommerce platforms or other applications involving financial transactions.

The web service features 2 different selectable actions, each of which is a separate level of subscription:

The Check Action cleans and standardizes your names, addresses, phones and emails. During this stage, the web service validates and determines whether:

• Name is in a valid format

• Address is deliverable

• Email address exists

• Phone number is callable

The Verify Action takes the standardized name, phone, email and address from the Check Action and performs ID verification. Additional input such as the individuals National ID and date of birth can be verified as well depending on the country. Result codes are returned indicating what matches were found for the given input (address match, email match, last name match, first name match, etc.)

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Personator World for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Personator World Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Melissa Cloud

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for the Personator Component to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Enable Compression	Check this to enable GZip compression. This can have up to a 10% increase in speed.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent to the Melissa Cloud per request.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for the Personator World Component to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times the Personator World Component should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (Personator World Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

Personator World SSIS Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date the License Key expires.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Personator World Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Web Services Connectivity Info	Connect	Displays the connection status of the web service.
	Web Service	Displays the name of the web service.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the web service.
	Service Request	Displays the web service response status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.

Add Component

To add the Personator World Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Personator World Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Personator World Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Personator World Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Personator World Component to bring up the interface. See Personator World Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Personator World Tabs

• Actions
• Name
• Address
• Phone
• Email
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

The Actions tab allows you to specify which actions you would like to perform.

Personator Actions	Choose which action you wish to perform with the Personator World component.
	Check	Determines whether the data within a submitted record is valid, e.g. whether or not a given postal code contains the given city. It can also make limited corrections and appends to the data. Check looks at each data point separately.
	Verify	After the data has been checked, identity verification is performed and result codes (KV*) are returned to indicate what pieces of input data have been matched against trusted referenced data.

The Name tab allows you to parse and genderize a full name into its respective components. This also generates salutations and allows you to filter out detected company names, vulgarities, and/or suspicious names.

Input Columns	Full Name	The full name of the contact.
	Company	The company name.
Name Options	Name Order Hint	Varying	(Default) If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with no bias toward either name order.
		Definitely Full	Name will always be treated as normal name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation.
		Very Likely Full	Name will be treated as normal name order unless inverse order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation.
		Probably Full	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward normal name order.
		Probably Inverse	If necessary, statistical logic will be employed to determine name order, with a bias toward inverse name order.
		Very Likely Inverse	Name will be treated as inverse name order unless normal order is clearly indicated by formatting or punctuation.
		Definitely Inverse	Name will always be treated as inverse name order, regardless of formatting or punctuation.
		Mixed First Name	Name field is expected to only contain prefixes, first, and middle names.
		Mixed Last Name	Name field is expected to only contain last names and suffixes.
	Middle Name Logic	Determines the handling of middle names.
		Parse Logic	(Default) Middle names that are typically last names are considered to be part of a hyphenated last name.
		Hypenated Last	The middle word is assumed to be part of the last name. For Example: “Matthew Edward Jones” is treated as “Matthew Edward-Jones.”
		Middle Name	The middle word is assumed to be a middle name. For example: “Matthew Svensson Jones”. “Svensson” would be considered a middle name instead of part of the last name.
	Gender Population	Default is Mixed. Sets the gender balance of the source data, either predominantly Male, Female, or Mixed (evenly split).
	Gender Aggression	Default is Neutral. Sets how aggressive genderization is for neutral first names, either Neutral, Conservative, or Aggressive.
	Correct Misspellings in First Name	If checked, allows common spelling corrections for the First Name field.
	Company	You may overwrite the company field in your input file or output a new standardized company name field. Ex. MD_Company.
Output Name Columns	Name 1	Prefix	The prefix (such as “Mr.” or “Dr.”) from the full name.
		First Name	The first name from the full name.
		Middle Name	The middle name from the full name.
		Last Name	The last name from the full name.
		Suffix	The suffix (such as “Jr.” or “III”) from the full name.
		Gender	A one-character value indicating the gender of the first name.
			Code	Description
			M	Male
			F	Female
			U	Unknown first name or no first name present
			N	A neutral first name
	Name 2	If the full name input contained multiple names, the second name will be returned here.

The Address tab allows you to map your address input fields. At least one Address Line and the country is required.

You can also map your output fields.

Input Columns
	Company	The company/organization name.
	Address Line 1	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 2	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 3	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 4	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 5	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 6	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 7	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Address Line 8	The input field for the address. This should contain the delivery address information (house number, thoroughfare, building, suite, etc.) but should not contain locality information (locality, administrative area, postal code, etc.) which have their own inputs.
	Locality	The most common population center data element. US Term: City Canada Term: Municipality
	Administrative Area	The most common population center data element. US Term: State Canada Term: Province
	Postal Code	The complete postal code for a particular delivery point. If all three elements are provided and the PostalCode is incorrect, it can be corrected from the data on the Locality and AdministrativeArea.
	Country	The country name, abbreviation, or code.
	If Country field is not specified or is empty, use country	The country name, abbreviation, or code to use if the Country field is empty.
Address Options	Output Script	This is the script type used for all applicable fields.
	Country of Origin	This is used to determine whether or not to include the country name as the last line in FormattedAddress.
	Line Separator	This is the line separator used for the Formatted Address result.
	Delivery Lines	This options allows you to specify if the Address Lines 1-8 should contain just the delivery address or the entire address.
Output Columns
	Organization	Matches the Company input element. It is not modified or populated by the service.
	Address Line 1	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 2	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 3	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 4	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 5	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 6	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 7	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Address Line 8	This will return the standardized or corrected contents of the input address. These lines will include the entire address including the locality, administrative area, and postal code.
	Country Name	The standardized contents of the Country Name element.
	Latitude	The parsed Latitude element from the input.
	Longitude	The parsed Longitude element from the input.
	Dependent Locality	The standardized contents of the Dependent Locality element.
	Locality	The standardized contents of the Locality element.
	Administrative Area	The standardized contents of the Administrative Area element.
	Postal Code	The standardized contents of the Postal Code element.
	Formatted Address	The address in the correct format for mailing from the country specified in the Country Of Origin element. This includes the Organization as the first line, one or more lines in the origin country’s format, and the destination country (if required). Separate lines will be delimited by what is specified in the option.
	Address Type	A one-character code for the type of address coded. This element works only for US and Canadian addresses.
	Address Key	A unique key for the address. Only for US and Canadian addresses. The AddressKey can be used by other Melissa services, such as Geocoder or RBDI.
	ISO 3166-1 Country Code	Country Code	The parsed CountryCode element from the input. For example:
			Country	Code
			United States	US
			Canada	CA
			Philippines	PH
		Country ISO3	The parsed CountryISO3 element from the input. For example:
			Country	Code
			United States	USA
			Canada	CAN
			Philippines	PHL
		Country Number	The parsed CountryNumber element from the input. For example:
			Country	Code
			United States	840
			Canada	124
			Philippines	608
		Country Subdivision Code	The ISO3166-2 code for country subdivisions, usually the administrative area for a country. The format is the 2 letter country code followed by a dash followed by 2 or 3 characters or two numbers. Examples are: US-CA, CN-16, or AU-VIC. Currently, this field is only populated for some countries. These countries are: AU, BR, CA, CN, CR, DM, GT, HN, NI, MX, SV, US.
Additional Output Columns
	Parsed Dependent Thoroughfare Columns	Thoroughfare	This is used when there are more than one thoroughfares with the same name in one locality. An adjoining thoroughfare is used to uniquely identify the target thoroughfare. US Term: Dependent street or block data element.
		Pre-Direction	Cardinal directional at the beginning of the dependent thoroughfare. The prefix directional is parsed from the Dependent Thoroughfare element. For example, if the dependent thoroughfare is “W Hickory Ln”, the dependent thoroughfare pre direction would be “W.”
		Leading Type	Thoroughfare type at the beginning of the dependent thoroughfare. The leading type is parsed from the Dependent Thoroughfare element. For example, if the dependent thoroughfare is “St. Hickory E”, the dependent thoroughfare leading type would be “St.”
		Name	Dependent thoroughfare name parsed from the Dependent Thoroughfare element. For example, if the dependent thoroughfare is “E Hickory Ln”, the dependent thoroughfare name would be “Hickory.”
		Trailing Type	Thoroughfare type at the end of the dependent thoroughfare. The trailing type is parsed from the Dependent Thoroughfare element. For example, if the dependent thoroughfare is “W Hickory Ln”, the dependent thoroughfare trailing type would be “Ln.”
		Post-Direction	Cardinal directional at the end of the dependent thoroughfare. The postfix directional is parsed from the Dependent Thoroughfare element. For example, if the dependent thoroughfare is “Hickory Ln N”, the dependent thoroughfare post direction would be “N.”
	Parsed Regional Columns	Double-Dependent Locality	A double dependent locality is a logical area unit that is smaller than a dependent locality but bigger than a thoroughfare. This field is very rarely used. Great Britain is an example of a country that uses double dependent locality.
		Sub-Administrative Area	This is a logical area that that is smaller than the administrative area but larger than a locality. While many countries can have a sub-administrative area value, it is very rarely used as part of an official address. US Term: County
		Sub-National Area	A sub-national area is a logical area unit that is larger than an administrative area but smaller than the country itself. It is extremely rarely used.
	Parsed Postal Facility Columns	Post Box	Post box information for a particular delivery point.
	Parsed Thoroughfare Columns	Premises Type	The parsed Premises Type element from the output.
		Thoroughfare	The parsed Thoroughfare element from the output. This value is a part of the address lines and contains all the sub-elements of the thoroughfare like trailing type, thoroughfare name, pre direction, post direction, etc.
		Pre-Direction	The parsed Thoroughfare Pre-Direction element from the output. This value is a part of the Thoroughfare field. US Term: Pre Direction
		Leading Type	The parsed Thoroughfare Leading Type element from the output. A leading type is a thoroughfare type that is placed before the thoroughfare. This value is a part of the Thoroughfare field. For example, the thoroughfare type of “Rue” in Canada and France is placed before the thoroughfare, making it a leading type.
		Premises Number	The parsed Premises Number element from the output. US Term: House Number
		Name	The parsed Thoroughfare Name element from the output. This value is a part of the Thoroughfare field. US Term: Street Name
		Trailing Type	The parsed Thoroughfare Trailing Type element from the output. A trailing type is a thoroughfare type that is placed after the thoroughfare. This value is a part of the Thoroughfare field. For example, the thoroughfare type of “Avenue” in the US is placed after the thoroughfare, making it a trailing type. US Term: Street Suffix
		Post-Direction	The parsed Thoroughfare Post-Direction element from the output. This value is a part of the Thoroughfare field. US Term: Post Direction
	Parsed Sub-Premises Columns	Building	Descriptive name identifying an individual location.
		Sub Premises	Alphanumeric code identifying an individual location. US Term: Suite
		Sub-Premises Type	The parsed Sub-Premises Type element from the output. US Term: Suite Name
		Sub-Premises Number	The parsed SubPremisesNumber element from the output. US Term: Suite Number

The Phone tab allows you to verify a phone number as valid and append geographic information for the wire center. You can also designate a line type (land line, cell, or VOIP) and phone type (business, residential, or home office).

Input Columns	Phone Number	The phone number to be verified.
	Country	The country name, abbreviation, or code.
	If the above Country field is empty, use country	Select the country to use if the country field is blank.
	Select the Country from which dialing is done	Select the origin country from which the dialing will occur.
Phone Number Verification Options	Premium Mode	Validates against a database of known phone numbers. If a number was last real-time validated more than 30 days ago, then a real-time check will be performed.
	Express Mode	Quickly validate against a database of known phone numbers.
	Default Calling Code	Set the default calling code to use when the country could not be detected from the phone number or country input.
	Time To Wait	Set how long the service takes (in seconds) to query a phone number for Premium or Caller ID before it times out.
	Caller ID	When checked this returns the name or association linked to the phone number at the time of registration, if available.
Output Columns	Phone Number	The standardized phone number after a successful call to the service.
	Phone Subscriber Number	The subscriber number associated with the phone number passed in.
	Country Name	The name of the country for the inputted phone number.
	Phone Country Dialing Code	A digit, or combination of digits, known as the country dialing code. This will return the digit(s) dialed after the international prefix.
	International Prefix	The international exit code needed to call a number outside of the dialing country. If the input country and country of origin differ, this will return the digit(s) required to be dialed before the country code.
	National Prefix	A digit, or combination of digits, known as the national prefix. The national prefix must be dialed before an area (city) code when calling a number within the same country but outside the numbering area.
	National Destination Code	A digit, or combination of digits, known as the national destination code. The national destination code that identifies a numbering area within a country (or group of countries) and/or network/services.
	Locality	The locality (city) associated with the phone number passed to the Lookup function. Because of phone portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	Administrative Area	The administrative area associated with the inputted phone number. Because of phone number portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	Language	The predominant language of the phone’s detected geographical location. The field will return the written out form of the language name. For example: “French”. Because of phone number portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	UTC	The universal time code for the time zone associated with the inputted phone number. UTC returns the time zone specified with the format: +/- hh:mm. Because of phone number portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	DST	Daylight Savings Time. This returns a ‘Y’ (for yes) or ‘N’ (for no) to distinguish whether the region of the inputted phone number observes daylight savings time. Because of phone number portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	Latitude	The latitude of the geographically identifiable service area of the exchange. Latitude is the geographic coordinate of the locale, city, municipality, or other geographically identifiable service area of the exchange measured in degrees north or south of the equator. Because of phone number portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	Longitude	The longitude of the geographically identifiable service area of the exchange. Longitude is the geographic coordinate of the locale, city, municipality, or other geographically identifiable service area of the exchange measured in degrees east or west of the Greenwich Meridian. Because of phone number portability, geographical information may not reflect the true location of the owner of the phone number for wireless and VOIP numbers.
	Carrier	The name of the phone’s carrier.
	Country Abbreviation	The abbreviation of the country for the inputted phone number.
	International Phone Number	The number you would dial, given your output fields, in order to successfully send a call.
	Postal Code	The zip code that corresponds to a locality inside the United States.
	Caller ID	From the CallerID service, which appends a name to the targeted phone number.

The Email tab allows you to verify the domain of an email address as well as correct syntax, typos, update older domain names, filter by bad mailbox names (noreply, spam…), and FCC restricted mobile email domains.

Input Columns	Email Address	The email address.
Output Columns	Email Address	The email address, including any corrections or changes made by the component.
	Mail Box Name	The mailbox or user name portion of the email address (All characters preceding the “@” character). With an example email of sample@melissadata.com the mailbox name would be “sample”.
	Domain Name	The domain name portion of the email address (All characters between the “@” and “.” characters). With an example email of sample@melissadata.com the domain name would be “melissadata”.
	Top Level Domain	The top level domain name portion of the email address (All characters after the “.”). With an example email of sample@melissadata.com the top level domain name would be “com”.
	Top Level Domain Description	The description associated with the top-level domain name of the email address.
	DateChecked	The date the email was last checked. DateChecked field returns a UTC, Unix Time (Epoch Time).
Mailbox Verification Options	Express Mode	Also known as fast mode. Quickly validates against database of known email addresses.
	Time To Wait	Select how long the web service will wait before it times out on an email.
	Premium Mode	Also known as real time mode. Perform real time, live validation of email addresses.
Advanced Email Options	Un-check to turn OFF Domain Correction	When checked, this activates fuzzy email domain correction if the domain is a suspected typo.

The Pass-Through Columns tab allows you to choose which columns, if any, you want to have in your output file.

Field Name	This displays the column name of fields from your input data.
Current Usage	The current usage of the field. E.g. Unused or as Input.
Data Type	The data type of the field.
Length	The maximum length of the field.

The Personator World Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: Address and Name Verified - VR01 Full Address and Full Name Verified - VR01 AND NOT VS02 AND NOT VS12 Full Address and Full Company Verified - VR07 AND NOT VS02 AND NOT VS22 Address, Name, and Phone Verified - (VR01 AND VR04) OR (VR02 AND VR04) One or more components verified - VR* Appended one or more contact pieces - DA* Move Address Detected - AS12
	Custom Filter Expression	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (Personator World)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Profiler

Overview

Melissa’s Data Profiler is a component that can be used to analyze a table’s data. This analysis provides a large number of statistics at varying levels of detail. Using these statistics, you can make educated decisions on what strategies you may need to employ to handle the data.

Supported Data Profiling Techniques

• Discovery
• Monitoring
• Columns and Data Types
• Data Analysis Summary

The analysis of new data before it is inserted into a Data Warehouse. This analysis is used to ensure that the data is correctly fielded, consistently formatted, standardized, etc. Because it can be very difficult to fix problems once data has been merged into a Data Warehouse, it is critical that issues are detected and eradicated prior to the merge.

The continual analysis of warehoused data in an effort to ensure a consistent quality of data. In systems where records are actively inserted, updated and deleted, it is nearly impossible to maintain a comprehensive set of business rules that foresee every situation. In addition, in systems that support multiple methods of access (ie, web, desktop, tablet/phone), it can be difficult to ensure that all program code adequately enforces all business rules.

The Profiler is designed to work with a variety of column types, and analyzes data to ensure that it adheres to the limitations imposed by the user-specified type.

• Numeric: Integers (8, 16, 32 or 64-bit), Floats (single or double), Decimal and Currency.

• String: Unicode and Multi-byte, both fixed- or variable-length.

• Date and/or Time, of varying resolutions.

• Boolean

Deep data analysis is performed on several levels:

• General Formatting analysis is used to determine if the input data ‘looks’ like what is expected.

• Content analysis relies on reference data to determine if the input data contains information consistent with what is expected.

• Field analysis determines if the input data is consistently fielded, using the data contained in the entire record to analyze the context of the data.

Service Speed

What kinds of speeds/throughput can the Profiler component do?

Different analysis features directly affect component performance. Options with data aggregation and sort analysis have a high impact on speed of the component.

The following are the average speeds for 1 Thread across different combinations of Actions selected:

Append Mode Combination	Records per Minute
Data Aggregation	46,800
MatchUp Analysis	115,000
Rightfielder Analysis	100,000
Sort Analysis	105,000
Data Aggregation, MatchUp Analysis	47,100
Data Aggregation, Rightfielder Analysis	34,000
Data Aggregation, Sort Analysis	280
MatchUp Analysis, Rightfielder Analysis	91,000
MatchUp Analysis, Sort Analysis	105,000
RightFielder Analysis, Sort Analysis	81,000
Data Aggregation, MatchUp Analysis, Rightfielder Analysis	33,333
Data Aggregation, MatchUp Analysis, Sort Analysis	1,100
Data Aggregation, RightFielder Analysis, Sort Analysis	310
Matchup Analysis, RightFielder Analysis, Sort Analysis	80,500
Data Aggregation, Matchup Analysis, RightFielder Analysis, Sort Analysis	130

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Profiler for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Profiler Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Licensing	License Key	Your License Key will activate the product for use.
	Customer ID	Displays the Customer ID associated with the License Key.
Profiler Settings	Data File Path	This should point to the folder on the local system that contains the Profiler Component and its data files. The default path should work unless you install the component to a different folder.

Test Configuration (Profiler)

The Test Configuration screen displays basic information about the object libraries being used by Profiler.

SSIS Component	Customer ID	Displays the Customer ID associated with the License Key.
	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	License Expiration	Displays the date when the Profiler Component License Key will expire.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Profiler Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Profiler Object	Initialization	Displays any error messages generated by initializing the Profiler Object.
	Database Date	Displays the date of the Profiler Object data files. This date confirms that the data files are the latest available.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Profiler Object. This is usually a three or four-character string.

Add Component

To add Profiler Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Profiler Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Profiler Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Profiler Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Profiler Component to bring up the interface. See Profiler Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Profiler Tabs

• Input Field
• Analysis Options
• Output

The input field tab maps the input columns to be profiled. Each column can be passed through and/or column-specific results can be output. Not all columns are required.

Advanced profiling options can be modified for any field by clicking the ... button to the right of any row. See Advanced Settings for more information.

Profile	Designates the selected field to be profiled.
PassThrough	Designate the selected field as a pass-through column. The data will be passed through to the output.
Results	Designates the selected field
Column Name	The name of the column from the source file.
Expected Contents	Use the drop-down menu to select the expected contents of the input column.
Data Type	Displays the data type of the column.
Length	Displays the maximum length of the column. Double-clicking this field will bring up the Advanced Settings dialogue where you can changed this value.
Precision	Displays the precision of the column. Double-clicking this field will bring up the Advanced Settings dialogue where you can changed this value.
Scale	Displays the scale of the column. Double-clicking this field will bring up the Advanced Settings dialogue where you can changed this value.
Settings	Displays any special settings for the column. Double-clicking this field will bring up the Advanced Settings dialogue where you can changed this value.

The Analysis Options tab allows for enabling/disabling certain profiling calculations. Disabling unused Analysis Options will become beneficial due to the increase in processing time.

Analysis Options	Sort Analysis	This is an analysis of any prevailing sortation for each profiled column. This enables/disables the sortation analysis, which can increase profiling time. This time penalty grows geometrically as more records are added. If you are not interested in this statistic, disable it to decrease your profiling time.
	MatchUp Analysis	This is an analysis of duplicate record detection. This enables/disables duplicate record detection. Duplicate analysis increases the profiling time by under 5% and ProfileData profiling time by about 30%.
	RightFielder Analysis	This is an analysis of profiled columns’ inferred data type (e.g., Full Name, Address, etc.). This enables/disables inferred data type analysis. This analysis is responsible for the Inconsistent Data and Inferred Data Type statistics. This increases the profiling time by under 10%.
	Data Aggregation	This is an analysis of aggregate data determination (e.g., averages, median, quartiles, etc.). This enables/disables all forms of aggregation and value gathering. Any statistic that cannot be determined incrementally (for example, median, population standard deviation, etc.) is determined via aggregation. This analysis is also responsible for all value tables (Frequency, Pattern, SoundEx, etc.). All iterators and data aggregation statistics are dependent on this analysis. This increases profiling time by over 90%.
Setup Options	The Setup Options are not required. They are used purely for documentation purposes and will have no impact on profiling results.
	Table Name	This function sets the user name for a particular run.
	User Name	This function sets the user name for a particular run.
	Job Name	This function sets the job name for a particular run.
	Job Description	This function sets the job description for a particular run.

Specify an output file that the profiler will use to store its results. If you don’t specify a path, a temporary file will be created.

Output File Storage	Output File	Select a name and location for your target output file. You can check the option below output file to automatically append the current date/time to the file name specified above.
	If Output File Exists	You can choose what happens if the output file already exists when the components is ready to write to the file: Append new data to the existing file. (This file must already exist at run time.) Overwrite the existing file. (The previous processing results will be deleted.) Cancel processing. (An error will be reported.)

Advanced Settings

Double-clicking select fields or the ... button to the right of the rows will bring up the Advanced Settings dialogue. Check the box next to any option to enable it’s modification. These settings allow for validating your data. Records that do not meet the specified validation rules in the Advanced Options will be given a result code indicating failure.

Scale	Set the scale of the column.
Precision	Set the precision of the column.
Max Length	Set the maximum length of the column.
Default Value	Set the default value.
Upper & Lower Bounds	Set the Upper and Lower bounds values.
Regular Expressions	Set a list of regular expressions. See Regular Expression Builder for more information.

Regular Expression Builder

Checking the box next to Regular Expressions and then selecting the Add... button will bring up the Regular Expression Builder.

Output Columns

Unlike the other Melissa components for SSIS, the Profiler Component has a set of 11 possible output pins. Each output pin will contain a static set of output columns which cannot be edited or modified.

The following are the possible output pins for the Profiler Component:

Column-Based Counts Date-Time Frequencies Length Frequencies Overall Record Counts PassThru & Result Codes Pattern & RegEx Frequencies

Profile Session Sound-Alike Frequencies Value Frequencies Work Length Frequencies Word Value Frequencies

Column-Based Counts

The output fields associated with Column-Based Counts provides analysis and information based on the selected input column as a whole.

The following are all the output fields returned for Column –Based Counts and their description.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
ColumnType	This is the actual Data Type for that column as defined in the SSSI Pipeline. Here is a list of all possible Column Types: ProfilerColumnType Enumerations
	Value	Name	Description
	1	ColumnTypeInt1	8 bit signed integer
	2	ColumnTypeInt2	16 bit signed integer
	3	ColumnTypeInt4	32 bit signed integer
	4	ColumnTypeInt8	64 bit signed integer
	5	ColumnTypeUInt1	8 bit unsigned integer
	6	ColumnTypeUInt2	16 bit unsigned integer
	7	ColumnTypeUInt4	32 bit unsigned integer
	8	ColumnTypeUInt8	64 bit unsigned integer
	9	ColumnTypeReal4	32 bit floating point number
	10	ColumnTypeReal8	64 bit floating point number
	11	ColumnTypeNumeric	Numeric Value
	12	ColumnTypeDecimal	Numeric Value
	13	ColumnTypeCurrency	Numeric Value
	14	ColumnTypeFixedMBCSString	Fixed-length multi-byte string
	15	ColumnTypeVariableMBCSString	Variable-length multi-byte string
	16	ColumnTypeFixedUnicodeString	Fixed-length Unicode string
	17	ColumnTypeVariableUnicodeString	Variable length Unicode string
	18	ColumnTypeDate	Date
	19	ColumnTypeDBDate	Database date
	20	ColumnTypeDBTime	Database Time
	21	ColumnTypeDBTime2	Database Time
	22	ColumnTypeDBTimeStamp	Time stamp
	23	ColumnTypeDBTimeStamp2	Time stamp
	24	ColumnTypeDBTimeStampOffset	Date/Time offset
	25	ColumnTypeFileTime	File Date/Time
	26	ColumnTypeBoolean	Boolean Value
	27	ColumnTypeGUID	GUID value
	28	ColumnTypeBytes	Byte Array
	29	ColumnTypeImage	Image Array
DataType	This is the Expected Data Type selected in the “Expected Contents” on the Input Field Tab of the Profiler Component. Here is a list of all possible Data Types: ProfilerDataType Enumerations
	Value	Name	Description
	1	DataTypeFullName	Full name
	2	DataTypeInverseName	Inverse ordered name (Last – First)
	3	DataTypeNamePrefix	Name prefix
	4	DataTypeFirstName	First name
	5	DataTypeMiddleName	Middle name
	6	DataTypeLastName	Last name
	7	DataTypeNameSuffix	Name Suffix
	8	DataTypeTitle	Title / Department
	9	DataTypeCompany	Company or Organization
	10	DataTypeAddress	Street address
	11	DataTypeCity	City Name
	12	DataTypeStateOrProvince	US state or Canadian province
	13	DataTypeZipOrPostalCode	US zip code or Canadian postal code
	14	DataTypeCityStateZip	City/State/Zip combined
	15	DataTypeCountry	Country Name
	16	DataTypePhone	Phone number
	17	DataTypeEmail	Email address
	18	DataTypeString	Generic string value
	19	DataTypeNumeric	Generic numeric value
	20	DataTypeDateMDY	Generic Date/Time (formatted Month Day Year)
	21	DataTypeDateYMD	Generic Date/Time (formatted Year Month Day)
	22	DataTypeDateDMY	Generic Date/Time (formatted Day Month Year)
	23	DataTypeBoolean	Generic Boolean Value
ColumnSize	Returns the specified Column Type set in the Advanced Options.
ColumnPrecision	Returns the specified Column Precision in the Advanced Options.
ColumnScale	Returns the specified Column Scale in the Advanced Options.
ValueRangeFrom	Returns the specified Upper Bound for the Value Ranges in the Advanced Options.
ValueRangeTo	Returns the specified Lower Bound for the Value Ranges in the Advanced Options.
DefaultValue	Returns the specified Default Value in the Advanced Options.
CustomPatterns	Returns the specified RegEx Pattern set in the Advanced Options.
InferredDataType	This function returns a column’s inferred data type. The inferred data type is used to determine if a prevalent data type is seen for the majority of values in this column. For a deviant value to be returned (i.e., a value that differs from the user-specified data type), the count of that detected data type must exceed all other detected data type counts by at least 20%. Here is a list of all possible Inferred Data Types: ProfilerDataType Enumerations
	Value	Name	Description
	1	DataTypeFullName	Full name
	2	DataTypeInverseName	Inverse ordered name (Last – First)
	3	DataTypeNamePrefix	Name prefix
	4	DataTypeFirstName	First name
	5	DataTypeMiddleName	Middle name
	6	DataTypeLastName	Last name
	7	DataTypeNameSuffix	Name Suffix
	8	DataTypeTitle	Title / Department
	9	DataTypeCompany	Company or Organization
	10	DataTypeAddress	Street address
	11	DataTypeCity	City Name
	12	DataTypeStateOrProvince	US state or Canadian province
	13	DataTypeZipOrPostalCode	US zip code or Canadian postal code
	14	DataTypeCityStateZip	City/State/Zip combined
	15	DataTypeCountry	Country Name
	16	DataTypePhone	Phone number
	17	DataTypeEmail	Email address
	18	DataTypeString	Generic string value
	19	DataTypeNumeric	Generic numeric value
	20	DataTypeDateMDY	Generic Date/Time (formatted Month Day Year)
	21	DataTypeDateYMD	Generic Date/Time (formatted Year Month Day)
	22	DataTypeDateDMY	Generic Date/Time (formatted Day Month Year)
	23	DataTypeBoolean	Generic Boolean Value
Sortation	Returns the column’s natural sortation. This is the sortation order seen in the values as they were input. In order for a column to be considered near-sorted, no more than 10% of the input values must be out of order. This column returns one of the following enumerations.
	Enum Value	Sortation Type	Description
	0	SortUnknown	No sortation detected.
	1	SortStringAscending	Values are sorted ascending, using a string comparison.
	2	SortStringDescending	Values are sorted descending, using a string comparison.
	3	SortNumericAscending	Values are sorted ascending, using a numeric comparison.
	4	SortNumericDescending	Values are sorted descending, using a numeric comparison.
	5	SortDateAscending	Values are sorted ascending, using date/time comparison.
	6	SortDateDescending	Values are sorted descending, using date/time comparison.
SortationPercent	Percentage of how well a column is sorted. This is only reported for columns where GetColumnSortation returned a value other than SortUnknown. The sortation percentage is determined by counting the number of re-ordering values that would be required to put the list of values into a sorted state, and then dividing this value by the worst-case value (i.e., re-ordering required for a reverse-sorted list.)
MostPopularCount	Number of records that have the most popular count or most repeating values
DistinctCount	Number of uniquely different values.
UniqueCount	Number of records with no duplicates.
DefaultValuleCount	Number of records that contains the Default Value set in the Advanced Options
BelowRangeCount	Number of records that are below the lower bounds set in the Advanced Options
AboveRangeCount	Number of records that are above the lower bounds set in the Advanced Options
AboveSizeCount	Number of records that have values higher than the ColumnSize set in the Advanced Options
AbovePrecisionCount	Number of records that have values higher than the Precision set in the Advanced Options
AboveScaleCount	Number of records that have values higher than the Scale set in the Advanced Options
InvlidRegExCount	Number of records that did not pass the Regular Expression set in the Advanced Options
EmptyCount	Number of records with Empty Values
NullCount	Number of records with NULL Values
InvlidDataCount	Number of records that do not match the specified detected Column Type (not the Expected Data Type)
InvlidUTF8Count	Number of records that are not valid UTF-8
NonPrintingCharCount	Number of records with non-printable characters
DiacriticCharCount	Number of records with Diacritics
ForeignCharCount	Number of records with foreign language character sets
AlphaOnlyCount	Number of records that only have English alphabet letters
NumericOnlyCount	Number of records with numbers only
AlphaNumericCount	Number of records with English alphabet letters and numbers only
UpperCaseOnlyCount	Number of records that have all upper case letters
LowerCaseOnlyCount	Number of records that have all lower case letters
MixedCaseCount	Number of records that have mixed Upper and Lower casing
SingleSpaceCount	Number of records that have multiple words separated only by single spaces
MultiSpaceCount	Number of records that have multiple words separated by more than one space at least once.
LeadingSpaceCount	Number of records that have a leading space
TrailingSpaceCount	Number of records that have a trailing space
MaxSpaces	Maximum number of spaces between words
MinSpaces	Minimum number of spaces between words
TotalSpaces	Number of spaces between words only. Not including leading and trailing spaces.
TotalWordBreaks	Number of words breaks found
AvgSpaces	Average Number of spaces found between words
DecorationCharCount	Number of decorative characters (comma, pipe, tab, or double quote) at the end or beginning of the string.
ProfanityCount	Number of records with profanities
InconsistentDataCount	Number of records which doesn’t match the specified Expected Data Type
StringMaxValue	Returns the highest string value (as sorted A-Z). Not to be confused with String Max Length.
StringMinValue	Returns the lowest string value (as sorted A-Z). Not to be confused with String Min Length.
StringQ1Value	The first Quartile value for strings. Strings are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
StringMedValue	The second Quartile value for strings. Strings are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
StringQ3Value	The third Quartile value for strings. Strings are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
StringMaxLength	Length of the longest string.
StringMinLength	Length of the shortest string.
StringAvgLength	Average length for all strings
StringQ1Length	Length of the first quartile string value
StringMedLength	Length of the second quartile string value
StringQ3Length	Length of the third quartile string value
WordMaxValue	Returns the highest word value (as sorted A-Z). Not to be confused with word Max Length.
WordMinValue	Returns the lowest word value (as sorted A-Z). Not to be confused with word Max Length.
WordQ1Value	The first Quartile value for all words. All Words are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
WordMedValue	The second Quartile value for all words. All Words are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
WordQ3Value	The third Quartile value for all words. All Words are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
WordMaxLength	Length of the longest word
WordMinLength	Length of the shortest word
WordAvgLength	Average length for all words
WordQ1Length	Length of the first quartile word value
WordMedLength	Length of the second quartile word value
WordQ3Length	Length of the third quartile word value
MaxWords	Returns a columns maximum number of words
MinWords	Returns a columns minimum number of words
AvgWords	Returns a columns average number of words
NumericMaxValue	Returns the highest numeric value (as sorted numerically).
NumericMinValue	Returns the lowest numeric value (as sorted numerically).
NumericAvgValue	Average Value for all numbers in a column
NumericQ1Value	The first Quartile value for all numbers. All numbers are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
NumericQ1IntValue	The first Quartile integer (decimals removed) value for all numbers. All numbers are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
NumericMedValue	The second Quartile value for all numbers. All numbers are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
NumericMedIntValue	The secon Quartile integer (decimals removed) value for all numbers. All numbers are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
NumericQ3Value	The third Quartile integer value for all numbers. All numbers are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
NumericQ3IntValue	The third Quartile integer (decimals removed) value for all numbers. All numbers are first ordered from lowest to highest value, then the Quartile is selected.
NumericStdDevValue	Standard Deviation Value
DateMaxValue	Returns the latest date value (as sorted by dates).
DateMinValue	Returns the oldest date value (as sorted by dates).
DateAvgValue	Average Date Value
DateQ1Value	The first Quartile value for all dates. All numbers are first ordered from oldest to latest date, then the Quartile is selected.
DateMedValue	The second Quartile value for all dates. All numbers are first ordered from oldest to latest date, then the Quartile is selected.
DateQ3Value	The third Quartile value for all dates. All numbers are first ordered from oldest to latest date, then the Quartile is selected.
TimeMaxValue	Returns the latest time value (as sorted by time).
TimeMinValue	Returns the oldest time value (as sorted by time).
TimeAvgValue	Average Time Value
TimeQ1Value	The first Quartile value for all times. All numbers are first ordered from oldest to latest time, then the Quartile is selected.
TimeMedValue	The second Quartile value for all times. All numbers are first ordered from oldest to latest time, then the Quartile is selected.
TimeQ3Value	The third Quartile value for all times. All numbers are first ordered from oldest to latest time, then the Quartile is selected.
DateTimeNoCenturyCount	Number of records that contain no century indicator. (eg. 19-01-63 instead of 19-01-1963)
NameInconsistentOrderCount	Number of records that don’t correspond to the specified expected name order. (eg. “Smith, John” for a column set to a data type of DataTypeFullName)
NameMultipleNameCount	Number of records with multiple names (eg. John and Jane Smith)
NameSuspiciousCount	Number of records with suspicious names like “Mickey Mouse”
StateCount	Number of records with US States, both standardized and unstandardized
ProvinceCount	Number of records with Canadian Provinces, both standardized and unstandardized
StateProvinceNonStandardCount	Number of records that contain non-standardized US States of Canadian Provinces
StateProvinceInvalidCount	Number of records that contain invalid US States or Canadian Provinces
ZipCodeCount	Number of records containing US Zip Codes
Plus4Count	Number of records containing full Zip Plus4 Codes
ZipCodeInvalidCount	Number of records that contain invalid ZIP Codes
PostalCodeCount	Number of records containing Canadian Postal Codes
PostalCodeInvalidCount	Number of records that contain invalid Canadian Postal Codes
ZipCodePostalCodeInvalidCount	Number of records that contain invalid US Zips or Canadian Postal Codes
StateZipCodeMismatchCount	Number of records where the Zip Code does not match the US State.
ProvincePostalCodeMismatchCount	Number of records where the Postal Code does not match the Canadian Province
CountryNonStandardCount	Number of records that contain a country in a non-ISO Standard Countries
CountryInvalidCount	Number of records that contain non-recognized country names
EmailSyntaxCount	Number of records with invalid Email Syntax
EmailMobileDomainCount	Number of records with Emails with mobile domains
EmailMispelledDomainCount	Number of records with misspelled Email domains
EmailSpamtrapDomainCount	Number of records with spamtrap Email domains
EmailDisposableDomainCount	Number of records with disposable Email domains
PhoneInvalidCount	Number of records with non-US or non-Canadian Phone Numbers.

Date-Time Frequencies

This output pin returns each distinct value for a column with Date/Time and the counts for each distinct value. Date/time values are gathered for all column types (for example, Strings), not just Date/Time data types.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Value	All distinct values for Dates.
Count	Number of times a distinct Date appears in the profiled data for this particular column.

Length Frequencies

This output pin allows you to step through each distinct value length for a specific column.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Length	All distinct lengths for each value.
Count	Number of times a distinct length appears in the profiled data for this particular column.

Overall Record Counts

This output pin returns counts based on all selected columns for profiling as a whole record.

Column Name	Description
RecordCount	Number of records processed
EmptyCount	Number of records with empty values for all columns. An empty value is not Null, can contain spaces, and has no string or value.
NullCount	Number of null records
ExactMatchDistinctCount	Number of exact matching records. Casing and punctuation will be ignored.
ExactMatchDupesCount	Number of exact matching duplicates. Casing and punctuation will be ignored.
ExactMatchLargestGroup	Returns the size of the largest group of duplicate records using an Exact Match matching criteria. All data fields provided will be compared. Casing and punctuation will be ignored.
ContactMatchDistinctCount	Returns the number of distinct records using Address, First Name and Last Name matching criteria. The Contact Match matching rules used are: Zip5 AND First Name AND Last Name AND Street Number AND Street Name (All have to match) OR Zip5 AND First Name AND Last Name AND PO Box (All have to match) Note: The Profiler will parse data present in a single field such as an AddressLine or a FullName for matching purposes. (e.g., From an Address field containing “12 Main Street”, the Profiler will take the “12” as the Street Number and “Main” as the Street Name for its matching needs.)
ContactMatchDupesCount	Number of duplicate records using Contact Match described under ContactMatchDistinctCount
ContactMatchLargestGroup	Returns the size of the largest group of duplicates using Contact Match described under ContactMatchDistinctCount
HoueholdMatchDistinctCount	Returns the number of distinct records using Address, and Last Name matching criteria. The Household Match matching rules used are: Zip5 AND Last Name AND Street Number AND Street Name (All have to match) OR Zip5 AND Last Name AND PO Box (All have to match) Note: The Profiler will parse data present in a single field such as an AddressLine or a FullName for matching purposes. (e.g, From an Address field containing “12 Main Street”, the Profiler will take the “12” as the Street Number and “Main” as the Street Name for its matching needs.)
HoueholdMatchDupesCount	Number of duplicate records using the Household Match matching strategy described under HouseholdMatchDistinctCount.
HoueholdMatchLargestGroup	Returns the size of the largest group of duplicate records using the Household Match matching strategy described under HouseholdMatchDistinctCount.
AddressMatchDistinctCount	Returns the number of distinct records using Address only matching criteria. The Address Match matching rules used are: Zip5 AND Street Number AND Street Name (All have to match) OR Zip5 AND PO Box (both have to match) Note: The Profiler will parse data present in a single field such as an AddressLine or a FullName for matching purposes. (e.g., From an Address field containing “12 Main Street”, the Profiler will take the “12” as the Street Number and “Main” as the Street Name for its matching needs.)
AddressMatchDupesCount	Number of duplicate records using Address Match matching strategy decribed under HouseholdMatchDistinctCount.
AddressMatchLargestGroup	Returns the size of the largest group of duplicate records using Address Match matching strategy decribed under HouseholdMatchDistinctCount.

PassThru & Result Codes

This output pin will include all of the original contents that have been selected as “Pass Through” in the Input Field Tab. This output pin will also include a Results Code Field for all columns that have been selected to output “Results” in the Input Field Tab:

For more information on result codes, see Result Codes.

Pattern & RegEx Frequencies

This output pin allows you to step through each distinct value pattern for a specific column.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Value	The distinct Pattern Value representation for all records in a column
RegEx	The distinct Regular Expression representation for all records in a column. The regular expressions are ‘tuned’ for your specified data type. Where appropriate, letters or numbers may be lumped together using the ‘one or more’ quantifier.
Example	Returns an example value represented by the pattern. This will always be the first value encountered while profiling.
Count	Number of times the distinct patterns appears in the profiled data for this particular column.

Profile Session

This output pin returns information about the processed job. This information can be stored and used to identify information such as what table was profiled, who did the profiling, what version of the profiler was used, the start and end time of the job, as well as the job name and description.

Column Name	Description
BuildNo	Current Build of the Profiler Component
ProfileStart	Start Time of the processed profiling job
ProfileEnd	End Time of the processed profiling job
TableName	Name of the Table being processed as specified in the Analysis Options Tab
UserName	Name of the User processing the job as specified in the Analysis Options Tab
JobName	Name of the Job as specified in the Analysis Options Tab
JobDesription	Description of the Job as specified in the Analysis Options Tab

Sound-Alike Frequencies

This output pin allows you to step through each distinct SoundEx pattern for a specific column.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Value	The distinct SoundEx pattern value representation for all records in a column
Example	Returns an example value represented by the SoundEx pattern. This will always be the first value encountered while profiling.
Count	Number of times the distinct SoundEx patterns appears in the profiled data for this particular column.

Value Frequencies

This output pin allows you to step through each distinct value for a specific column.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Value	Returns a column’s distinct value
Count	Number of times the distinct value appeared in the profiled data for this particular column.

Work Length Frequencies

This output pin allows you to step through each distinct word length for a specific column.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Length	Returns a column’s distinct word length
Count	Number of times the distinct word length appears in the profiled data for this particular column.

Word Value Frequencies

This output pin allows you to step through each distinct word for a specific column.

Column Name	Description
ColumnName	Name of the Input Column
Value	Returns a column’s distinct word
Count	Number of times the distinct word appears in the profiled data for this particular column. Multiple occurrences of the same word in a single record will all be counted.

Result Codes (Profiler)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

Property

Overview

• Returns information about a given parcel of property, including: assessed value; last sale price; current mortgage; physical dimensions of land; and square footage.

• The level of detail may vary according to location.

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of Property for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the Property Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Melissa Cloud

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for the Property Component to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent to the Melissa Cloud per request.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for the Property Component to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times the Property Component should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (Property Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

Property Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the Property Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
Property Web Service	Service Response	Displays the Web Service response status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the Property Web Service.

Add Component

To add Property Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the Property Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the Property Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the Property Component.

Configure Component

Double click the Property Component to bring up the interface. See Property Component Settings.

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

Property Tabs

• Input
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output
• Output Filter

Provide either an address key or FIPS and APN codes for the address.

Input Address Field	If you do not provide FIPS and APN fields, this field is required.
	Address Key	This is an 11-character string value that uniquely identifies a specific address. This is used by many Melissa products.
Input FIPS/APN Fields	If you do not provide an Address Key, these fields are required.
	FIPS	Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS). A five-digit code defined by the U.S. Bureau of Census. The first two digits are the state code and the last three indicate the county within the state.
	APN	Assessor’s Parcel Number (APN). A code that uniquely identifies a specific parcel of land within a county. APNs can be optained through your local county assessor’s office.

This shows a list of the columns in your input table. If you check the box next to a column name, the contents of that column will be passed to the output table without modification. Add a column to the Pass Through list to include the original contents in the output table.

Field Name	Column names from the original input table
Current Usage	Column is currently being used as input

Content

Parcel PropertyAddress ParsedPropertyAddress Owner OwnerAddress Values CurrentSale

CurrentDeed PriorSale Lot SquareFootage Building Associated Parcels

Check the box next to the groups or columns you want to output. The following are definitions of the available groups and columns. For a list of codes returned by these columns, refer to Property Codes.

Parcel

These fields return information used to uniquely identify the parcel of land which the property occupies

FIPSCode	Federal Information Processing Standards codes used nationally to numerically identify a specific county or political jurisdiction.
FIPSSubCode	A secondary classification of a jurisdiction within a FIPS.
UnformattedAPN	Assessor’s Parcel Number in an unformatted form. This is most often used by the county and others as a unique key (e.g.,10132021A).
APNSequenceNo	This internal sequence number is used to ensure “uniqueness” of the Assessor’s Parcel Number (e.g., 10132021A seq 001).
FormattedAPN	Assessor’s Parcel Number in a formatted form. Dashes and decimals are commonly used to break an APN down into logical components (e.g., 101-32-021.A).
OriginalAPN	Assessor’s Parcel Number exactly as received by source (e.g., 10132-021A00000).
CensusTract	Comprised of Census Tract, Census Block and Census Block Suffix. These numbers are established by the US Department of Commerce (Bureau Of The Census).
Zoning	The data contained in this field is based upon County and/or Local established Zoning Codes and are not converted by FARES.
Range	The “range” portion of geographical coordinates based on local surveys. Ranges typically run east or west of predetermined “meridian” in sixmile intervals.
Township	The “township” portion of geographical coordinates based on local surveys. Townships typically run north or south of predetermined “meridian” in six-mile intervals.
Section	The “section” portion of geographical coordinates based on local surveys. Sections are 1 square mile and there are 36 sections within the intersection of a Range / Township.
QuarterSection	A section that has been divided into four “sub” sections (e.g., NE, NW, SE, SW).
HomesteadExempt	This field will be set with a “Y” if the owner has qualified for a Homeowner/Homestead exemption.
AbsenteeOwnerCode	This field will be set with an “A” if the owner is an absentee. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Absentee Owner Code.
LandUseCode	A FARES established Land Use code converted from various county Land Use codes to aid in search and extract functions. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Land Use Code.
CountyLandUse1	Primary (i.e., highest) Land Use as established by the county or local taxing administration.
CountyLandUse2	Secondary Land Use as established by the county or local taxing administration.
PropertyIndicatorCode	A FARES general code used to easily recognize specific property types (e.g, Residential, Condominium, Commercial). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Property Indicator Code.
MunicipalityName	Name of the Municipality where parcel is located.
ViewCode	View from building (e.g., Gulf, Mountains, Pool). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - View Code.
LocationInfluenceCode	Positive or negative aspects associated with the location of the parcel (e.g., waterfront, flood plane, airport). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Location Influence Code.
NumberOfBuildings	Total number of buildings on the parcel.

PropertyAddress

These fields contain the physical address of the property.

Address	The first line of the street address.e.g. 22382 Avenida Empresa
City	The city associated with the property address (CHICAGO, ATLANTA, DENVER).
State	The two-letter USPS postal abbreviation associated with the state/protectorants/commonwealth (CA, VI, PR).
Zip	The nine-digit code (i.e., ZIP & plus 4) assigned by the USPS. This is populated by various source files and other proprietary and nonproprietary processes (95463-0042).
AddressKey	A unique 11-digit address key for the submitted address (92688211282).
Latitude	Geographic coordinate that specifies the northsouth position of a point on the Earth’s surface (33.637550).
Longitude	Geographic coordinate that specifies the eastwest position of a point on the Earth’s surface (117.606840).

ParsedPropertyAddress

These fields contain the parsed address of the physical property.

Range	The delivery number of a parsed address.
PreDirectional	The geographic directional that precedes the street name(NW, E, etc).
StreetName	The name of the street from a parsed address (Empresa, etc).
Suffix	Suffix portion of a parsed address(Avenida).
PostDirectional	Geographic directional that follows the street name.
SuiteName	The name of the secondary unit of a parsed address (Apt, Suite, etc.).
SuiteRange	Range of any secondary unit of a parsed address.

Owner

These fields contain information on the current owner of the property.

CorporateOwner	The Name of the property owner has been recognized as a corporation or business.
Name	The name of the property owner.
Name2	Additional owner names if more than one person owns the property.
UnparsedName1	Non-parsed owner name.
UnparsedName2	Additional owner names if more than one person owns the property - non-parsed.
Phone	Phone number of property owner (e.g., 9095551212).
PhoneOptOut	A “Y” represents a record where the property owner has contacted the DMA (i.e., Direct Marketing Association) and has asked not to be contacted by phone for solicitation.

OwnerAddress

These fields contain the ownder’s mailing address.

Address	The first line of the street address.
Suite	The unit or suite number of the property address (e.g., 649 LAKE SHORE DR #1400).
City	The city associated with the property address (e.g., CHICAGO, ATLANTA, DENVER).
State	The two-letter USPS postal abbreviation associated with the state/protectorants/commonwealth (e.g., CA, VI, PR).
Zip	The nine-digit code (i.e., ZIP & plus 4) assigned by the USPS. This is populated by various source files and other proprietary and nonproprietary processes (e.g., 954630042).
CarrierRoute	This is the four-digit code used by the local mail carrier to identify the delivery path.
Matchcode	Indicates the level of matching for an owner’s mailing address (no matching streets, ranges, etc.) For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Matchcode.
MailOptOut	A “Y” represents a record where the property owner has contacted the DMA (i.e., Direct Marketing Association) and has asked not to be contacted by mail for solicitation.

Values

These fields contain data on the current value of the property.

CalculatedTotalValue	The “TOTAL” (i.e., Land + Improvement) Value closest to current market value used for assessment by county or local taxing authorities.
CalculatedLandValue	The “LAND” Value closest to current market value used for assessment by county or local taxing authorities.
CalculatedImprovementValue	The “IMPROVEMENT” Value closest to current market value used for assessment by county or local taxing authorities.
CalculatedTotalValueCode	The code appearing in this indicator field reflects the type of values (e.g., Market, Appraised) used to seed the TOTAL VALUE CALCULATED field. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Total Value Calculated Indicator.
CalculatedLandValueCode	The code appearing in this indicator field reflects the type of values (e.g., Market, Appraised) used to seed the LAND VALUE CALCULATED field. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Total Value Calculated Indicator.
CalculatedImprovementValueCode	The code appearing in this indicator field reflects the type of values (e.g., Market, Appraised) used to seed the IMPROVEMENT VALUE CALCULATED field. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Total Value Calculated Indicator.
AssessedTotalValue	The Total Assessed Value of the Parcel’s Land & Improvement values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
AssessedLandValue	The Assessed Land Values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
AssessedImprovementValue	The Assessed Improvement Values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
MarketTotalValue	The Total Market Value of the Parcel’s Land & Improvement values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
MarketLandValue	The Market Land Values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
MarketImprovementValue	The Market Improvement Values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
AppraisedTotalValue	The Total Appraised Value of the Parcel’s Land & Improvement values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
AppraisedLandValue	The Appraised Land Values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
AppraisedImprovementValue	The Appraised Improvement Values as provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
TaxAmount	The Total Tax amount provided by the county or local taxing/assessment authority.
TaxYear	The tax or assessment year for which the taxes were billed.

CurrentSale

These fields contain information from the most recent sale of the property.

TransactionId	This is a FARES internal number used to identify a specific transaction. This number may aid customers in the creation of unique keys.
DocumentYear	The year a sales transaction document was recorded (e.g., 1984).
DeedCategoryCode	The type of deed used to record the sales transaction (e.g., Grant, Quit, Foreclosure).
RecordingDate	The date the sales transaction was recorded at the county (e.g., 19621028).
SaleDate	The date the sales transaction was legally completed (i.e., contact signed) (e.g., 19621025).
SalePrice	Price of the sale as depicted on the recorded sales transaction.
SaleCode	This field indicates whether the financial consideration is F = Full or P = Partial. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Sale Code.
SellerName	The seller’s name as it appears on the recorded sales transaction.
MultiAPNCode	The data contained in this field depicts multiple or split parcel sales.
MultiAPNCount	This reflects the number of parcels associated with the sale (e.g., 14 parcels recorded on the same document number).
ResidentalModel	A code to indicate whether the property is residential based on individual ZIP codes and values. “Y” = yes, “N” or blank = no.

CurrentDeed

These fields contain information about the current mortgage holder on the property.

MortgageAmount	The amount of the first mortgage as depicted on the recorded document.
MortgageDate	The date the Mortgage was initiated.
MortgageLoanTypeCode	Type of loan secured (e.g., Conventional, FHA, VA). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Mortgage Loan Type Code.
MortgageDeedTypeCode	Type of deed used for recording (e.g., Agreement of Sale, Assumption, Correction Deed). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Mortgage Deed Type Code.
MortgageTermCode	This code is used to identify whether the number stored in the MORTGAGE TERM field is in Days, Months or Years. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Mortgage Term Code.
MortgageTerm	The length of time before the mortgage matures (e.g., 15yrs, 30 yrs, 45dys).
MortgageDueDate	The date the mortgage amount becomes due.
MortgageAssumptionAmount	The assumption amount related to an existing mortgage.
LenderCode	This is a FARES internal code used to identify the Lending Company that was associated with the sales transaction.
LenderName	This is the name of the lender on the original recorded document.
SecondMortgageAmount	This is the amount associated with the 2nd mortgage.
SecondMortgageLoanTypeCode	Type of loan secured as part of the 2nd mortgage (e.g., Conventional, FHA, VA).
SecondMortgageDeedTypeCode	Type of deed used for recording the 2nd mortgage (e.g., Agreement of Sale, Assumption, Correction Deed).

PriorSale

These fields contain information about a sale of the property prior to the most recent one.

TransactionId	This is a FARES internal number used to identify a specific transaction. This number may aid customers in the creation of unique keys.
DocumentYear	The year a sales transaction document was recorded (e.g., 1984).
DeedCategoryCode	The type of deed used to record the prior sales transaction (e.g., Grant, Quit, Foreclosure). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Deed Category Code.
RecordingDate	The date the sales transaction was recorded at the county (e.g., 19621028).
SaleDate	The date the sales transaction was legally completed (i.e., contact signed) (e.g., 19621025).
SalePrice	Price of the sale as depicted on the recorded sales transaction.
SaleCode	This field indicates whether the financial consideration is F = Full or P = Partial.
TransactionCode	This identifies situations associated with the sale (e.g., Resale, Construction Loan, Seller Carryback).
MultiAPNCode	The data contained in this field depicts multiple or split parcel sales. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Multi APN Code.
MultiAPNCount	This reflects the number of parcels associated with the sale (e.g., 14 parcels recorded on the same document number).
MortgageAmount	This is the amount associated with the mortgage of the prior sale.
DeedTypeCode	Type of deed used for recording ( e.g., Agreement of Sale, Assumption, Correction Deed).

Lot

These fields contain data on the physical dimensions of the entire property.

FrontFootage	The linear feet across the front of the lot - facing the street.
DepthFootage	The linear feet between the front and back of the lot.
Acreage	Total land mass in Acres.
SquareFootage	Total land mass in Square Feet.

SquareFootage

These fields contain physical information about the building or buildings on the property.

UniversalBuilding	The Building Square Footage that can most accurately be used for assessments or comparables (e.g., Living, Adjusted, Gross).
BuildingAreaCode	The codes appearing in this field indicate the source used to populate the UNIVERSAL BUILDING SQUARE FEET field (e.g., Living, Adjusted, Gross). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Building Area Code.
BuildingArea	The size of the building in Square Feet. This field is most commonly populated as a cumulative total when a county does not differentiate between Living and Non-living areas.
LivingSpace	This is the area of a building that is used for general living. This is typically the area of a building that is heated or air conditioned and does not include Garage, Porch or Basement square footage.
GroundFloor	Square footage of the part of the building which is level with the ground (typically the front of the building). This is generally above the basement(s) and below the second floor.
Gross	This is the square footage for the entire building. Typically this represents all square feet under the roof.
AdjustedGross	This is the square footage used by the county or local taxing / assessment authority to determine Improvement Value. This figure is typically 100% of the living area, plus lower percentage of non-living area.
Basement	This is total square footage associated with Basement portion of a building. This would include both finished and unfinished areas.
GarageOrParking	This is the total square footage of the primary garage or parking area (i.e., commercial). This includes both finished and unfinished areas.

Building

These fields contain information about the features of the building or buildings on the property.

YearBuilt	This is the construction year of the original building.
EffectiveYearBuilt	This is the first year the building was assessed with its current components (e.g., a building is originally constructed in 1960 and a bedroom and bath was added to the building in 1974). The Year Built would be 1960 and the Effective Year Built would be 1974.
BedRooms	Total number of Bedrooms contained in the primary building.
TotalRooms	Total number of rooms contained in the primary building.
TotalBathsCalculated	Total number of Bathrooms in whole numbers (e.g., a home containing 2 1/2 baths would have the number 3 stored in this field as, three actual rooms have been designated for this purpose).
TotalBaths	Total number of Bathrooms as provided by our data sources (e.g., 4.00, 2.50, 1.75).
FullBaths	Total number of Full Baths (typically comprised of a sink, toilet, and bathtub / shower stall). A home containing 2 1/2 baths would have the number 2 stored in this field.
HalfBaths	Total number of Half Baths (typically comprised of a sink & toilet). A home containing 2 1/2 baths would have the number 1 stored in this field.
OneQuarterBaths	Total number of Quarter Baths (typically comprised only of a sink, as found in many laundry rooms).
ThreeQuarterBaths	Total number of Three-Quarter Baths (typically comprised of a sink, toilet & shower stall).
BathFixtures	The total number of bathroom fixtures (typically a Full Bath would have 4 fixtures - 1 = sink, 1 = toilet, 1 = bathtub, 1 = shower head).
AirConditioningCode	The type of air conditioning method used to cool the building (e.g., Central, Wall Unit, Evaporative). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Air Conditioning Code.
BasementCode	The type of basement finish found in the building (e.g., Finished, Half, Crawl). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Basement Code.
BuildingCode	The primary building type (e.g., Bowling Alley, Supermarket). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Building Code.
ImprovementCode	The primary improvement type (e.g., Grain Silo, Hanger, Marina). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Improvement Code.
ConditionCode	This represents the physical condition of the main improvement (e.g., Good, Fair, Under Construction). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Condition Code.
ConstructionCode	The primary method of construction (e.g., Steel/Glass, Concrete Block, Log). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Construction Code.
ExteriorWallCode	The type and/or finish of the exterior walls (e.g., Vinyl Siding, Brick Veneer, Frame / Stone). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Exterior Wall Code .
Fireplace	This field is populated with a “Y” if a fireplace is located within the building.
Fireplaces	This represents the number of fireplace openings located within the building
FireplaceCode	The type of fireplace (e.g., 2 Story / 3 Openings, 2 Story Brick). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Fireplace Code .
FoundationCode	The type of foundation (e.g., Continuous Footing, Pier, Mud Sill). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Foundation Code .
FlooringCode	The type of floor construction (e.g., Concrete, Plywood). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Flooring Code .
RoofFramingCode	The type of roof framing used (e.g., Bar Joist, Reinforced Concrete, Flexicore). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Roof Framing Code .
GarageCode	Type of garage or carport present (e.g., Attached Finished, Enclosed Carport, Basement Garage). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Garage Code .
HeatingCode	Type or method of heating (e.g., Hot Water, Heat Pump, Baseboard, Radiant). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Heating Code .
MobileHome	This element is populated with a “Y” if a Mobile Home is present on the parcel.
ParkingSpaces	This represent the total number of Parking Spaces or Car Capacity associated with the Garage or Parking type.
ParkingCode	Type of parking found on the parcel. This is typically commercial or communal (e.g., Condos) in nature. For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Parking Code .
Pool	This element is populated with a “Y” if a Pool is present on the parcel.
PoolCode	Type of pool, construction or pool amenities (e.g., Kidney, Gunite, Vinyl, Jacuzzi, Heated). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Pool Code .
QualityCode	Type of construction quality of building (e.g., excellent, economical). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Quality Code .
RoofCoverCode	Type of roof covering (e.g., Clay Tile, Aluminum, Shake). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Roof Cover Code .
RoofTypeCode	Type of roof shape (e.g., Gambrel, Gable, Flat, Mansard). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Roof Type Code .
StoriesCode	Type / number of stories (e.g., Split Foyer, Tri Level, 2 Story). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Stories Code .
Stories	Number of stories associated with the building (e.g., 2, 1.5).
BuildingStyleCode	Type of building style (e.g., Colonial, Cape Code, Bungalow). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Building Style Code .
Units	Number of Residential, Apartment or Business Units.
ElectricityCode	Type of electricity or energy use within the building (e.g., Average Wiring, Underground Wired, Private Source). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Electricity Code .
FuelCode	Type of fuel used for heating of water and building (e.g., Solar, Gas, Oil). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Fuel Code .
SewerCode	Type of sewer system on the parcel (e.g., Public, Septic, Commercial). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Sewer Code .
WaterCode	Type of water service on the parcel (e.g., Public, Well, Cistern). For a list of possible codes returned for this element, see Property Codes - Water Code .

Associated Parcels

Returns parcel information that matched the users input. Associated Parcels will provide a list of parcels by their APN, FIPs and MAK key, specifically for the YS05 (multiple matches) result code.

For example, if a record is sent using an addresskey and if Melissa’s property data had multiple records for the same address key, Associated Parcels will provide the list of matching parcels. Note: A new destination component is needed, select Associated Parcels Output from the Input Output Selection menu when prompted.

The Property Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: Obtained Property Information
	Custom Filter	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Property Codes

The following codes are used by Melissa’s Property V3 Web Service and SSIS Property Component.

Parcel

Absentee Owner Code

Returned by the AbsenteeOwnerCode element.

Code	Description
A	ABSENTEE(MAIL AND SITUS NOT =)
M	SITUS ADDRESS TAKEN FROM MAIL
O	OWNER OCCUPIED
S	SITUS FROM SALE (OCCUPIED)
T	SITUS FROM SALE (ABSENTEE)
Y	ABSENTEE

Land Use Code

Returned by the LandUseCode element.

Code	Description
100	RESIDENTIAL (NEC)
102	TOWNHOUSE/ROWHOUSE
103	APARTMENT/HOTEL
106	APARTMENT
109	CABIN
111	COOPERATIVE
112	CONDOMINIUM
113	CONDOMINIUM PROJECT
114	COMMON AREA
115	DUPLEX
116	MID-RISE CONDOMINIUM
117	HIGH-RISE CONDO
118	FRATERNIT/SORORITY HOUSE
119	RESIDENCE HALL/DORMITORIES
127	HOTEL
130	RESORT HOTEL
131	MULTI FAMILY 10 UNITS PLUS
132	MULTI FAMILY 10 UNITS LESS
133	MULTI FAMILY DWELLING
134	MIXED COMPLEX
135	MOBILE HOME LOT
136	MOBILE HOME PARK
137	MOBILE HOME PP
138	MOBILE HOME CO OP
142	MOTEL
148	PUD
151	QUADRUPLEX
155	GROUP QUARTERS
156	ORPHANAGE
157	NURSING HOME
160	RURAL HOMESITE
163	SFR
164	TRANSIENT LODGING
165	TRIPLEX
167	TIME SHARE
199	TIME SHARE CONDO
200	COMMERCIAL (NEC)
201	AIR RIGHTS
202	MULTIPLE USES
203	AUTO EQUIPMENT
204	AUTO REPAIR
205	AUTO SALES
207	SALVAGE IMPRV
208	AUTO WRECKING
209	BUSINESS PARK
210	CARWASH
211	COMMERCIAL BUILDING
212	CEMETERY
213	COMMERCIAL CONDOMINIUM
214	CONVALESCENT HOSPITAL
215	CONVENTION CENTER
217	DEPARTMENT STORE
218	FACILITIES
220	STORE FRANCHISE
221	FAST FOOD FRANCHISE
222	FIN/INSURANCE/REAL ESTATE
223	FINANCIAL BUILDING
225	FUNERAL HOME
226	GARAGE
229	GREENHOUSE
230	HOSPITAL
234	KENNEL
235	ANIMAL HOSPITAL/VET
236	LOFT BUILDING
237	MEDICAL BUILDING
238	MEDICAL CONDO
239	LABORATORY
240	LAUNDROMAT
242	NIGHTCLUB
243	BAR
244	OFFICE BUILDING
245	OFFICE & RESIDENTIAL
246	OFFICE & SHOWROOM
247	OFFICE CONDO
248	CONVERTED RESIDENCE
249	MISC IMPROVEMENTS
250	PRE FABRICATED BLDG
251	MISC BUILDING
252	PARKING LOT
255	PARKING STRUCTURE
257	PRODUCE MARKET
258	PUBLIC STORAGE
261	RESTAURANT BUILDING
262	RESTAURANT DRIVE IN
266	SERVICE STATION
268	SERVICE STATION/MARKET
269	MISC COMMERCIAL SERVICES
270	SHOPPING CENTER
273	STRIP COMMERCIAL CENTER
276	APPAREL
278	STORE BUILDING
279	STORES & OFFICES
281	STORES & RESIDENTIAL
282	RETAIL TRADE
283	SUPERMARKET
284	FOOD STORES
285	TAVERN
286	WHOLESALE
290	LEASED LAND/BLDG
299	LEASED LAND/BLDG II
300	INDUSTRIAL (NEC)
301	COMMERCIAL/INDUSTRIAL
302	BREWERY
303	BULK PLANT
304	CANNERY
308	CHEMICAL
309	TEXTILE/CLOTHES/CARPET INDUSTRY
310	PAPER & ALLIED INDUSTRY
311	DUMP SITE
312	DURABLE GOODS
313	NON DURABLE GOODS
316	FOOD PROCESSING
318	GRAIN ELEVATOR
320	HEAVY INDUSTRIAL
321	INDUSTRIAL CONDOMINIUM
322	INDUSTRIAL PARK
323	INDUSTRIAL PLANT
324	LIGHT INDUSTRIAL
326	LUMBER YARD
328	LUMBER MILL
331	METAL PRODUCT
333	MINERAL RIGHTS
334	MINERAL PROCESSING
336	MINI WAREHOUSE
338	MULTI TENANT INDUSTRIAL
342	PACKING
344	PETROLEUM
349	MINE/QUARRY
352	R&D FACILITY
353	TECHNOLOGICAL INDUSTRY
354	SHIPYARD
356	STOCKYARD
358	STORAGE
361	STORAGE TANKS
364	WAREHOUSE
366	WINERY
399	WINERY II
400	VACANT LAND (NEC)
401	MARSHLAND
402	FLOOD PLAIN
410	BARREN LAND
415	COMMERCIAL ACREAGE
420	COMMERCIAL LOT
421	COMMON LAND
425	DESERT
430	AGRICULTURAL LAND
435	INDUSTRIAL ACREAGE
440	INDUSTRIAL LOT
445	MOUNTAINOUS LAND
446	NATURAL RESOURCES
450	MULTI FAMILY ACREAGE
452	MULTI FAMILY LOT
453	OPEN SPACE
454	VACANT, MOBILE HOME
455	RECREATIONAL ACREAGE
460	RESIDENTIAL ACREAGE
465	RESIDENTIAL LOT
480	WASTE LAND
481	VACANT LMTD/NO DEV POTENTIAL
490	WILDLIFE REFUGE
499	WILDLIFE REFUGE II
500	AGRICULTURAL (NEC)
501	LIVESTOCK
502	NURSERY/HORTICULTURE
505	AGRICULTURAL PLANT
509	RANCH
510	ANIMAL FARM
511	FARMS
512	AVOCADO GROVE
514	CITRUS GROVE
515	DAIRY FARM
520	FALLOW LAND
530	FIELD & SEED
533	FISHERIES
540	FOREST
542	GREENBELT
550	ORCHARD
560	PASTURE
562	POULTRY RANCH
570	TRUCK CROPS
575	VINEYARD
599	VINEYARD II
600	PUBLIC (NEC)
601	TAX EXEMPT
602	STATE PROPERTY
603	COUNTY PROPERTY
604	MUNICIPAL PROPERTY
605	POLICE/FIRE/CIVIL DEFENSE
606	US POSTAL SERVICE
607	EMBASSIES/CHANCERIES
609	CORRECTIONAL FACILITY
610	COMMUNITY CENTER
611	HISTORICAL DISTRICT
614	FEDERAL PROPERTY
615	FEDERAL BUILDING
618	INDIAN RESERVATION
620	ART
630	MILITARY BUILDING
640	POSSESSORY INTEREST
650	SCHOOL
652	NURSERY SCHOOL
654	HIGH SCHOOL
655	PRIVATE SCHOOL
656	VOCATIONAL/TRADE SCHOOL
660	EDUCATIONAL SERVICE
664	SECONDARY EDUCATIONAL SCHOOL
665	PUBLIC SCHOOL
670	PUBLIC SERVICE
671	CHARITABLE ORGANIZATION
675	RELIGIOUS
680	UNIVERSITY
690	NATURE FACILITY
699	ZOO
700	RECREATIONAL (NEC)
701	CASINO
703	AMPHITHEATRE
706	AMUSEMENT ARCADE
709	AMUSEMENT PARK
712	AUDITORIUM
721	BOWLING ALLEY
724	BILLIARD HALL
725	CLUB
727	COUNTRY CLUB
728	HEALTH CLUB
733	DANCE HALL
742	GOLF COURSE
745	GOLF RANGE
750	GYMNASIUM
754	LAKE/RIVER/BEACH
755	MARINA FACILITY/RECREATIONAL
757	PARK
766	RACE TRACK
769	RACQUET/TENNIS COURT
770	TENNIS CLUB
775	RV PARK
780	SKATING RINK
784	STADIUM
787	STABLE
790	SWIMMING POOL
795	DRIVE IN THEATER
796	THEATER
797	TOURIST ATTRACTION/EXHIBITS
798	LIBRARY/MUSEUM
800	TRANSPORT (NEC)
801	COMMUNICATION FACILITY
806	AIRCRAFT FACILITY
808	AIRPORT
818	ELECTRICAL FACILITY
830	GAS PRODUCTION
839	MARINE FACILITY/COMMERCIAL
850	PORT/HARBOR
860	RAILROAD FACILITY
863	RECORDING STUDIO
864	RADIO FACILITY
867	EASEMENT
872	TELEPHONE FACILITY/COMMUNICATION
875	TV FACILITY
877	TRANSPORT FACILITY
879	TRUCK TERMINAL
880	UTILITIES
883	WASTE DISPOSAL
885	WELL/WATER
886	WELL/GAS-OIL
887	PIPELINE
899	WELL/GAS/OIL II
999	TYPE UNKNOWN

Location Influence Code

Property Location Information. Returned by the LocationInfluenceCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
I01	TYPE UNKNOWN
IAC	ALLEY/CORNER
IAG	AGRICULTURAL
IAI	AIRPORT
IAV	AVERAGE
IBA	BAY ACCESS
IBB	BEHIND BAY FRONT
IBF	BAY FRONT
IBG	BEHIND GULF FRONT
IBI	BAY FRONT ISLAND
IBL	BACK LOT
IBM	BAY FRONT MAIN-LAND
IBR	BEACH ROAD
IBU	BAYOU
IBY	BAY
ICA	CANAL
ICC	CREEK
ICD	CANAL DRAINAGE
ICF	CANAL FRONT
ICI	CANAL FRONT ISLAND
ICL	CORNER/LANDLOCK
ICM	CANAL MAIN-LAND
ICN	CORNER/WOODLOT/WATERFRONT
ICO	CORNER/WOODLOT
ICR	CORNER
ICT	CORNER/WATERFRONT
ICU	CUL-DE-SAC
ICW	CORNER/LANDLOCK/WOODLOT
ICY	CITY
IDE	DRAINAGE EASEMENT
IDO	DOWNTOWN
IDU	DUPLEX LOTS
IEF	EXTRA FRONT
IEL	EXPENSIVE LAND
IFL	FOUR PLEX LOT
IFP	FLOOD PLAIN
IGC	GOLF COURSE
IGG	GREENBELT/GOLF COURSE
IGO	GOOD
IGR	GREENBELT
IGU	GULF
IHI	HIGHWAY
IIC	INSIDE CITY
IIF	ISLAND GULF FRONT
IIN	INDUSTRIAL
IIO	IN-OUT CITY
IIW	ISLAND NO WATERFRONT
ILA	LAGOON
ILD	LANDLOCKED/WOODLOT/WATERFRONT
ILF	LAKE FRONT
ILK	LAKE
ILL	LANDLOCKED
ILP	LAKE/POND
ILT	LANDLOCKED/WOODLOT
ILW	LANDLOCKED/WATERFRONT
IMH	MOBILE HOME
IML	MAIN LAND
IMO	MOUNTAIN
INB	NON BUILDABLE
INC	INTRACOASTAL
INE	NEIGHBORHOOD
INR	INFERIOR
INT	INTERIOR
IOC	OCEAN
IOT	OUTSIDE CITY
IPA	PARK LAND
IPF	PARK FRONT
IPO	POOL
IPR	PRESERVE
IRA	RAVINE
IRC	RECREATIONAL
IRE	REAR
IRI	RIVER
IRL	IRREGULAR LOT
IRO	ROAD
IRS	RESTRICTIONS
IRU	RURAL
ISL	SUBMERGED LAND
IST	STREET
ISU	SUBURBAN
ITH	TOWNHOUSE
ITL	TRI PLEX LOT
IUR	URBAN
IVA	VALLEY
IWE	WETLAND
IWF	WATER FRONT
IWL	WOODLAND
IWW	WOODLOT/WATERFRONT
IZL	ZERO LOT LINE

Property Indicator Code

FARES General Code for Property Types. Returned by the PropertyIndicatorCode element.

Code	Description
10	Single Family Residence / Townhouse
11	Condominium (residential)
20	Commercial
21	Duplex, Triplex, Quadplex
22	Apartment
23	Hotel, Motel
24	Commercial (condominium)
25	Retail
26	Service (general public)
27	Office Building
28	Warehouse
29	Financial Institution
30	Hospital (medical complex, clinic)
31	Parking
32	Amusement-Recreation
50	Industrial
51	Industrial Light
52	Industrial Heavy
53	Transport
54	Utilities
70	Agricultural
80	Vacant
90	Exempt
00	Miscellaneous
000	Not Available / None

View Code

Building View. Returned by the ViewCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
V01	TYPE UNKNOWN
VAI	AIRPORT
VAV	AVERAGE
VBA	BAY
VBE	BEST
VBR	BETTER
VCA	CANAL
VCI	CITY
VCL	CREEK/LAKE
VCN	CANYON
VCV	CANYON/VALLEY
VEX	EXCELLENT
VFA	FAIR
VGC	GOLF COURSE
VGO	GOOD
VGP	GREENBELT/PARK
VGU	GULF
VHM	HILLS/MOUNTAINS
VHV	HILL/VALLEY
VIN	INFERIOR
VIW	INTERCOASTAL WATERWAY
VLA	LAKE
VLG	LAGOON
VLP	LAKE/POND
VMN	MOUNTAIN
VMO	MOUNTAIN/OCEAN
VOB	OBSTRUCTED
VOC	OCEAN
VPA	PARK
VPD	POND
VPG	PARKING
VPI	PRIME
VPL	POOL
VPM	PREMIUM
VPR	POOR
VRC	RECREATIONAL
VRD	ROAD
VRR	RIVER
VSD	STANDARD
VSN	SUBURBAN
VSR	SUPERIOR
VST	STREET
VTY	TYPICAL
VWD	WOODLAND
VWR	WATER

Owner Address

Matchcode

Indicates Level of Matching. Returned by the Matchcode element.

Code	Description
E001	LOW LEVEL ERROR
E002	COULD NOT FIND GSD FILE FOR THAT STATE
E003	INCORRECT GSD FILE SIGNATURE, OR VERSION ID
E004	GSD FILE OUT OF DATE (CAN ONLY OCCUR WHEN CASS MODE IS ON)
E010	NO CITY+STATE OR ZIP CODE WAS FOUND
E011	INPUT ZIP WAS NOT IN THE DIRECTORY
E012	INPUT CITY WAS NOT IN THE DIRECTORY
E013	INPUT CITY WAS NOT UNIQUE IN THE DIRECTORY
E014	OUT OF LICENSED AREA
E020	NO MATCHING STREETS FOUND IN DIRECTORY
E021	NO MATCHING CROSS STREETS FOR AN INTERSECTION MATCH
E022	NO MATCHING RANGES
E023	MATCH IS UNRESOLVED
E024	NO MATCHING RANGES (SAME AS S022)
E025	TOO MANY POSSIBLE CROSS STREETS FOR INTERSECTION MATCH
E999	SITUS ADDRESS WAS OUT OF COUNTY AND ALL FIELDS WERE RESET

Values

Total Value Calculated Indicator

Value Types. Returned by the CalculatedTotalValueCode, CalculatedLandValueCode, and CalculatedImprovementValueCode elements.

Code	Description
A	ASSESSED
M	MARKET
P	APPRAISED
T	TRANSITIONAL

Current Sale

Deed Category Code

Prior Sales Transaction Deed Type. Returned by the DeedCategoryCode element.

Code	Description
CD	CORRECTION DEED
D	RELEASE
F	FINAL JUDGEMENT
G	GRANT DEED
L	LIS PENDENS
N	NOTICE OF DEFAULT
Q	QUIT CLAIM
R	RELEASE
S	LOAN ASSIGNMENT
T	DEED OF TRUST
U	FORECLOSURE
X	MULTI CNTY/ST OR OPEN-END MORTGAGE
Z	NORMAL TYPE DOC

Sale Code

Indicates Financial Consideration. Returned by the SaleCode element.

Code	Description
C	CONFIRMED
E	ESTIMATED
F	SALE PRICE (FULL)
L	SALE PRICE (PARTIAL)
N	NOT OF PUBLIC RECORD
P	SALE PRICE (PARTIAL)
R	LEASE
U	UNKNOWN
V	VERIFIED

Current Deed

Mortgage Deed Type Code

Deed Type Used for Recording. Returned by the MortgageDeedTypeCode element.

Code	Description
AA	ASSIGNMENT AND AGREEMENT OF SALE
AD	ADMINISTRATOR’S DEED
AF	AFFIDAVIT
AG	AGREEMENT OF SALE
AI	ALL INCLUSIVE DEED OF TRUST
AJ	ADMINISTRATOR JOINT TENANCY
AL	ASSGNMT/ASSMPTN OF LEASE/SUBLS
AN	ASSIGNMENT DEED
AP	ASSUMPTION
AS	ASSIGNMENT OF DEED OF TRUST
AU	AUCTION
BA	BARGAIN & SALE DEED
CA	COUNTY DEED
CD	CORRECTION DEED
CL	CONSTRUCTION DEED OF TRUST
CM	COMMISSIONER’S DEDED
CN	CONDOMINIUM DEED
CQ	CORPORATION QUIT CLAIM DEED
CR	CORPORATE DEED
CS	CONTRACT OF SALE
CT	COMMITTEE DEED
CV	CONVEYANCE DEED
DA	DEED OF ASSUMPTION
DD	DEED
DI	DEED OF DISTRIBUTION
DL	DEED IN LIEW OF FORCLOSURE
DP	DOWN PAYMENT ASSISTANCE LOAN (SC)
DR	DEED OR RELEASE
EJ	EXECUTOR JOINT TENANT
EQ	EQUITY OR CREDIT LINE
EX	EXECUTORS DEED
FD	FORECLOSURE DEED
FI	FIDUCIARY DEED
FJ	FINAL JUDGMENT
FR	FORFEITURE DEED
FS	FEE SIMPLE DEED
GD	GRANT DEED
GF	GIFT DEED
GJ	FUARDIAN JOIN TENANT
GU	GUARDIAN DEED
IC	INTERCOMPANY DEED TRANSFER
ID	INTERCOMPANY/INTERFAMILY DEED
IF	INTERFAMILY DEED TRANSFER
IM	INDEMNITY DEED OF TRUST
IN	INSTITUTIONAL DEED
IS	INTERSPOUSAL DEED TRANSFER
IV	INDIVIDUAL GRANT DEED
JT	JOINT TENANCY DEED
LA	LEASE AGREEMENT
LH	LEASEHOLD DEED
LM	LIMITED WARRANTY DEED
LP	LIS PENDENS
MA	MARSHALLS DEED
MD	MASTERS DEED (SC)
MF	MORTGAGE FORECLOSURE DEED
MG	MORTGAGE DEED
ND	NOTICE OF DEFAULT
NT	NOTICE OF TRUSTEES SALE
OT	MISCELLANEOUS DOCUMENT
PA	PUBLIC AUCTION DEED
PB	PROBATE COURT DEED
PD	PARTNERSHIP GRANT DEED
PJ	PERSONAL REP JOINT TENANT
PN	PATENT (LAND)
PO	PAY OFF DEED
PR	PERSONAL REP’S DEED
PT	PUBLIC TRUSTEES DEED
PV	PRIVATE SALE
QC	QUIT CLAIM DEED
QJ	JOINT TENANT QUIT CLAIM DEED
RC	RECEIVER’S DEED
RD	RERECORDED DEED
RF	REFEREES DEED
RV	REVOLVING LINE OF CREDIT
SA	STATE DEED
SC	CERTIFICATE OF SALE - SHERIFF / MARSHALL
SD	SHERIFF’S DEED
SE	SECURITY DEED
SJ	SPECIAL WARRANTY DEED JOINT TENANT
SL	SUB LEASE
SO	SELLING OFFICER’S DEED (IL)
SR	STRAW DEED
ST	SETTLEMENT DEED
SU	JOINT SURVIVORSHIP / RIGHT OF
SW	SPECIAL WARRANTY DEED
TA	TRUST AGREEMENT
TC	CERTIFICATE OF TITLE (FL)
TD	TRUSTEE’S DEED (FORCLOSURE)
TJ	TRUSTEES JOINT TENANT
TR	DEED OF TRUST
TT	TORRENS DOCUMENT
TU	TRUSTEE’S DEED (TRANSFER)
TX	TAX DEED
UD	UNIT DEED
WD	WARRANTY DEED
WJ	WARRANTY DEED JOINT TENANT
XD	EXCHANGE DEED
XP	EXEMPTION DEED

Mortgage Loan Type Code

Type of Loan Secured. Returned by the MortgageLoanTypeCode element.

Code	Description
CDA	COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY
CNV	CONVENTIONAL
FHA	FEDERAL HOUSING AUTHORITY
LHM	LEASE HOLD MORTGAGE
PP	PRIVATE PARTY LENDER
SBA	SMALL BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
VA	VETERIANS ADMINISTRATION
WRP	WRAP-AROUND MORTGAGE

Mortgage Term Code

Identifies number stored in Mortgage Term field. Returned by the MortgageTermCode element.

Code	Description
D	DAYS
M	MONTHS
Y	YEARS

Prior Sale

Multi APN Code

Depicts Multiple or Split Parcel Sales. Returned by the MultiAPNCode element.

Code	Description
D	MULTI / DETAIL PARCEL SALE
M	MULTIPLE PARCEL SALE
S	SPLIT PARCEL SALE
X	MULTI / SPLIT PARCEL SALE

Square Footage

Building Area Code

Indicates Source Used for Universal Building Square Feet. Returned by the BuildingAreaCode element.

Code	Description
A	ADJUSTED
B	BUILDING
G	GROSS
L	LIVING
M	MAIN OR BASE AREA
R	GROUND FLOOR LEVEL

Building

Air Conditioning Code

Air Conditioning Method. Returned by the AirConditioningCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
ACA	AC.COMMERCIAL A/C
ACE	AC.CENTRAL
ACH	AC.CHILLED WATER
ACP	AC.CENTRAL PARTIAL
ACW	AC.CENTRAL & UNIT
ADU	AC.DUAL UNIT
AEV	AC.EVAPORATIVE
AFA	AC.FAN COOLING
AHT	AC.HEAT PUMP
AOF	AC.OFFICE ONLY
APF	AC.REFRIGERATION
APK	AC.PACKAGE
APR	AC.PACKAGE ROOF
APT	AC.PARTIAL
APV	AC.REFRIGERATION/EVAPORATION
ASE	AC.SEPARATE SYSTEM
ASO	AC.SOLAR
ASP	AC.SPLIT SYSTEM
AWA	AC.WALL UNIT
AWI	AC.WINDOW UNIT
AWN	AC.WALL/WINDOW UNIT
CAC	COMMERCIAL A/C
CEN	CENTRAL
CHW	CHILLED WATER
CPR	CENTRAL PARTIAL
CWU	CENTRAL & UNIT
DUL	DUAL UNIT
EVP	EVAPORATIVE
FAN	FAN COOLING
HTP	HEAT PUMP
OFC	OFFICE ONLY
PKG	PACKAGE
PKR	PACKAGE ROOF
PRT	PARTIAL
REF	REFRIGERATION
REV	REFRIGERATION/EVAPORAT
SEP	SEPARATE SYSTEM
SOL	SOLAR
SPL	SPLIT SYSTEM
WAU	WALL UNIT
WIU	WINDOW UNIT
WNU	WALL/WINDOW UNIT

Basement Code

Basement Finish Type. Returned by the BasementCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
BFL	FULL
CRA	CRAWL-SPACE
FBE	BEDROOM
FBR	BEDROOM & RECREATION ROOM
FCF	COMPLETELY FINISHED
FFD	FINISHED WITH DRYWALL
FFI	FINISHED
FFL	FINISHED WITH PLASTER
FFP	FINISHED WITH PANEL
FOF	OFFICE
FPA	PARKING
FPF	PARTIALLY FINISHED
FRE	RESIDENT
FRR	RECREATION ROOM
FST	STORAGE
FUN	UNFINISHED
FUT	UTILITY

Building Code

Primary Building Type. Returned by the BuildingCode element.

Code	Description
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
A0L	CRIB
A0M	BIN
A0U	OUT BUILDING
A0V	TANK
A1E	HOG HOUSE
AA0	BARN
AA1	PACKING BARN
AAA	DAIRY BARN
AAH	HORSE BARN
AAS	BARN/SHED
AKY	GRAIN TANK
AMG	MILK HOUSE
AMR	MILK PARLOR
AQ0	AGRICULTURAL BUILDING
AR0	SHED
ATG	POULTRY HOUSE
AU0	UTILITY
AV0	SILO
AVF	FRAME SILO
AW0	STABLE
AY0	FARM
AZL	CORN CRIB
C00	COMMERCIAL
C04	MARKET
C06	SAVINGS & LOAN
C07	SUPERMARKET
C0E	SALES
C0Q	COMMERICAL CONDO
C0R	STORE
C10	FOOD STAND
C3D	FURNITURE SHOWROOM
C40	COMMERCIAL GREENHOUSE
C5Y	LUMBER YARD
C5Z	LUMBER STORAGE
C60	OFFICE
C61	MEDICAL OFFICE
C6L	OFFICE LOW RISE
C6Q	OFFICE CONDO
C6W	OFFICE HI RISE
C82	PROFESSIONAL OFFICE
C98	DRIVE-UP WINDOW
CA0	SERVICE
CAA	SERVICE STATION
CAK	SERVICE GARAGE
CB0	BUSINESS
CCA	AUTO STATION
CCB	AUTO AGENCY
CCD	AUTO SHOWROOM
CCE	AUTO SALES
CCF	AUTO SALES & SERVICE
CCK	AUTO GARAGE
CCS	AUTO SERVICE
CD0	GAS
CDA	GAS STATION
CE0	LAUNDROMAT/DRY CLEANERS
CHK	MAINTENANCE GARAGE
CJ0	BANK
CJ2	BANK OFFICES
CJH	BANK DRIVE-IN
CJS	BANK SERVICE
CN0	RETAIL
CN8	RETAIL DRIVE UP
CNQ	RETAIL CONDO
CO0	CAR WASH
COL	CAR WASH AUTOMATIC
COM	CAR WASH MANUAL
CPK	PARKING GARAGE
CQ0	MARINA
CS0	FINANCIAL INSTITUTION
CT4	CONVENIENCE MARKET
CU0	HOTEL
CUP	HOTEL/MOTEL
CV0	MOTEL
CX0	SHOPPING CENTER
CYR	DEPARTMENT STORE
CZR	DISCOUNT STORE
E00	ENTERTAINMENT
E08	FRANCHISE FOOD
E0K	FAST FOOD
E0U	LOUNGE/NITE CLUB
E10	FRATERNAL
E2I	NIGHT CLUB/DINNER
E33	TENNIS/HANDBALL
E3A	TENNIS COURT
E3Q	TENNIS CLUB
E60	RADIO/TV
E61	RADIO/TV TRANSMITTER STATION
E6Z	RADIO/TV STUDIO
EB0	BOWLING ALLEY
EC0	ARENA/STADIUM
EE0	BAR
EEC	BAR COCKTAIL LOUNGE
EH0	CLUBHOUSE
EI0	CLUB/LODGE
EJQ	COUNTRY CLUB
EL0	CULTURAL FACILITY
EM0	FITNESS CENTER
EN0	CAMP SITES
EP0	GOLF
EPL	GOLF COURSE
ER0	RECREATION
ES0	RESTAURANT
ESK	RESTAURANT FAST FOOD
ET0	THEATER
ETE	THEATER/CINEMA
ETJ	DRIVE-IN THEATER
EU0	GYMNASIUM
EVQ	HEALTH CLUB
EVS	HEALTH SPA
EW0	SKATING RINK
EWX	SKATING RINK OUTDOORS
EZ0	RACQUETBALL
G00	GOVERNMENT
G0A	COURTHOUSE
G0P	POLICE STATION
GA0	ARMORY
GB0	MUNICIPAL
GC0	COUNTY
GE0	FEDERAL
GG0	FIRE STATION
GGP	FIRE STATION/POLICE STATION
GH0	CORRECTIONAL
GIE	CITY/VILLAGE/TOWN EXEMP
GM0	MILITARY
GP0	POST OFFICE
GS0	STATE
IAJ	ASPHALT PAVING
IB0	LIGHT IMPROVEMENTS
ICJ	CONCRETE PAVING
IFE	FENCE CHAINLINK
IFI	FENCE IRON
IFP	FENCE PICKET
IFR	FENCE POST/RAIL
IFS	FENCE BRICK/STONE
IFT	FENCE STOCKADE
M00	MULTI FAMILY
M0A	MULTI FAMILY HI RISE
M0H	GARDEN
M0T	MULTI FAMILY TOWNHOUSE
M50	5-PLEX
M51	5-PLEX AND HIGHER
MA0	APARTMENT
MAA	APARTMENT HI RISE
MAH	APARTMENT GARDEN
MAL	APARTMENT MID RISE
MAT	APARTMENT TOWNHOUSE
MC0	MULTI FAMILY CONDO
MCA	CONDO HI RISE
MCE	CONDO APARTMENT
MCH	CONDO GARDEN
MCM	CONDO-MULTIPLEX
MCO	CONDO OFFICE
MCT	CONDO TOWNHOUSE
MD0	DUPLEX
MDF	DUPLEX/TRIPLEX
R00	RESIDENTIAL
RC0	CABIN/COTTAGE
RG0	GUEST HOUSE
RI0	RESIDENTIAL GREENHOUSE
RM0	MOBILE HOME
RM1	MOBILE HOME SINGLE WIDE
RM2	MOBILE HOME DOUBLE WIDE
RMP	MOBILE HOME PARK
RS0	SINGLE FAMILY
RT0	TOWNHOUSE
RU0	PATIO HOME
T0T	TRANSPORTATION TERMINAL
TA0	AIRPORT
TH0	HANGAR
TTT	TRUCK TERMINAL
TTU	TRUCK STOP
U00	INDUSTRIAL
U0A	PLANT
U0F	FACTORY
U0H	INDUSTRIAL HEAVY
U0K	COLD STORAGE
U0L	INDUSTRIAL LIGHT
U0P	PROCESSING
U0Q	FREEZER
U21	FUEL SUPPLY
U80	PACKING PLANT
U85	TERMINAL TRANSIT
UA8	CIGARETTE MANUFACTURER
UB0	BOTTLING
UBB	BOTTLING BREWERY
UFP	FOOD PROCESSING
UM0	MANUFACTURING
UMH	MANUFACTURING HEAVY
UML	MANUFACTURING LIGHT
UMP	MANUFACTURING PROCESSING
UN0	MINING
URJ	RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT
UW0	WAREHOUSE
UWI	WAREHOUSE PREFAB
UWN	MINI WAREHOUSE
UWO	OFFICE WAREHOUSE
UWP	WAREHOUSE PROCESSING
UWX	WAREHOUSE CONDO
UWZ	WAREHOUSE STORAGE
UX9	LABORATORY/RESEARCH
X0A	AUDITORIUM/GYMNASIUM
X0F	EXEMPT
XA0	CHARITABLE
XB0	COLLEGE
XBP	COLLEGE PUBLIC
XBQ	COLLEGE PRIVATE
XBU	COLLEGE UNIVERSITY
XC0	CHURCH/SYNAGOGUE
XDD	DAY CARE CENTER
XE0	HOSPITAL
XEH	HOSPITAL CONVALESCENT
XEP	HOSPITAL PUBLIC
XEQ	HOSPITAL PRIVATE
XEV	VETERINARY HOSPITAL
XF0	DORMITORY
XGO	FOREST PARK
XH0	ORPHANAGE
XI0	INSTITUTION
XK0	FRATERNITY
XL0	LIBRARY
XMM	FUNERAL HOME
XNM	NURSING HOME
XQ0	MORTUARY
XQR	MORTUARY/CEMETARY
XR0	RELIGIOUS
XR5	RELIGIOUS EDUCATION
XS0	SCHOOL
XSP	SCHOOL PUBLIC
XTV	VETERINARY CLINIC

Building Style Code

Building Style Type. Returned by the BuildingStyleCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
ADC	ART DECO
AFR	A-FRAME
ANT	ANTIQUE/HISTORIC
BIL	BI-LEVEL
BUN	BUNGALOW
CAB	CABIN
CAP	CAPE COD
CHL	CHALET/ALPINE
CLU	CLUSTER
CND	CONDOMINIUM
CNT	CONTEMPORARY
COA	COACH/CARRIAGE HOUSE
COL	COLONIAL
CON	CONVENTIONAL
CTB	COTTAGE/BUNGALOW
DES	CUSTOM/DESIGNER
DOM	DOME
DUP	DUPLEX
EUR	EUROPEAN
FED	FEDERALIST
FRE	FRENCH PROVINCIAL
GAM	GAMBREL/BARN
GEO	GEODESIC
GOT	GOTHIC
GRA	GARAGE APARTMENT
GRE	GREEK REVIVAL
GRG	GEORGIAN
GRS	GARRISON/FRONTIER
HRI	HIGH RISE
HSH	H-SHAPE
LOG	LOG
LRI	LOW RISE
LSH	L-SHAPE
MAN	MANSION
MDR	MODULAR/PREFAB
MED	MEDITERRANEAN
MIS	MISSION
MLF	MULTI-FAMILY
MLL	MULTI-LEVEL
MOB	MOBILE HOME
MOD	MODERN
MRI	MID RISE
NEN	NEW ENGLAND
OLD	OLD
OLE	OLD ENGLISH
PAT	PATIO-HOME
QLV	QUAD-LEVEL
QUA	QUADRAPLEX
RAN	RANCH
REC	RECTANGULAR DESIGN
ROW	ROW HOUSE
RRA	RAISED RANCH
SLT	SALT BOX
SPA	SPANISH
SPF	SPLIT FOYER
SPL	SPLIT LEVEL
SQU	SQUARE DESIGN
SWN	SOUTHWESTERN
TLV	TRI-LEVEL
TPX	TRIPLEX
TRA	TRADITIONAL
TUD	TUDOR
TWN	TOWNHOUSE
UND	UNDERGROUND/BERM
USH	U-SHAPE
VIC	VICTORIAN
WIL	WILLIAMSBURG
WSH	W-SHAPE

Condition Code

Physical Condition of Main Improvement. Returned by the ConditionCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
AVE	AVERAGE
DMG	PHYSICAL DAMAGE
EXC	EXCELLENT
FAI	FAIR
GOO	GOOD
POO	POOR
UCN	UNDER CONSTRUCTION
UNS	UNSOUND
VGO	VERY GOOD

Construction Code

Primary Method of Construction. Returned by the ConstructionCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
ADB	ADOBE
AFR	A FRAME
ALF	ALUMINUM FRAME
ALS	ALUMINUM SIDING
ALV	ALUMINUM/VINYL
AOD	ARCHED/DOME
BCB	BRICK/CINDER BLOCK
BLB	BLOCK/BRICK
BLM	BLOCK/METAL
BLS	BLOCK/STEEL
BRC	BRICK/CONCRETE
BRF	BRICK/FRAME
BRK	BRICK
BRL	BRICK/STEEL
BRM	BRICK/METAL
BRS	BRICK/STUCCO
BST	BRICK/STONE
CCB	CONCRETE BLOCK
CCM	CONCRETE MASONRY
CCS	CONCRETE/STEEL
CLP	CLAPBOARD
CND	CINDER BLOCK
COM	COMBINATION
CRE	CONCRETE
CUS	CUSTOM
DOM	DOME
FLX	FLEXIBLE/FLEXICORE
FRM	FRAME
FRS	FRAME/STEEL
FRY	FRAME/MASONRY
FST	FRAME/STUCCO
GLA	GLASS
HEA	HEAVY
LIG	LIGHT
LOG	LOG
MAN	MANUFACTURED/MODULAR
MAS	MASONRY
MET	METAL
MTU	MASONRY TILT-UP
PFR	POLE FRAME
PRM	PREFAB METAL
SFM	STEEL/MASONRY
SRO	STONE/ROCK
STE	STEEL
STS	STEEL/STUCCO
STU	STUCCO
STV	STONE VENEER
STW	STEEL/WOOD
TBM	TILT-UP BRICK/METAL
TLU	TILT-UP
TUC	TILT-UP CONCRETE
WBR	WOOD/BRICK
WCB	WOOD FRAME/CONCRETE BLOCK
WMT	WOOD FRAME/METAL
WOO	WOOD
WSC	WOOD/STUCCO
WSL	WOOD/STEEL
WSN	WOOD/STONE

Electricity Code

Type of Energy Use. Returned by the ElectricityCode element

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
EAG	AVERAGE WIRING
EAV	AVAILABLE
EBA	BELOW AVERAGE WIRING
ECN	CONNECTED
EEX	EXTENSIVE WIRING
EGO	GOOD WIRING
EHE	HEAVY WIRING
ELI	LIGHT WIRING
EMA	MAXIMUM WIRING
EME	MEDIUM WIRING
EMI	MINIMAL WIRING
EOV	OVERHEAD WIRES
EPR	PRIVATE SOURCE
ETY	TYPICAL WIRING
EUN	UNDERGROUND WIRES

Exterior Wall Code

Type/Finish of Exterior Walls. Returned by the ExteriorWallCode element

Code	Description
ABL	ALUMINUM/BLOCK
ABP	ASBESTOS/BLOCK/PLYWOOD
ABR	ASBESTOS/BRICK
ABV	ASBESTOS/BRICK VENEER/WOOD
ABW	ASBESTOS/BLOCK/WOOD
ADO	ADOBE BLOCK
AFW	ASPHALT/FIBERGLASS/WOOD FRAME
ALB	ALUMINUM/BRICK
ALF	FRAME/ALUMINUM
ALM	ALUMINUM/MASONITE
ALN	ALUMINUM/STONE
ALS	ALUMINUM SIDING
ALU	ALUMINUM
ALV	ALUMINUM/VINYL
AME	ALUMINUM/METAL
AMS	ALUMINUM SIDING/STUCCO
ASB	ASBESTOS
ASC	ASBESTOS/CONCRETE
ASD	ASPHALT SIDING
ASF	ASBESTOS FRAME
ASG	ASBESTOS SHINGLE
ASI	ASBESTOS SIDING
ASK	ASBESTOS/BLOCK
ASM	ASBESTOS/MASONITE
ASO	ALUMINUM/STUCCO
ASP	ASBESTOS/PERMASTONE
AST	ASBESTOS/STONE
ASV	ASBESTOS/VINYL
ASW	ASBESTOS/WOOD
AWD	ASBESTOS/STONE/WOOD
BAS	BLOCK/ASBESTOS SHINGLE
BBA	BOARD & BATTEN
BBD	BLACK-BOARD
BBS	BRICK/CONCRETE BLOCK STUCCO
BBW	BOARD & BATTEN/WOOD FRAME
BFS	BRICK FRAME/STONE
BFT	BRICK/FRAME/STUCCO
BFV	BRICK/FRAME/VENEER
BFW	BRICK/FRAME/WOOD
BLB	BLOCK/BRICK
BLF	FRAME/BLOCK
BLM	BLOCK/MASONRY
BLO	BLOCK
BLP	BLOCK PAINTED
BLS	BLOCK/STONE
BLT	BLOCK/METAL
BLW	BLOCK/WOOD
BMG	BRICK/METAL & GLASS PANEL
BMM	BRICK/MASONITE
BMN	BRICK/MASONRY/STONE
BMS	BLOCK/MASONRY/STUCCO
BMT	BRICK/METAL
BMV	BRICK/METAL/VENEER
BOP	BOARD ON POST
BRC	BRICK/CONCRETE
BRI	BRICK
BRM	BRICK/MASONRY
BRO	BRICK/STUCCO
BRP	BRICK/PERMASTONE
BRS	BRICK/STONE
BRV	BRICK VENEER
BRW	BRICK/WOOD
BRX	BRICK VENEER/STONE/WOOD
BSD	BRICK SIDING
BSH	BRICK/SHINGLE
BSO	BLOCK/STONE/WOOD
BST	BLOCK/STUCCO
BSV	BRICK/STONE VENEER
BSW	BRICK/STONE/WOOD SIDING
BTL	BRICK/TILE
BVB	BRICK VENEER/BLOCK
BVN	BRICK/VINYL
BVW	BRICK VENEER/WOOD
BWB	BRICK VENEER/WALL BOARD
BWD	BRICK/WOOD SIDING
BWS	BRICK/STUCCO/WOOD
BWT	BRICK/WOOD/STONE VENEER
BWV	BRICK/WOOD/VINYL
CBC	CONCRETE BRICK/COMPOSITION
CBE	CONCRETE BLOCK/STEEL
CBL	CONCRETE BLOCK/METAL
CBM	CINDER BLOCK/MASONITE
CBP	CONCRETE BRICK/PANEL
CBS	CONCRETE BLOCK/STUCCO
CBU	CINDER BLOCK/STUCCO
CBV	CONCRETE BLOCK/STONE VENEER
CBW	CINDER BLOCK/WOOD
CBY	CONCRETE BLOCK/MASONRY
CCB	CINDER BLOCK
CCC	CONCRETE/CINDER BLOCK
CDR	CONCRETE/DRYVIT
CFS	CONCRETE/FRAME/STEEL
CGP	CONCRETE/GLASS PANELS
CHA	TONGUE & GROOVE/CHANNEL
CLA	CLAPBOARD
CLT	CLAY TILE
CMG	CB/METAL/GLASS PANEL
CMS	CONCRETE MASONRY
CMT	CONCRETE/METAL
CMW	CORRUGATED METAL/WALLBOARD
CNB	CONCRETE BLOCK
CNT	CONCRETE TILE
COM	COMPOSITION
CON	CONCRETE
COS	COPPER SIDING
CRP	CORRUGATED PANEL
CRS	CORRUGATED SIDING
CSH	COMPOSITION SHINGLE
CSI	COMPOSITION SIDING
CSP	CORRUGATED STEEL PANEL
CSS	COMPOSITION SIDING/STUCCO
CST	CONCRETE STUCCO
CUS	CUSTOM
CWL	PORCELAIN/ENAMEL PANEL
EIF	INSULATED FINISH/EIFS
FAB	FRAME ALUMINUM/BRICK
FAV	FRAME/ALUMINUM/VINYL
FBR	FIBERBOARD
FCB	FRAME CONCRETE BLOCK/BRICK
FCL	FRAME CLAPBOARD
FHB	FRAME HARDBOARD
FIB	FIBERGLASS
FMM	FRAME/MASONRY
FMV	FRAME/MASONRY/VENEER
FPM	FRAME/PERMASTONE
FPP	FRAME/PLYWOOD
FRA	FRAME
FRB	FRAME BRICK
FRC	FRAME COMPOSITION
FRE	FRAME/SHINGLE
FRG	FRAME/GLASS
FRM	FRAME/METAL
FRS	FRAME/STONE
FRV	FRAME/VINYL
FRW	FRAME/WOOD
FSB	FRAME SHINGLE/BRICK
FSD	FRAME SIDING
FSG	FRAME/STEEL/SIDING
FSL	FRAME-STUD/LATH/STUC/ASB SDG
FSM	FRAME/STEEL/METAL
FSP	FRAME/STEEL PANEL
FSS	FRAME/SHINGLE SIDING
FST	FRAME/STUCCO
FSV	FRAME/STONE/VENEER
FSW	FRAME/WOOD SHINGLE
FTS	FRAME/STUCCO/SIDING
FTW	FRAME/TILE/WOOD
FWB	FRAME WOOD/BRICK
FWC	FRAME WOOD/STUCCO
FWD	FRAME WOOD
FWS	FRAME/WOOD SIDING
GLA	GLASS
GLB	BRICK/GLASS
GLL	ALUMINUM/GLASS
GLM	GLASS/METAL
GLS	GLASS/STEEL
GMA	GLASS/MASONRY
GST	GLASS/STONE
GUN	GUNITE
GWD	GLASS/WOOD
HAR	HARDBOARD
HAY	HAYDITE
HBP	HARDBOARD/PLYWOOD
HBV	HARDBOARD/VINYL
HRW	HARDWOOD
IMI	SYNTHETIC PANEL/SIDING
INC	FIREPROOF/FIRE RETARDANT
IRN	IRON POST/CORRUGATED IRON
LOG	LOG
LPS	LAP SIDING
LWS	LOG/WOOD SHINGLE
MAR	MARBLE
MAS	MASONITE
MBS	MARBLE/STONE
MEL	METAL/STEEL
MET	METAL
MIX	MIXTURE
MLS	METAL/STUCCO
MSC	MASONITE/STUCCO
MSH	MASONITE/SHEATHING
MSM	MASONRY/METAL
MSN	MASONRY
MSS	MASONRY/STONE
MST	MASONITE/STONE
MSV	MASONITE/VINYL
MSW	MASONITE/WOOD
MTP	METAL PANEL
MTS	METAL SIDING
MVN	MASONRY VENEER
MVS	METAL/STONE/VENEER
MWD	METAL/WOOD
MWF	METAL/WOOD FRAME
MYS	MASONRY/STUCCO
MYW	MASONRY/WOOD
OPE	OPEN END
PAB	POST & BOARD
PAN	PANEL
PCP	PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL
PCW	PRECAST CURTAIN WALLS
PER	PERMASTONE
PFM	PREFAB METAL
PFW	PREFAB WOOD
PLS	PLASTER
PLY	PLYWOOD
POR	PORCELAIN/ENAMEL PANEL
PRB	PRESSBOARD
PRC	PRECAST CONCRETE
PRF	PREFAB
PRP	PREFAB PANEL
PST	PANEL/STUCCO
PTP	PRECAST TEXTURED PANEL
PWD	PERMASTONE/WOOD
PWF	PLYWOOD/WOOD FRAME
PWP	PREFAB WOOD PANEL
RBW	BRICK/CONCRETE BLOCK/WOOD
ROC	ROCK/STONE
SBR	SIMULATED BRICK, ROCK, STONE
SDS	SIDING SHEATHING
SEW	STEEL/WOOD
SFW	STEEL FRAME/WOOD
SGL	SOLAR GLASS
SGS	SHINGLE SIDING
SGW	SHINGLE/WOOD
SHB	SHINGLE/BRICK
SHE	SHEATHING
SHI	SHINGLE
SHS	SHEATHING/STUCCO
SHW	SHEATHING/WOOD
SIN	SINGLE
SLU	SLUMP
SNS	STONE/SIDING
SNW	STONE/WOOD
SPR	GUNITE/SPRAYCRETE
SSC	STONE/STUCCO
SSD	STONE/WOOD SIDING
SSF	FRAME/STUCCO SHINGLE
SSG	STAINLESS STEEL W/BRONZED GLAS
SSH	SLATE
SSS	SHINGLE/STUCCO
SST	STEEL/STUCCO
SSW	SHINGLE SIDING/WOOD FRAME
STE	STEEL
STF	STEEL FRAME
STM	STUCCO/MASONRY
STO	STONE
STP	STEEL/PANEL
STT	STUCCO/TILE
STU	STUCCO
STV	STONE VENEER
STW	STUCCO/TILE/WOOD
STY	STYROFOAM STUCCO
SUV	STUCCO/VINYL
SVE	STUCCO/VENEER
SVF	STONE VENEER/WOOD FRAME
SVL	STONE/VINYL
SVW	STONE/VENEER/WOOD
SWD	STUCCO/WOOD
SWF	STUCCO/WOOD FRAME
SWS	STONE/WOOD FRAME
TAP	TAR PAPER
TIL	TILE
TLU	TILT-UP/CONCRETE
TUU	TILT-UP
VIN	VINYL
VIT	VITROLITE
VNW	VINYL/WOOD
WAF	WAFERBOARD
WAS	WOOD/ALUMINUM/COMPOSITION SHIN
WDA	WOOD/ALUMINUM
WDF	WOOD FRAME
WDH	WOOD SIDING/SHINGLE
WDS	WOOD SHEATHING
WDV	WOOD VENEER
WFA	WOOD FRAME/ASBESTOS
WFS	WOOD FRAME/SIDING
WFV	WOOD FRAME/VINYL
WFX	WOOD FRAME(STUCCO OR ASBESTOS)
WLB	WALLBOARD
WOO	WOOD
WOS	WOOD SIDING
WRB	WEATHERBOARD
WSS	WOOD SHAKE/SHINGLE
WWL	WINDOW WALL
WWS	WALLBOARD/WOOD SHINGLE
XXX	CBS/HOLW TILE/FR/STUD/SHEAT/SD

Fireplace Code

Fireplace Type. Returned by the FireplaceCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
0B0	BRICK CHIMNEY
0C0	COAL/WOOD
0G0	GAS/LOG
0L0	STEEL
0M0	MASONRY
0M1	MASONRY 1 OPENING
0N0	CINDER/CONCRETE BLOCK CHIMNE
0P0	PREFAB
0P2	2 OPENINGS PREFAB
0R0	SEE THRU
0S0	STONE
0T0	METAL
0T1	1 METAL OPENING
0U0	TYPE UNKNOWN
0U1	1 OPENING
0U2	2 OPENINGS
0U3	3 OPENINGS
0U4	4 OPENINGS
0U5	5 OPENINGS
0U6	6 OPENINGS
0U7	7 OPENINGS
0U8	8 OPENINGS
0U9	9 OPENINGS
0UA	10 OPENINGS
0UB	11 OPENINGS
0UC	12 OPENINGS
0V0	MASSIVE
0V2	MASSIVE 2 OPENINGS
0W0	WOOD STOVE
0X0	STONE, BRICK, MARBLE
1B0	1 STORY BRICK
1F0	1 STORY FRAME
1O0	1 STORY STUCCO
1P0	1 STORY PREFAB
1S0	1 STORY STONE
1U0	1 STORY
1U1	1 STORY 1 OPENING
1U2	1 STORY 2 OPENINGS
1UX	1 STORY EXTRA OPENING
2B0	2 STORY BRICK
2F0	2 STORY FRAME
2O0	2 STORY STUCCO
2P0	2 STORY PREFAB
2S0	2 STORY STONE
2U0	2 STORY
2U1	2 STORY 1 OPENING
2U2	2 STORY 2 OPENINGS
2U3	2 STORY 3 OPENINGS
2U4	2 STORY 4 OPENINGS
2UX	2 STORY EXTRA OPENING
3B0	3 STORY BRICK
3F0	3 STORY FRAME
3P0	3 STORY PREFAB
3U1	3 STORY 1 OPENINGS
3U2	3 STORY 2 OPENINGS
3U3	3 STORY 3 OPENINGS
3UX	3 STORY EXTRA OPENING
AB0	1.5 STORY BRICK
AO0	1.5 STORY STUCCO
AP0	1.5 STORY PREFAB
AS0	1.5 STORY STONE
AU0	1.5 STORY

Flooring Code

Floor Construction Type. Returned by the FlooringCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
A	CONCRETE
B	WOOD
C	PLYWOOD
D	CONCRETE/ASPHALT
E	BRICK
F	ACRYLIC
G	ASBESTOS
H	GRAVEL
I	SLATE
J	DIRT
K	CINDER BLOCK
L	ASPHALT
M	BRICK/STONE
N	BRICK/STONE/SLATE
P	METAL DECK
Q	METAL GRATING
R	CORREGATED DECK
S	WOOD SHEATHING
T	STEEL-FLAT-SLAB
U	SUB-FLOORING

Foundation Code

Foundation Type. Returned by the FoundationCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
BLK	BLOCK
BRK	BRICK
CNB	CONCRETE BLOCK
CNF	CONTINUOUS FOOTING
CNW	CONTINUOUS WALL
CRB	CONCRETE/BEAM
CRE	CONCRETE
CRS	CROSS BRIDGED/WALLS
DRE	DIRT/EARTH
GDB	GRADE-BEAM
MSN	MASONRY
MUD	MUD SILL
PIL	PILINGS
PIR	PIER
PPI	PIPE/IRON
PRE	PRE-FAB
RAS	RAISED
SDF	SPREAD FOOTING
SLB	SLAB
STD	STANDARD
STE	STEEL
STM	STEM WALL
STN	STONE
UBM	TYPE UNKNOWN WITH BASEMENT
UCR	TYPE UNKNOWN WITH CRAWSPACE
UPB	TYPE UNKNOWN WITH PART BASEMENT
WOO	WOOD

Fuel Code

Type of Fuel used by Building. Returned by the FuelCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
FBU	BUTANE
FCO	COAL
FCV	CONVECTION
FCW	COAL/WOOD
FEL	ELECTRIC
FGA	GAS
FGS	GAS/SOLAR
FKE	KEROSENE
FLP	LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS
FOI	OIL
FOS	OIL/SOLAR
FSO	SOLAR
FWD	WOOD
FWO	COAL/WOOD/OIL

Garage Code

Type of Garage or Carport. Returned by the GarageCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	UNDEFINED TYPE
002	UNDEFINED TYPE - 2 CAR
003	UNDEFINED TYPE - 3 CAR
004	UNDEFINED TYPE - 4 CAR
005	UNDEFINED TYPE - 5 CAR
006	UNDEFINED TYPE - 6 CAR
010	ATTACHED GARAGE/CARPORT
020	ATTACHED BASEMENT
030	DETACHED BASEMENT
040	DETACHED GARAGE/CARPORT
050	ENCLOSED BRICK GARAGE/CARPORT
060	BASEMENT FINISHED
061	FINISHED BASEMENT - 1 CAR
062	FINISHED BASEMENT - 2 CAR
063	FINISHED BASEMENT - 3 CAR
064	FINISHED BASEMENT - 4 CAR
070	FINISHED BUILT IN
080	UNFINISHED BASEMENT
081	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 1 CAR
082	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 2 CAR
083	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 3 CAR
084	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 4 CAR
090	UNFINISHED BUILT IN
100	PREFAB
110	BASEMENT
112	BASEMENT - 2 CAR
113	BASEMENT - 3 CAR
114	BASEMENT - 4 CAR
115	BASEMENT - 5 CAR
116	BASEMENT - 6 CAR
120	BUILT IN
121	BUILT IN - 1 CAR
122	BUILT IN - 2 CAR
130	BUILT UNDER
140	GARAGE/CARPORT
170	FINISHED BRICK GARAGE
200	FINISHED ATTACHED MASONRY
210	UNFINISHED ATTACHED MASONRY
220	DETACHED MASONRY
230	FINISHED DETACHED MASONRY GARA
240	FINISHED MASONRY
250	UNFINISHED MASONRY
260	MASONRY
270	ATTACHED METAL
280	DETACHED METAL
290	METAL/WOOD
300	SALT BOX
310	STEEL
320	ATTACHED STONE
330	DETACHED STONE
340	FINISHED STONE
350	UNFINISHED STONE
360	STONE
370	ATTACHED STUCCO
380	STUCCO
390	VINYL
400	ATTACHED WOOD
410	DETACHED WOOD
430	UNFINISHED WOOD
440	WOOD
450	ATTACHED
451	ATTACHED - 1 CAR
452	ATTACHED - 2 CAR
453	ATTACHED - 3 CAR
454	ATTACHED - 4 CAR
460	ATTACHED FINISHED
470	UNFINISHED ATTACHED
480	ENCLOSED DETACHED
490	DETACHED FINISHED
500	UNFINISHED DETACHED
501	UNFINISHED DETACHED FRAME GARA
502	UNFINISHED DETACHED MASONRY GA
510	ENCLOSED
520	ALUMINUM
530	ALUMINUM/WOOD
540	DETACHED BLOCK
550	UNFINISHED DETACHED BLOCK
560	FINISHED BLOCK
570	PREFAB METAL
580	BLOCK
590	DETACHED BLOCK/FRAME
600	WOOD FRAME
610	ATTACHED BRICK
620	DETACHED BRICK
640	UNFINISHED BRICK
650	BRICK
660	BRICK/FRAME
670	MASONRY/BRICK
680	DETACHED BRICK/STONE
690	BRICK/STONE
701	DETACHED CINDERBLOCK - 1 CAR
710	CONCRETE
716	CONCRETE - 6 CAR
720	ATTACHED CONCRETE BLOCK
730	DETACHED CONCRETE BLOCK
740	FINISHED CONCRETE BLOCK
750	UNFINISHED CONCRETE BLOCK
760	CONCRETE BLOCK
770	UNFINISHED STUCCO/CONCRETE BLO
780	ATTACHED FRAME
790	FINISHED ATTACHED FRAME
800	UNFINISHED ATTACHED FRAME
810	DETACHED FRAME
820	DETACHED FRAME FINISHED
830	ENCLOSED FRAME
840	FINISHED FRAME
850	UNFINISHED FRAME
860	DETACHED FRAME/CONCRETE BLOCK
870	DETACHED GABLE/HIP
880	LOG
890	ATTACHED MASONRY
900	FINISHED
910	UNFINISHED
911	UNFINISHED - 1 CAR
912	UNFINISHED - 2 CAR
913	UNFINISHED - 3 CAR
920	DETACHED
921	DETACHED - 1 CAR
922	DETACHED - 2 CAR
923	DETACHED - 3 CAR
924	DETACHED - 4 CAR
930	COVERED PARKING/GARAGE
940	DETACHED FINISHED STUCCO
950	FRAME
960	FRAME/CONCRETE BLOCK
971	UNDEFINED TYPE - 1 CAR
980	METAL
00X	UNDEFINED TYPE - 10 CAR
A00	CARPORT
A01	CARPORT - 1 CAR
A02	CARPORT - 2 CAR
A03	CARPORT - 3 CAR
A04	CARPORT - 4 CAR
A05	CARPORT - 5 CAR
A06	CARPORT - 6 CAR
B00	ATTACHED CARPORT
C00	DETACHED CARPORT
D00	ENCLOSED CARPORT
E00	FINISHED DETACHED CARPORT
F00	UNFINISHED DETACHED CARPORT
G00	COVERED CARPORT
H00	UNFINISHED CARPORT
I00	FINISHED CARPORT
J00	MASONRY CARPORT
K00	METAL CARPORT
L00	WOOD CARPORT
M00	ALUMINUM CARPORT
N00	ALUMINUM FRAME CARPORT
O00	ALUMINUM/WOOD CARPORT
P00	CONCRETE CARPORT
Q00	CONCRETE BLOCK CARPORT
R00	FRAME CARPORT
S00	DETACHED GABLE/HIP CARPORT
T00	ATTACHED GABLE/HIP CARPORT
U00	DETACHED ALUMINUM CARPORT
V01	DETACHED CARPORT - 1 CAR
V02	DETACHED CARPORT - 2 CAR
WOO	PREFAB CARPORT
Z00	OPEN CARPORT

Heating Code

Type of Heating. Returned by the HeatingCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
00A	ELECTRIC/SOLAR
00C	COAL
00D	GAS/WOOD
00E	ELECTRIC
00G	GAS
00I	ELECTRIC/OIL
00M	GAS STEAM
00N	SOLAR/COAL/WOOD
00O	OIL
00P	COAL/WOOD
00Q	SOLAR/OIL
00R	ELECTRIC/RADIANT
00S	SOLAR
00T	ELECTRIC/HOT WATER
00W	WOOD
00Y	OIL/WOOD
00Z	GAS SOLAR
BB0	BASEBOARD
BBE	BASEBOARD ELECTRIC
BBG	BASEBOARD GAS
BBO	BASEBOARD OIL
BBP	BASEBOARD COAL/WOOD
BH0	BASEBOARD HOT WATER
BRE	BASEBOARD ELECTRIC/RADIANT
BS0	BASEBOARD HOT WATER/STEAM
BTE	BASEBOARD ELECTRIC/HOT WATER
CF0	CENTRAL FORCED AIR
CFO	CENTRAL FORCED AIR OIL
CL0	CENTRAL
CLE	CENTRAL ELECTRIC
CLG	CENTRAL GAS
CP0	CENTRAL PARTIAL
CV0	CONVECTION
CVE	CONVECTION ELECTRIC
CVG	CONVECTION GAS
CVO	CONVECTION OIL
FA0	FORCED AIR
FAC	FORCED AIR COAL
FAE	FORCED AIR ELECTRIC
FAG	FORCED AIR GAS
FAH	FORCED HOT WATER
FAO	FORCED AIR OIL
FAW	FORCED AIR WOOD
FC0	CEILING FURNACE
FCW	FORCED AIR COAL/WOOD
FF0	FLOOR FURNACE
FFE	FLOOR FURNACE ELECTRIC
FFG	FLOOR FURNACE GAS
FFL	FLOOR FURNACE COAL/WOOD
FFO	FLOOR FURNACE OIL
FL0	FLOOR/WALL FURNACE
FN0	FORCED AIR NOT DUCTED
FP0	FIREPLACE
FR0	FURNACE
FRC	FURNACE COAL
FRE	FURNACE ELECTRIC
FRG	FURNACE GAS
FRW	WOOD FURNACE
FS0	FURNACE/STOVE
GF0	GRAVITY FURNACE
GFG	GRAVITY FURNACE GAS
GN0	GRAVITY NOT DUCTED
GR0	GRAVITY
GRC	GRAVITY COAL
GRE	GRAVITY ELECTRIC
GRG	GRAVITY GAS
GRO	GRAVITY OIL
GRS	GRAVITY SOLAR
HA0	HOT AIR
HAE	HOT AIR ELECTRIC
HAO	HOT AIR OIL
HAS	HOT AIR SOLAR
HN0	HOT AIR NOT DUCTED
HP0	HEAT PUMP
HPE	HEAT PUMP ELECTRIC
HPG	HEAT PUMP GAS
HPH	HEAT PUMP HOT WATER
HPL	HEAT PUMP COAL/WOOD
HPO	HEAT PUMP OIL
HPS	HEAT PUMP SOLAR
HS0	HOT WATER STEAM
HW0	HOT WATER
HWE	HOT WATER/ELECTRIC
HWG	HOT WATER GAS
HWL	HOT WATER COAL/WOOD
HWO	HOT WATER OIL
HWS	HOT WATER SOLAR
HWW	HOT WATER WOOD
IN0	INDUSTRIAL
JT0	JETS
ND0	NOT DUCTED
PK0	PACKAGE
PKE	PACKAGE ELECTRIC
PT0	PARTIAL
RC0	RADIANT CEILING
RD0	RADIANT
RDE	RADIANT ELECTRIC
RDH	RADIANT HOT WATER
RDI	RADIANT ELECTRIC/OIL
RDW	RADIANT WOOD
RGO	RADIANT HOT WATER OIL
RR0	RADIATOR
RS0	RADIANT STEAM
SP0	SPACE
SPG	SPACE GAS
SPL	SPACE COAL/WOOD
SPO	SPACE OIL
SS0	STOVE/SPACE
ST0	STEAM
STE	STEAM ELECTRIC
STG	STEAM GAS
STH	STEAM HOT WATER
STO	STEAM OIL
STW	STEAM WOOD
SV0	STOVE
SVG	STOVE GAS
UN0	UNIT
UNE	UNIT ELECTRIC
UNG	UNIT GAS
WA0	WARM AIR
WF0	WALL FURNACE
WFL	WALL FURNACE COAL/WOOD
WFO	WALL FURNACE OIL
WH0	WALL HEAT PUMP
WL0	WALL
WLE	WALL ELECTRIC
WLG	WALL GAS
WS0	WOOD STOVE
WU0	WALL UNIT

Improvement Code

Building Improvement Type. Returned by the ImprovementCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
A0I	FARM
A0L	CRIB
A0S	SHED
A0Y	TANK
A1E	HOG HOUSE
AA0	BARN
AA1	PACKING BARN
AAA	DAIRY BARN
AAH	HORSE BARN
AAS	BARN/SHED
AKY	GRAIN TANK
AMG	MILK HOUSE
AMR	MILK PARLOR
AQ0	AGRICULTURAL BUILDING
ATG	POULTRY HOUSE
AU0	UTILITY
AV0	SILO
AVF	FRAME SILO
AW0	STABLE
AY0	BIN
AZL	CORN CRIB
C00	COMMERCIAL
C04	MARKET
C06	SAVINGS & LOAN
C07	SUPERMARKET
C0C	HANGAR
C0E	COMMERCIAL SALES
C0P	MOTEL
C0Q	COMMERCIAL CONDO
C0R	STORE
C3D	FURNITURE SHOWROOM
C40	COMMERCIAL GREENHOUSE
C5Y	LUMBER YARD
C60	OFFICE
C61	MEDICAL OFFICE
C6Q	OFFICE CONDO
C6W	OFFICE HIGH RISE
C82	PROFESSIONAL OFFICE
C98	DRIVE-UP WINDOW
CA0	COMMERCIAL SERVICE
CAA	SERVICE STATION
CAK	SERVICE GARAGE
CB0	BUSINESS PARK
CCA	AUTO STATION
CCB	AUTO AGENCY
CCD	AUTO SHOWROOM
CCE	AUTO SALES
CCF	AUTO SALES & SERVICE
CCK	AUTO GARAGE
CCS	AUTO SERVICE
CD0	GAS
CDA	GAS STATION
CE0	MARINA
CG0	AIRPORT
CHK	MAINTENANCE GARAGE
CJ0	BANK
CJ2	BANK OFFICES
CJH	BANK DRIVE-IN
CJS	BANK SERVICE
CN0	RETAIL
CN8	RETAIL DRIVE UP
CNQ	RETAIL CONDO
CO0	CAR WASH
COL	CAR WASH AUTOMATIC
COM	CAR WASH MANUAL
CPK	PARKING GARAGE
CS0	FINANCIAL INSTITUTION
CT4	CONVENIENCE MARKET
CU0	HOTEL
CVP	HOTEL/MOTEL
CX0	SHOPPING CENTER
CYR	DEPARTMENT STORE
CZ5	LUMBER STORAGE
CZR	DISCOUNT STORE
E00	ENTERTAINMENT
E07	FOOD STAND
E08	FRANCHISE FOOD
E0K	FAST FOOD
E0U	LOUNGE/NITE CLUB
E10	FRATERNAL BUILDING
E2I	NITE CLUB/DINNER
E33	TENNIS/HANDBALL
E50	RADIO/TV
E51	RADIO/TV TRANSMITTER STATION
E5Z	RADIO/TV STUDIO
EB0	BOWLING ALLEY
EC0	ARENA
EE0	BAR
EEC	BAR/LOUNGE
EH0	CLUBHOUSE
EI0	CLUB/LODGE
EJQ	COUNTRY CLUB
EL0	CULTURAL FACILITY
EM0	FITNESS CENTER
EN0	CAMP
EP0	GOLF
EPL	GOLF COURSE
ER0	RECREATION
ES0	RESTAURANT
ESK	FAST FOOD RESTAURANT
ET0	THEATER
ETA	TENNIS COURT
ETE	THEATER/CINEMA
ETJ	DRIVE-IN THEATER
ETQ	TENNIS CLUB
EU0	GYMNASIUM
EVQ	HEALTH CLUB
EVS	HEALTH SPA
EW0	SKATING RINK
EWX	SKATING RINK OUTDOORS
EZ0	RACQUETBALL
G00	GOVERNMENT
G0H	COURTHOUSE
G0P	POLICE STATION
GA0	ARMORY
GB0	MUNICIPAL
GC0	COUNTY
GE0	FEDERAL
GG0	FIRE STATION
GGP	FIRE STATION/POLICE STATION
GH0	CORRECTIONAL
GIE	CITY/VILLAGE/TOWN EXEMP
GM0	MILITARY
GP0	POST OFFICE
GS0	STATE
I80	TERMINAL
IAJ	ASPHALT PAVING
IB0	LIGHT
ICJ	CONCRETE PAVING
IFE	FENCE CHAINLINK
IFI	FENCE IRON
IFP	FENCE PICKET
IFR	FENCE POST/RAIL
IFS	FENCE BRICK/STONE
IFT	FENCE STOCKADE
M00	MULTI FAMILY
M0A	HIGH RISE
M0H	GARDEN
M0T	MULTI FAMILY TOWNHOUSE
M50	5-PLEX AND HIGHER
MA0	APARTMENT
MAA	APARTMENTS HIGH RISE
MAH	APARTMENT GARDEN
MAI	APARTMENTS MID RISE
MAT	APARTMENT TOWNHOUSE
MC0	CONDO
MCA	CONDO HIGH RISE
MCE	CONDO-APARTMENT
MCH	CONDO-GARDEN
MCM	CONDO-MULTIPLEX
MCO	CONDO-OFFICE
MCT	CONDO-TOWNHOUSE
MD0	DUPLEX
MDF	DUPLEX/TRIPLEX
R00	RESIDENTIAL
R99	HOUSE/OFFICE
RC0	RESIDENTIAL CABINS
RG0	GUEST HOUSE
RI0	GREENHOUSE
RM0	MOBILE HOME
RM1	MOBILE HOME SINGLE WIDE
RM2	MOBILE HOME DOUBLE WIDE
RMP	MOBILE HOME PARK
RS0	SINGLE FAMILY
RT0	TOWNHOUSE
RU0	PATIO HOME
U00	INDUSTRIAL
U0A	PLANT
U0F	FACTORY
U0H	INDUSTRIAL - HEAVY
U0K	COLD STORAGE
U0L	INDUSTRIAL - LIGHT
U0P	PROCESSING
U0Q	FREEZER
U21	FUEL SUPPLY
U85	TERMINAL TRANSIT
U87	TRUCK TERMINAL
U97	TRUCK STOP
UA8	CIGARETTE MANUFACTURER
UBB	BOTTLING/BREWERY
UFP	FOOD PROCESSING
ULA	PACKING PLANT
UM0	MANUFACTURING
UMH	MANUFACTURING - HEAVY
UML	MANUFACTURING - LIGHT
UMP	MANUFACTURING/PROCESSING
UN0	MINING
URJ	RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT
UW0	WAREHOUSE
UWI	WAREHOUSE - PREFAB
UWN	WAREHOUSE - MINI
UWO	OFFICE/WAREHOUSE
UWP	PROCESSING WAREHOUSE
UWX	WAREHOUSE CONDO
UWZ	WAREHOUSE STORAGE
UX9	LABORATORY/RESEARCH
WUO	WAREHOUSE/OFFICE
X0A	AUDITORIUM
X0F	EXEMPT
XA0	CHARITABLE
XB0	COLLEGE
XBQ	COLLEGE PRIVATE
XBU	COLLEGE/UNIVERSITY
XC0	CHURCH
XCP	COLLEGE - PUBLIC
XDD	DAY CARE CENTER
XE0	HOSPITAL
XEH	CONVALESCENT HOSPITAL
XEP	HOSPITAL - PUBLIC
XEQ	HOSPITAL - PRIVATE
XEV	VETERINARY HOSPITAL
XF0	DORMITORY
XGO	FOREST PARK
XH0	ORPHANAGE
XI0	INSTITUTION
XK0	FRATERNITY
XL0	LIBRARY
XMM	FUNERAL HOME
XMN	NURSING HOME
XQ0	MORTUARY
XQR	MORTUARY/CEMETARY
XR0	RELIGIOUS
XRI	RELIGIOUS EDUCATION
XS0	SCHOOL
XSP	SCHOOL - PUBLIC
XTV	VETERINARY CLINIC

Parking Code

Type of Parking on the Parcel. Returned by the ParkingCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
002	UNDEFINED TYPE - 2 CAR GARAGE
003	UNDEFINED TYPE - 3 CAR GARAGE
004	UNDEFINED TYPE - 4 CAR GARAGE
005	UNDEFINED TYPE - 5 CAR GARAGE
006	UNDEFINED TYPE - 6 CAR GARAGE
010	ATTACHED GARAGE/CARPORT
020	ATTACHED BASEMENT GARAGE
030	DETACHED BASEMENT GARAGE
040	DETACHED GARAGE/CARPORT
050	ENCLOSED BRICK GARAGE/CARPORT
060	BASEMENT FINISHED GARAGE
061	FINISHED BASEMENT - 1 CAR GARA
062	FINISHED BASEMENT - 2 CAR
063	FINISHED BASEMENT - 3 CAR GARA
064	FINISHED BASEMENT - 4 CAR GARA
070	FINISHED BUILT IN GARAGE
080	UNFINISHED BASEMENT GARAGE
081	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 1 CAR GA
082	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 2 CAR GA
083	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 3 CAR GA
084	UNFINISHED BASEMENT - 4 CAR GA
090	UNFINISHED BUILT IN GARAGE
100	PREFAB GARAGE
110	BASEMENT GARAGE
111	BASEMENT - 1 CAR GARAGE
112	BASEMENT - 2 CAR GARAGE
113	BASEMENT - 3 CAR GARAGE
114	BASEMENT - 4 CAR GARAGE
115	BASEMENT - 5 CAR GARAGE
116	BASEMENT - 6 CAR GARAGE
120	BUILT-IN GARAGE
121	BUILT IN - 1 CAR GARAGE
122	BUILT IN - 2 CAR GARAGE
130	BUILT UNDER GARAGE
140	GARAGE/CARPORT
150	CINDERBLOCK GARAGE
160	ASBESTOS GARAGE
200	FINISHED ATTACHED MASONRY GARA
210	UNFINISHED ATTACHED MASONRY GA
220	DETACHED MASONRY GARAGE
230	FINISHED DETACHED MASONRY GARA
240	FINISHED MASONRY GARAGE
250	UNFINISHED MASONRY GARAGE
260	MASONRY GARAGE
270	ATTACHED METAL GARAGE
280	DETACHED METAL GARAGE
290	METAL/WOOD GARAGE
300	SALT BOX GARAGE
310	STEEL GARAGE
320	ATTACHED STONE GARAGE
330	DETACHED STONE GARAGE
340	FINISHED STONE GARAGE
350	UNFINISHED STONE GARAGE
360	STONE GARAGE
361	STONE GARAGE - 1 CAR
362	STONE GARAGE - 2 CAR
363	STONE GARAGE - 3 CAR
370	ATTACHED STUCCO GARAGE
380	STUCCO GARAGE
390	VINYL GARAGE
400	ATTACHED WOOD GARAGE
410	DETACHED WOOD GARAGE
420	ATTACHED MASONRY GARAGE
430	UNFINISHED WOOD GARAGE
440	WOOD GARAGE
450	ATTACHED GARAGE
451	ATTACHED - 1 CAR GARAGE
452	ATTACHED - 2 CAR GARAGE
453	ATTACHED - 3 CAR GARAGE
454	ATTACHED - 4 CAR GARAGE
460	ATTACHED FINISHED GARAGE
470	UNFINISHED ATTACHED GARAGE
480	ENCLOSED DETACHED GARAGE
490	DETACHED FINISHED GARAGE
500	UNFINISHED DETACHED GARAGE
501	UNFINISHED DETACHED FRAME GARA
502	UNFINISHED DETACHED MASONRY GA
510	ENCLOSED GARAGE
520	ALUMINUM GARAGE
530	ALUMINUM/WOOD GARAGE
540	DETACHED BLOCK GARAGE
550	UNFINISHED DETACHED BLOCK GARA
560	FINISHED BLOCK GARAGE
570	PREFAB METAL GARAGE
580	BLOCK GARAGE
590	DETACHED BLOCK/FRAME GARAGE
600	WOOD FRAME GARAGE
610	ATTACHED BRICK GARAGE
620	DETACHED BRICK GARAGE
630	DETACHED STUCCO GARAGE
640	UNFINISHED BRICK GARAGE
650	BRICK GARAGE
651	BRICK GARAGE - 1 CAR
652	BRICK GARAGE - 2 CAR
653	BRICK GARAGE - 3 CAR
654	BRICK GARAGE - 4 CAR
660	BRICK/FRAME GARAGE
670	MASONRY/BRICK GARAGE
680	DETACHED BRICK/STONE GARAGE
690	BRICK/STONE GARAGE
701	DETACHED CINDERBLOCK - 1 CAR G
710	CONCRETE GARAGE
716	CONCRETE - 6 CAR GARAGE
720	ATTACHED CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE
730	DETACHED CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE
740	FINISHED CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE
750	UNFINISHED CONCRETE BLOCK GARA
760	CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE
761	CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE - 1 CAR
762	CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE - 2 CAR
763	CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE - 3 CAR
770	UNFINISHED STUCCO/CONCRETE BLO
780	ATTACHED FRAME GARAGE
790	FINISHED ATTACHED FRAME GARAGE
800	UNFINISHED ATTACHED FRAME GARA
810	DETACHED FRAME GARAGE
820	DETACHED FRAME FINISHED GARAGE
830	ENCLOSED FRAME GARAGE
840	FINISHED FRAME GARAGE
850	UNFINISHED FRAME GARAGE
860	DETACHED FRAME/CONCRETE BLOCK
870	VINYL GARAGE
880	LOG GARAGE
890	VINYL GARAGE
900	FINISHED GARAGE
910	UNFINISHED GARAGE
911	UNFINISHED - 1 CAR GARAGE
912	UNFINISHED - 2 CAR GARAGE
913	UNFINISHED - 3 CAR GARAGE
920	DETACHED GARAGE
921	DETACHED - 1 CAR GARAGE
922	DETACHED - 2 CAR GARAGE
923	DETACHED - 3 CAR GARAGE
924	DETACHED - 4 CAR GARAGE
930	COVERED PARKING/GARAGE
940	DETACHED FINISHED STUCCO GARAG
950	FRAME GARAGE
951	FRAME GARAGE - 1 CAR
952	FRAME GARAGE - 2 CAR
953	FRAME GARAGE - 3 CAR
954	FRAME GARAGE - 4 CAR
960	FRAME/CONCRETE BLOCK GARAGE
971	UNDEFINED TYPE - 1 CAR GARAGE
980	METAL GARAGE
00P	UNDEFINED TYPE
00X	UNDEFINED TYPE - 10 CAR GARAGE
A00	CARPORT
A01	CARPORT - 1 CAR
A02	CARPORT - 2 CAR
A03	CARPORT - 3 CAR
A04	CARPORT - 4 CAR
A05	CARPORT - 5 CAR
A06	CARPORT - 6 CAR
ADP	ADEQUATE CAPACITY
ASP	ASSIGNED SPACES(S)
B00	ATTACHED CARPORT
C00	DETACHED CARPORT
CAP	COVERED/ASSIGNED SPACE(S)
CUP	COVERED/UNASSIGNED SPACE(S)
CVP	COVERED
D00	ENCLOSED CARPORT
DEP	DECK
DGP	DECK/GARAGE
E00	FINISHED DETACHED CARPORT
F00	UNFINISHED DETACHED CARPORT
G00	COVERED CARPORT
GAP	GARAGE/ADEQUATE CAPACITY
H00	UNFINISHED CARPORT
I00	FINISHED CARPORT
J00	MASONRY CARPORT
K00	METAL CARPORT
L00	WOOD CARPORT
M00	ALUMINUM CARPORT
N00	ALUMINUM FRAME CARPORT
O00	ALUMINUM/WOOD CARPORT
OAP	OPEN & ASSIGNED SPACE(S)
OFP	OFF STREET
ONP	ON STREET
OOP	ON & OFF STREET
OSP	OFF SITE
OTP	ON SITE
OUP	OPEN/UNASSIGNED SPACE(S)
P00	CONCRETE CARPORT
PAP	PAVED
Q00	CONCRETE BLOCK CARPORT
R00	FRAME CARPORT
ROP	ROOF
S00	DETACHED GABLE/HIP CARPORT
SBP	SUBTERRANEAN
SCP	SHARED/COMMON
T00	ATTACHED GABLE/HIP CARPORT
U00	DETACHED ALUMINUM CARPORT
UNP	UNCOVERED
V01	DETACHED CARPORT - 1 CAR
V02	DETACHED CARPORT - 2 CAR
WOO	PREFAB CARPORT
Z00	OPEN CARPORT

Pool Code

Type of Pool. Returned by the PoolCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
002	2 POOLS
003	3 POOLS
004	4 POOLS
005	5 POOLS
006	6 POOLS
007	7 POOLS
008	8 POOLS
009	9 POOLS
100	POOL/HOT TUB
200	POOL/SAUNA
300	POOL/SPA
400	HOT TUB/SPA
500	SAUNA/SPA
00A	POOL & SAUNA
00B	POOL & BATH HOUSE
00C	POOL & COVER
00D	POOL & DECK
00E	POOL & EQUIP
00F	POOL & FENCE
00H	HEATED
00J	POOL & HOT TUB
00K	POOL & CABANA
00L	POOL HOUSE
00N	POOL & CANOPY
00O	SOLAR HEATED
00P	POOL & PATIO
00R	POOL & BAR
00S	POOL & SPA
00T	POOL & HOT TUB/SPA
00V	POOL & FOUNTAIN
00W	POOL & WATERFALL
00X	MULTIPLE
00Y	POOL & DIVING BOARD
0A0	GRANITE
0B0	BRICK
0C0	CONCRETE
0CB	CONCRETE & BATH HOUSE
0CE	CONCRETE & EQUIPMENT
0CF	CONCRETE & FENCED
0CG	CONCRETE/GUNITE
0F0	FIBERGLASS
0G0	GUNITE
0GC	CONCRETE/GRANITE
0GH	GUNITE HEATED
0GJ	GUNITE & HOT TUB
0GP	GUNITE & PATIO
0GS	GUNITE & SPA
0L0	VINYL/FIBERGLASS
0M0	METAL
0P0	PLASTIC
0R0	PREFAB VINYL
0S0	STEEL/VINYL
0V0	VINYL
0VD	VINYL & DECK
0VP	VINYL & PATIO
A00	ABOVE GROUND
C00	COMMERCIAL
CF0	COMMERICAL FIBERGLASS
D00	ADULT/KIDDIE
E00	ENCLOSED
EG0	ENCLOSED GUNITE
F00	FISH
G00	INGROUND
G0J	INGROUND & HOT TUB
G0S	INGROUND & SPA
GC0	INGROUND CONCRETE
GG0	INGROUND GUNITE
GV0	INGROUND VINYL
H00	IRREGULAR SHAPE
I00	INDOOR
J00	HOT TUB/JACUZZI
J0S	HOT TUB & SPA
K00	KIDDIE/PLAY
KC0	KIDDIE/PLAY POOL - CONCRETE
L00	L SHAPE
LV0	L SHAPE VINYL
M00	SAUNA
N00	LAGOON
O00	OVAL SHAPE
OV0	OVAL SHAPE VINYL
P00	COMMUNITY
Q00	CIRCULAR
S00	SPA
S0D	POOL/SPA & DECK
S0Z	SPA & GAZEBO
SD0	SPA & DECK
T00	BUMPER BOAT
U00	LAP
V00	ARROW SHAPE
W00	WADING
WC0	WADING CONCRETE
Y00	MUNICIPAL
Z00	KIDNEY SHAPE
ZG0	KIDNEY SHAPED GUNITE
ZV0	KIDNEY SHAPE VINYL

Quality Code

Building Construction Quality. Returned by the QualityCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
QAV	AVERAGE
QBA	BELOW AVERAGE
QEC	ECONOMICAL
QEX	EXCELLENT
QFA	FAIR
QGO	GOOD
QLO	LOW
QLU	LUXURY
QPO	POOR

Roof Cover Code

Roof Covering Type. Returned by the RoofCoverCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
002	ASPHALT SHINGLE
003	BUILT UP
004	ALUMINUM
005	CUSTOM
010	ASBESTOS
011	ASBESTOS SHINGLE
013	COMPOSITION
014	COMPOSITION ROLL
015	COMPOSITION SHINGLE
016	CONCRETE
017	COPPER
018	COPPER/SHINGLE
019	GALVANIZED SHEET METAL
020	GYPSUM
021	METAL SHEETING
022	ROLL
023	SHINGLE
024	SLATE/SLAG
025	TAR & GRAVEL
026	TAR PAPER
027	TILE
028	WOOD
029	WOOD SHAKE
030	WOOD SHAKE/SHINGLE
101	ALUMINUM/SHINGLE
104	ASBESTOS/WOOD
105	ASBESTOS/WOOD/SHINGLE
106	ASPHALT
107	ASPHALT ROLL
109	ASPHALT TILE
110	ASPHALT/COMPOSITION
111	ASPHALT/COMPOSITION SHINGLE
113	BUILT UP COMPOSITION
114	BUILT UP GYPSUM
115	BUILT UP METAL
116	BUILT UP ROCK
117	BUILT UP TAR & GRAVEL
118	BUILT UP WOOD
119	BUILT-UP METAL/GYPSUM
120	CEDAR SHAKE
121	CEMENT TILE
122	CEMENT/COMPOSITION
123	CERAMIC/GLAZED TILE
124	CLAY TILE
125	CLAY TILE/GLAZED TILE
126	CLAY TILE/SLATE
127	CLAY/CONCRETE TILE
131	COMPOSITION SHINGLE/METAL
132	COMPOSITION TILE
133	COMPOSTION SHINGLE
135	CONCRETE DECK
136	CONCRETE TILE
138	COPPER/ENAMEL METAL SHEETING
139	COPPER/METAL
140	CORRUGATED ASBESTOS
141	CORRUGATED COMPOSITION
142	CORRUGATED IRON
143	CORRUGATED METAL
144	CORRUGATED STEEL
145	CRUSHED ROCK
146	ENAMELED METAL
147	FIBERGLASS
148	FIBERGLASS/PLASTIC
150	GLAZED TILE
151	GRAVEL
152	GRAVEL & ROCK
154	HARDWOOD
155	METAL
157	METAL TILE
158	METAL/SHINGLE
159	METAL/TAR PAPER
160	METAL/TIN
161	MODULAR METAL
162	PLASTIC/URETHANE
163	PRECAST CONCRETE
164	PREFINISHED METAL
165	REINFORCED CONCRETE
166	ROCK
167	ROCK & GRAVEL
169	ROLL PAPER
170	RUBBER/ELASTOMERIC
173	SLATE/TILE
174	STONE/ROCK
175	STONE/PEBBLE
176	STONE
177	SHAKE
178	ROLL TAR & GRAVEL
179	TIN

Roof Framing Code

Returned by the RoofFramingCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
00B	BAR JOIST
00C	CONCRETE
00D	BAR JOIST & WOOD DECK
00E	METAL PIPE
00F	WOOD FRAME
00G	BOWSTRING
00J	BAR JOIST & CONCRETE DECK
00L	FLEXIBLE/FLEXICORE
00M	METAL
00O	REINFORCED CONCRETE
00P	LONGSPAN TRUSS
00Q	PRESTRESS CONCRETE
00R	BAR JOIST & RIGID FRAME
00S	STEEL
00T	TRUSS/JOIST
00U	WOOD BEAM
00W	WOOD
00X	WOOD JOIST
00Y	WOOD ON STEEL
00Z	WOOD TRUSS
B	BAR JOIST
C	CONCRETE
D	BAR JOIST & WOOD DECK
E	METAL PIPE
F	WOOD FRAME
G	BOWSTRING
J	BAR JOIST & CONCRETE DECK
L	FLEXIBLE/FLEXICORE
M	METAL
O	REINFORCED CONCRETE
P	LONGSPAN TRUSS
Q	PRESTRESS CONCRETE
R	BAR JOIST & RIGID FRAME
S	STEEL
T	TRUSS/JOIST
U	WOOD BEAM
W	WOOD
X	WOOD JOIST
Y	WOOD ON STEEL
Z	WOOD TRUSS

Roof Type Code

Roof Shape Type. Returned by the RoofTypeCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
9A0	IRREGULAR
9B0	LEAN TO
A	A-FRAME
B	BARN
C	CANOPY
D	DORMER
E	FRAME
F	FLAT
G	GABLE
H	GABLE/HIP
I	HIP
J	GEODESIC
K	MANSARD
L	BARREL
M	MONITOR
N	CONTEMPORARY
O	SHED
P	PITCHED
Q	PYRAMID
R	ARCHED
S	SAWTOOTH
T	CATHEDRAL/CLERESTORY
U	BUBBLE
V	GAMBREL
W	SWISS CHALET/ALPINE
X	COMPLEX/CUSTOM
Y	BUTTERFLY
Z	GAMBREL/MANSARD

Sewer Code

Sewer System Type. Returned by the SewerCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
SCE	CESSPOOL
SCO	COMMERCIAL
SPR	PRIVATE
SPU	PUBLIC
SSE	SEPTIC
STR	STORM

Stories Code

Type/Number of Stories.Returned by the StoriesCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
005	1/2
007	3/4
010	1
012	1 1/4
015	1 1/2
017	1 3/4
020	2
022	2 1/4
025	2 1/2
027	2 3/4
030	3
032	3 1/4
035	3 1/2
037	3 3/4
040	4
045	4 1/2
050	5
055	5 1/2
060	6
070	7
080	8
090	9
100	10
110	11
120	12
130	13
140	14
150	15
160	16
170	17
180	18
190	19
200	20
210	21
220	22
230	23
240	24
250	25
260	26
270	27
280	28
290	29
300	30
310	31
320	32
330	33
340	34
350	35
360	36
370	37
380	38
390	39
400	40
410	41
420	42
430	43
440	44
450	45
460	46
470	47
480	48
490	49
500	50
510	51
520	52
530	53
540	54
550	55
560	56
570	57
580	58
590	59
600	60
610	61
620	62
630	63
640	64
650	65
660	66
670	67
680	68
690	69
700	70
710	71
720	72
730	73
740	74
750	75
760	76
770	77
780	78
790	79
800	80
810	81
820	82
830	83
840	84
850	85
860	86
870	87
880	88
890	89
900	90
910	91
920	92
930	93
940	94
950	95
960	96
970	97
980	98
990	99
00A	100
00E	200
00I	300
00M	BI-LEVEL
00N	MULTI-LEVEL
00P	SPLIT 2 LEVEL
00Q	SPLIT 3 LEVEL
00R	SPLIT 4 LEVEL
00S	SPLIT 5 LEVEL
00T	SPLIT 6 LEVEL
00U	SPLIT FOYER
00V	SPLIT LEVEL
00W	TRI-LEVEL
03S	3 PLUS
50A	150
50E	250

Water Code

Water Service Type. Returned by the WaterCode element.

Code	Description
000	NONE
001	TYPE UNKNOWN
WCI	CISTERN
WCO	COMMERCIAL
WPR	PRIVATE
WPU	PUBLIC
WPW	PUBLIC WELL
WSC	SPRING/CREEK
WWE	WELL

GrpPrimaryOwner

TrustFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
Estate	The Owner is an estate
Name is a Trust	The Owner is a trust
Not a trust	The Owner is not a Trust
Unknown	A Determination Cannot be Made

CompanyFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
Y	The Owner is Determined to be a Company

Type

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
Individual	Owned by a person, couple, or some non-incorporated entity
Company	Deceased
Deceased	The owner is deceased
Unknown	Unable to determine the owner type
Government	Owned by a Federal, State or Local governmental agency or entity

VestingType

Code	Description
Np	Unknown/Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Brother And Sister
103	Company
104	Corporate Trust
105	Deceased
107	Divorced
109	Husband And Wife
111	Individual Man
113	Individual Woman
115	Married
117	Married Couple
118	Married Man
120	Married Woman
122	Personal Trust
123	Single
125	Single Man
127	Single Woman
129	Trustee
130	Trust
131	Unmarried Man
133	Unmarried
135	Unmarried Woman
137	Widow
139	Widower
141	Heirs
142	Single
143	Wife
144	Owner Has Dba Data
145	Wholly Exempt
146	Association
147	Trustee Corporation
148	Contract Purchase
149	Community Property
150	Estate
151	Executor
152	Guardian
153	Joint Tenant/joint Tenant W/ Right Of Survivorship
154	Joint Venture
155	Lifetime Benefit
156	Life Estate
157	Lease From
158	Limited Partnership
159	Living Trust
160	Non Declared Trust
161	Personal Representative
162	Partnership
163	Remainderman
164	Right Of Survivorship
165	Revocable Trust
166	Separate Estate/property
167	Sole Owner
168	Survivor
169	Tenants In Common
170	Trust
171	Tenant By Entirety
172	Undivided Interest
173	Name Derived From Affidavit
174	Also Known As (a/k/a)
175	Doing Business As (dba)
176	Defendant
177	Dower Clause
178	Formerly Known As (f/k/a)
179	Government
180	Individual(s)
181	Seller Is Owner On Current Assessment File
182	Life Tenant (holds A Life Estate Interest Only)
183	Minor, Ward Or Client (represented By Trustee)
184	Now Known As
185	Not Provided (name Blurred Or Missing From Document)
186	Non-vested Spouse
187	Plaintiff
188	Receiver
189	Revocable Living Trust
190	Surviving Joint Tenant
191	Successor Trustee (la County Only)
192	Separated
193	Trustor/debtor (borrower In Default/foreclosure On Trustee’s Deed)
194	Who Acquired Title As
195	Widow Or Widower
196	Agent Or Guardian
197	Alternate Beneficiary
198	Assignee (buyer/borrower Only)
199	Assignor (seller Only)
200	Beneficiary / Creditor - When the Doc Type is Bd, This Buyer Id Code Identifies The Person Designated To Acquire Title Upon Death Of Grantor.
201	Builder/developer
202	Last Will And Testament
203	Irrevocable Trust
204	Irrevocable Living Trust
205	Joint Tenants
206	Married Man As His Sole And Separate Property
207	Married Woman As Her Sole & Separate Property
208	Partnership
209	Transfer Of Death
210	Tenant
211	Trustee/conservator
212	Trust
213	Surviving Tenant By The Entirety
214	Surviving Spouse
215	Tax Payer
216	Domestic Partner
217	Community Property (Marital Community) With Rights Of Survivorship
218	Et Al (and Others) - Vendor Data Only
219	Et Ux (and Wife) - Vendor Data Only
220	Family Living Trust
221	Family Trust
222	Family Revocable Trust
223	Her Husband
224	Single Person Or Individual
225	His Wife
226	Et Vir (and Husband)
227	Contract Owner
228	Tenants in Severalty

GrpSecondaryOwner

Type

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
Individual	Owned by a person, couple or some non-incorporated entity
Company	Deceased
Deceased	The owner is deceased
Unknown	Unable to determine the owner type
Government	Owned by a Federal, State or Local governmental agency or entity

GrpOwnerAddress

FormatInfo

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
4	Non-US
A	Alias
F	Company
G	General Delivery
H	Highrise
P	PO Box
R	Rural Route
S	Standard US

PrivacyInfo

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Cannot Use for Marketing, Based on Legal Restriction

OwnerOccupied

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
1	Owner Occupied
y	Owner Occupied
0	Not Owner Occupied or Unknown

GrpTax

TaxExemptionHomeowner

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property is currently receiving a Homeowner’s Exemption on their property tax.

TaxExemptionDisabled

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property is currently receiving a Disabled Owner Exemption on their property tax.

TaxExemptionSenior

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property is currently receiving a Seinior Citizen’s Exemption on their property tax.

TaxExemptionVeteran

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property is currently receiving a Veteran’s Homeowner Exemption on their property tax.

TaxExemptionWidow

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property is currently receiving a Widowed Homeowner’s Exemption on their property tax.

TaxExemptionAdditional

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property is currently receiving a Homeowners Exemption on their property tax.

GrpPropertyUseInfo

PropertyUseStandardized

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Dairy Farm
102	Desert Or Barren Land
103	Farm, Crops
104	Feedlots
105	Farm (Irrigated Or Dry)
106	Horticulture, Ornamental (Agricultural)
107	Irrigation, Flood Control
108	Livestock, Animals
109	Miscellaneous Structures - Ranch, Farm Fixtures
110	Orchard (Fruit, Nut)
111	Orchards, Groves
112	Pasture
113	Poultry Farm (Chicken, Turkey, Fish, Bees, Rabbits)
114	Ranch
115	Reservoir, Water Supply
116	Rural Improved / Non-residential
117	Range Land (Grazing)
118	Agricultural/rural (General)
119	Truck Crops
120	Timberland, Forest, Trees
121	Vineyard
122	Well Site (Agricultural)
123	Wildlife (Refuge)
124	Convenience Store (7-11)
125	Appliance Store (Bix Box Appliance)
126	Auto Repair, Garage
127	Vehicle Sales, Vehicle Rentals (Auto/Truck/RV/Boat/etc)
128	Bakery
129	Bar, Tavern
130	Commercial Building, Mail Order, Show Room (Non-Auto), Warehouse
131	Bed & Breakfast
132	Casino
133	Cemetery, Funeral Home, Mortuary (Commercial)
134	Common Area (Commercial, Not Shopping Center)
135	Commercial (General)
136	Commercial Office (General)
137	Convenience Store (w/Fuel Pump)
138	Commercial Condominium (Not Offices)
139	Condominium Offices
140	Store/office (Mixed Use)
141	Department Store (Apparel, Household Goods, Furniture)
142	Dental Building
143	Department Store (Multi-Story)
144	Garden Center, Home Improvement (Do-It-Yourself)
145	Drug Store, Pharmacy
146	Drive-thru Restaurant, Fast Food
147	Dry Cleaner
148	Restaurant
149	Farm Supply & Equipment (Commercial)
150	Financial Building
151	Grocery, Supermarket
152	Hospital - Private
153	Hotel/motel
154	Hotel-resort
155	Hotel
156	Kennel
157	Laundromat (Self-Service)
158	Liquor Store
159	Mobile Commercial Units
160	Medical Building
161	Mixed Use (Commercial/Industrial)
162	Mobile Home Park, Trailer Park
163	Motel
164	Commercial Multi-parcel Miscellaneous
165	Miscellaneous
166	Nightclub (Cocktail Lounge)
167	Neighborhood: Shopping Center, Strip Center, Enterprise Zone
168	Nursery, Greenhouse, Florist (Retail, Wholesale)
169	Office Building
170	Office Building (Multi-Story)
171	Commercial Office/residential (Mixed Use)
172	Parking Garage, Parking Structure
173	Printer - Retail
174	Parking Lot
175	Day Care, Pre-school (Commercial)
176	Professional Building (Multi-Story)
177	Professional Building (Legal, Insurance, Real Estate, Business)
178	Retail Stores (Personal Services, Photography, Travel)
179	Regional: Shopping Center, Mall (w/Anchor)
180	Gas Station
181	Single Family Residential
182	Shopping Center Common Area (Parking Etc)
183	Community: Shopping Center, Mini-mall
184	Skyscraper/high-rise (Commercial Offices)
185	Service Station w/Convenience Store (Food Mart)
186	Service Station (Full Service)
187	Stores & Apartments
188	Store, Retail Outlet
189	Take-out Restaurant (Food Preparation)
190	Truck Stop (Fuel And Diner)
191	Service Shop (TV, Radio, Electric, Plumbing)
192	Veterinary, Animal Hospital
193	Car Wash
194	Wholesale Outlet, Discount Store (Franchise)
195	Assembly (Light Industrial)
196	Bulk Storage, Tanks (Gasoline, Fuel, Etc)
197	Cannery
198	Construction/contracting Services (Industrial)
199	Chemical
200	Common Area (Industrial)
201	Condominiums (Industrial)
202	Cold Storage
203	Distillery, Brewery, Bottling
204	Dump Site
205	Factory (Apparel, Textile, Leather, Medium Mfg)
206	Food Processing
207	Foundry, Industrial Plant (Metal, Rubber, Plastic)
208	Food Packing, Packing Plant (Fruit, Vegetable, Meat, Dairy)
209	Grain Elevator
210	Heavy Industrial (General)
211	Heavy Manufacturing
212	Industrial (General)
213	Industrial Park
214	Labor Camps (Industrial)
215	Light Industrial (10% Improved Office Space; Machine Shop)
216	Industrial Loft Building, Loft Building
217	Lumberyard, Building Materials
218	Lumber & Wood Product Mfg (Including Furniture)
219	Marine Facility/board Repairs (Small Craft, Sailboat)
220	Manufacturing (Light)
221	Mill (Feed, Grain, Paper, Lumber, Textile, Pulp
222	Mining, Mineral, Quarries
223	Miscellaneous
224	Multi-tenant Industrial Building
225	Paper Product Mfg & Related Products
226	Refinery, Petroleum Products
227	Printing & Publishing (Light Industrial)
228	Processing Plant (Minerals, Cement, Rock, Gravel, Glass, Clay)
229	Mini-warehouse, Storage
230	Quarries (Sand, Gravel, Rock)
231	R&d Facility, Laboratory, Research Facility, Cosmetics, Pharmaceutical
232	Recycling (Metal, Paper, Glass)
233	Shipyard - Built Or Repaired (Seagoing Vessels)
234	Slaughter House, Stockyard
235	Storage Yard (Junk, Auto Wrecking, Salvage)
236	Storage Yard, Open Storage (Light Equipment, Material)
237	Sugar Refinery
238	Warehouse, Storage
239	Winery
240	Waste Disposal, Sewage (Processing, Disposal, Storage, Treatment)
241	Common Area (Misc)
242	Easement (Misc)
243	Homestead (Misc)
244	Leasehold Rights (Misc)
245	Petroleum & Gas Wells (Misc)
246	Pipeline Or Right-of-way
247	Possessory Interest (Misc)
248	Rail (Right-Of-Way & Track)
249	Road (Right-Of-Way)
250	Royalty Interest
251	Right-of-way (Not Rail, Road Or Utility)
252	Sub-surface Rights (Mineral)
253	Surface Rights (Grazing, Timber, Coal, Etc.)
254	Unknown
255	Utilities (Right-Of-Way Only)
256	Water Rights (Misc)
257	Working Interest
258	Airport & Related
259	Arcades (Amusement)
260	Arena, Convention Center
261	Auditorium
262	Outdoor Recreation: Beach, Mountain, Desert
263	Pool Hall, Billiard Parlor
264	Bowling Alley
265	Bus Terminal
266	Commercial Auto Transportation/storage
267	Country Club
268	Centrally Assessed
269	Charitable Organization, Fraternal
270	Clubs, Lodges, Professional Associations
271	Community Center (Exempt)
272	Communications
273	Campground, Rv Park
274	College, University, Vocational School - Private
275	Crematorium, Mortuary (Exempt)
276	Cable Tv Station
277	City, Municipal, Town, Village Owned (Exempt)
278	County Owned (Exempt)
279	Dance Hall
280	Distribution Warehouse (Regional)
281	Drive-in Theater
282	Cemetery (Exempt)
283	Emergency (Police, Fire, Rescue, Shelters, Animal Shelter)
284	Exempt (Full Or Partial)
285	Fairgrounds
286	Federal Property (Exempt)
287	Fish Camps, Game Club Target Shooting
288	Forest (Park, Reserve, Recreation, Conservation)
289	Freeways, State Hwys
290	Driving Range (Golf)
291	Transportation (General)
292	Go-carts, Miniature Gold, Water Slides
293	Golf Course
294	Governmental / Public Use (General)
295	Govt. Administrative Office (Federal, State, Local, Court House)
296	Gym, Health Spa
297	Historical District
298	Cultural, Historical (Monuments, Homes, Museums, Other)
299	Historical Transient Lodging (Hotel, Motel)
300	Harbor & Marine Transportation
301	Historical Office
302	Hospital - Public
303	Historical Park, Site, Misc.
304	Historical - Private (General)
305	Historical Recreation, Entertainment
306	Historical Residence
307	Historical Retail
308	Historical Warehouse
309	Indian Lands
310	Institutional (General)
311	Marina, Boat Slips, Yacht Club, Boat Landing
312	Medical Clinic
313	Microwave
314	Military (Office, Base, Post, Port, Reserve, Weapon Range, Test Sites)
315	Miscellaneous (General)
316	Museum, Library, Art Gallery (Recreational)
317	Natural Resources
318	Recreational Non-taxable (Camps, Boy Scouts)
319	Correctional Facility, Jails, Prisons, Insane Asylum
320	Children’s Home, Orphanage
321	Public Health Care Facility (Exempt)
322	Park, Playground, Picnic Area
323	Piers, Wharf (Recreation)
324	Pollution Control
325	Post Office
326	Public Swimming Pool
327	Amusement Park, Tourist Attraction
328	Parochial School, Private School
329	Public Utility (Electric, Water, Gas, Etc.)
330	Railroad & Related
331	Racquet Court, Tennis Court
332	Recreational Center
333	Regulating Districts & Assessments; Tax Abatement
334	Recreational/entertainment (General)
335	Redevelopment Agency Or Zone
336	Religious, Church, Worship (Synagogue, Temple, Parsonage)
337	Riding Stable, Trails
338	Roads, Streets, Bridges
339	Homes (Retired, Handicap, Rest, Convalescent, Nursing)
340	Radio Or Tv Station
341	Sbe - Special Assessments
342	Public School (Administration, Campus, Dorms, Instruction)
343	Skating Rink, Ice Skating, Roller Skating
344	State Owned (Exempt)
345	Special Purpose
346	Stadium
347	Telegraph, Telephone
348	Theater (Movie)
349	Transportation (Air, Rail, Bus)
350	Race Track (Auto, Dog, Horse)
351	Truck Terminal (Motor Freight)
352	Colleges, University - Public
353	Private Utility (Electric, Water, Gas, Etc.)
354	Welfare, Social Service, Low Income Housing (Exempt)
355	Zoo
356	Other Exempt Property
357	Garden Apt, Court Apt (5+ Units)
358	High-rise Apartments
359	Apartment House (100+ Units)
360	Apartments (generic)
361	Apartment House (5+ Units)
362	Boarding/rooming House, Apt Hotel
363	Bungalow (Residential)
364	Cluster Home
365	Common Area (Residential)
366	Condominium
367	Cooperative
368	Dormitory, Group Quarters (Residential)
369	Duplex (2 Units, Any Combination)
370	Fraternity House, Sorority House
371	Manufactured, Modular, Pre-fabricated Homes
372	Multi-family Dwellings (Generic, Any Combination)
373	Mobile Home
374	Residential Multi-parcel Miscellaneous
375	Miscellaneous (Residential)
376	Patio Home
377	Planned Unit Development (PUD)
378	Quadplex (4 Units, Any Combination)
379	Condominium Development (Association Assessment)
380	Residential (General/Single)
381	Residential Income (General/Multi-Family)
382	Row House
383	Rural Residence
384	Seasonal, Cabin, Vacation Residence
385	Single Family Residence
386	Townhouse
387	Timeshare
388	Triplex (3 Units, Any Combination)
389	Vacant Land
390	Zero Lot Line (Residential)
391	Abandoned Site, Contaminated Site
392	Agricultural (Unimproved) - Vacant Land
393	Vacant Commercial
394	Government - Vacant Land
395	Industrial - Vacant Land
396	Institutional - Vacant Land
397	Miscellaneous
398	Multi-family - Vacant Land
399	Private Preserve, Open Space - Vacant Land
400	Recreational - Vacant Land
401	Residential - Vacant Land
402	Under Construction
403	Unusable Land (Remnant, Steep, Etc.)
404	Waste Land, Marsh, Swamp, Submerged - Vacant Land
405	Water Area (Lakes, River, Shore) - Vacant Land
406	Water Area (Lakes, River, Shore) - Vacant Land
407	Miscellaneous Structures - Ranch, Farm Fixtures
408	NULL
410	Light Industrial (10% Improved Office space; Machine Shop)
411	Miscellaneous (Residential)
412	Condominium
413	Warehouse, Storage
414	MISCELLANEOUS
415	Transportation (air, rail, bus)
416	MISCELLANEOUS
417	Store, Retail Outlet
418	Condominium
419	Condominium Project
420	Mid Rise Condo
421	High Rise Condo
422	Residence Hall/Dormitories
423	Hotel
424	Multi Family 10 Units Plus
425	Multi Family 10 Units Less
426	Mixed Complex
427	Mobile Home
428	Manufactured Home
429	Motel
430	PUD
431	Group Quarters
432	Orphanage
433	Rural Home Site
434	Single Family Residence
435	Transient Lodging
436	Time Share Condo
437	Commercial (NEC)
438	Multiple Uses
439	Auto Repair
440	Salvage Imprv
441	Auto Wrecking
442	Business Park
443	Carwash
444	Commercial Building
445	Convalescent Hospital
446	Convention Center
447	Facilities
448	Financial Building
449	Funeral Home
450	Hospital
451	Animal Hospital/Vet
452	Loft Building
453	Medical Condo
454	Nightclub
455	Bar
456	Office & Residential
457	Office & Showroom
458	Office Condo
459	Converted Residence
460	Pre-Fabricated Bldg
461	Misc Building
462	Parking Lot
463	Parking Structure
464	Restaurant Building
465	Restaurant Drive In
466	Service Station
467	Service Station/market
468	Misc Commercial Services
469	Strip Commercial Center
470	Apparel
471	Store Building
472	Stores & Offices
473	Stores & Residential
474	Retail Trade
475	Supermarket
476	Food Stores
477	Tavern
478	Wholesale
479	Leased Land/Bldg
480	Commercial/Industrial
481	Bulk Plant
482	Cannery
483	Chemical
484	Textile/Clothes/Carpet Indust
485	Paper & Allied Industry
486	Non-durable Goods
487	Food Processing
488	Grain Elevator
489	Heavy Industrial
490	Industrial Condominium
491	Industrial Park
492	Industrial Plant
493	Light Industrial
494	Lumber Mill
495	Metal Product
496	Mineral Rights
497	Mini Warehouse
498	Multi-Tenant Industrial
499	Packing
500	Mine/Quarry
501	R&D Facility
502	Technological Industry
503	Shipyard
504	Storage Tanks
505	Warehouse
506	Winery
507	Marshland
508	Barren Land
509	Commercial Lot
510	Common Land
511	Desert
512	Industrial Lot
513	Mountainous Land
514	Natural Resources
515	Multi Family Acreage
516	Multi Family Lot
517	Open Space
518	Vacant Mobile Home
519	Recreational Acreage
520	Residential Acreage
521	Residential Lot
522	Waste Land
523	Vacant Lmtd/no Dev Potential
524	Wildlife Refuge
525	Wildlife Refuge li
526	Livestock
527	Nursery/horticulture
528	Agricultural Plant
529	Ranch
530	Animal Farm
531	Citrus Grove
532	Fallow Land
533	Field & Seed
534	Fisheries
535	Greenbelt
536	Orchard
537	Truck Crops
538	Vineyard
539	Tax Exempt
540	State Property
541	County Property
542	Municipal Property
543	Police/Fire/Civil Defense
544	Us Postal Service
545	Embassies/Chanceries
546	Correctional Facility
547	Community Center
548	Historical District
549	Federal Property
550	Federal Building
551	Native American Property
552	Art
553	Military Building
554	Possessory Interest
555	Enterprise Zone
556	School
557	Nursery School
558	High School
559	Private School
560	Vocational/trade School
561	Educational Service
562	Sec Educational School
563	Public School
564	Public Service
565	Charitable Organization
566	University
567	Nature Facility
568	Zoo
569	Amusement Arcade
570	Amusement Park
571	Auditorium
572	Billiard Hall
573	Club
574	Country Club
575	Health Club
576	Dance Hall
577	Golf Range
578	Gymnasium
579	Lake/River/Beach
580	Park
581	Race Track
582	Racquet Court
583	Tennis Club
584	Rv Park
585	Skating Rink
586	Stadium
587	Stable
588	Swimming Pool
589	Drive In Theater
590	Theater
591	Tourist Attraction/Exhibits
592	Library/Museum
593	Theater
594	Aircraft Facility
595	Airport
596	Gas Production
597	Marine Facility
598	Port/Harbor
599	Railroad Facility
600	Recording Studio
601	Radio Facility
602	Telephone Facility
603	TV Facility
604	Transport Facility
605	Truck Terminal
606	Utilities
607	Waste Disposal
608	Well/Water
609	Well/Gas/Oil
610	Well/Gas/Oil Ii
611	Miscellaneous
612	Real Property (NEC)
613	None
614	Type Unknown
615	Condotel

GrpPropertySize

AreaBuildingDefinitionCode

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
10	Living Area
11	Heated Area
12	Adjusted Area
13	Gross Area
14	Effective Area
15	Building Perimeter
16	Total Area
17	Base Area
18	Garage
19	Attic
20	Finished Area

ParkingGarage

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	No Garage
1	Not Stated
11	Garage, Attached
12	Garage, Detached
13	Garage, Unfinished
14	Garage, Finished
15	Garage, Enclosed
16	Garage, Open
17	Detached (Unspecified)
18	Attached (Unspecified)
19	Detached, Finished
20	Detached, Unfinished
21	Attached, Finished
22	Attached, Unfinished
23	Detached, 1-Car
24	Detached, 2-Car
25	Detached, 3+ Car
26	Attached, 1-Car
27	Attached, 2-Car
28	Attached, 3+ Car
30	Carport (Unspecified)
31	Carport, Attached
32	Carport, Detached
33	Carport, Enclosed
34	Carport, Open
35	Carport, 1-Car
36	Carport, 2-Car
37	Carport, 3+ Car
38	Carport, Finished
39	Carport, Unfinished
4	Pole Building Garage
40	Garage, Basement
41	Garage, Basement, 1-Car
42	Garage, Basement, 2-Car
43	Garage, Basement, 3+ Car
44	Garage, Basement, Finished
45	Garage, Basement, Finished, 1-Car
46	Garage, Basement, Finished, 2-Car
47	Garage, Basement, Finished, 3+ Car
48	Garage, Basement, Unfinished
49	Garage, Basement, Unfinished, 1-Car
50	Garage, Basement, Unfinished, 2-Car
51	Garage, Basement, Unfinished, 3+ Car
52	Garage, Tuckunder
53	Garage, Built-in
54	Garage, Built-in, 1-Car
55	Garage, Built-in, 2-Car
57	Garage, Built-in, Unfinished
58	Garage, Built-in, Finished
59	Garage, 1-Car
60	Garage, 2-Car
61	Garage, 3+ Car
62	Garage, Unfinished, 1-Car
63	Garage, Unfinished, 2-Car
64	Garage, Unfinished, 3+ Car
65	Carport, Detached, Finished
67	Carport, Detached, Unfinished
999	Type Not Specified

ParkingCarport

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
C 0	The first letter details a garage (G) or carport (C). The second letter details information about the garage or carport, the third letter details the number of spaces. This value is carport with undetermined spaces
C 1	Carport with One Space
C 2	Carport with Two Spaces
CA0	Attached Carport with Undetermined Spaces
CA1	Attached Carport with One Space
CD0	Detached Carport with Undetermined Spaces
CD1	Detached Carport with One Space
G 1	Garage with One Space
G 2	Garage with Two Spaces
G 3	Garage with Three Spaces
G 5	Garage with Five Spaces
G 6	Garage with Six Spaces
G 7	Garage with Seven Spaces
G 8	Garage with Eight Spaces
G 9	Garage with Nine Spaces
GA0	Attached Garage with Undetermined Spaces
GA2	Attached Garage with Two Spaces
GA3	Attached Garage with Three Spaces
GA4	Attached Garage with Four Spaces
GA6	Attached Garage with Six Spaces
GA7	Attached Garage with Seven Spaces
GA8	Attached Garage with Eight Spaces
GA9	Attached Garage with Nine Spaces
GB1	Basement Garage with One Space
GB2	Basement Garage with Two Spaces
GB3	Basement Garage with Three Spaces
GB4	Basement Garage with Four Spaces
GD0	Detached Garage with Undetermined Spaces
GD1	Detached Garage with One Space
GD2	Detached Garage with Two Spaces
GD4	Detached Garage with Four Spaces
GD5	Detached Garage with Five Spaces
GD6	Detached Garage with Six Spaces
GD7	Detached Garage with Seven Spaces
GD8	Detached Garage with Eight Spaces
GD9	Detached Garage with Nine Spaces

GrpUtilities

HVACCoolingDetail

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Refrigerator
102	Evaporative
103	Central
104	Solar
105	Refrigerator/evaporative
106	Wall Unit
107	Refrigeration Wall Unit
108	Evaporative Wall Unit
109	None
110	Window A/C
111	Window Evaporative
112	Commercial AC
113	Central AC
114	Chilled Water AC
115	Central Partial AC
116	Central AC & Unit
117	Dual Unit AC
118	Evaporative AC
119	Fan Cooling AC
120	Heat Pump AC
121	Office Only AC
122	Refrigeration AC
123	Package AC
124	Package Roof AC
125	Partial AC
126	Refrigeration/Evaporation AC
127	Separate System AC
128	Solar AC
129	Split System AC
130	Wall Unit AC
131	Window Unit AC
132	Wall/Window Unit AC
133	No AC
134	Bypass
135	Type Unknown
136	Evaporative Cooler
137	Other
138	Partial
139	Chilled Water
140	Yes

HVACHeatingDetail

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Other
102	Forced Air
103	Baseboard
104	Gravity
105	Heat Pump
106	Solar
107	Ceiling Cable
108	Central
109	Floor/Wall Furnace
110	Steam
111	Hot Water
112	Radiant
113	Electric
114	Fireplace
115	Ceiling Furnace
116	Stove
117	Forced Air With Air Conditioning
118	Floor Furnace
119	Wall Gas
120	Space
121	Package
122	Furnace
123	Warm Air
124	Forced Air Coal
125	Forced Air Electric
126	Forced Air Gas
127	Forced Hot Water
128	Forced Air Oil
129	Forced Air Wood
130	Forced Air Coal/Wood
131	Forced Air Not Ducted
132	Baseboard Electric
133	Baseboard Gas
134	Baseboard Oil
135	Baseboard Coal/Wood
136	Baseboard Hot Water
137	Baseboard Electric/Radiant
138	Baseboard Hot Water/Steam
139	Baseboard Electric/Hot Water
140	Gravity Furnace Gas
141	Gravity Furnace
142	Gravity Not Ducted
143	Gravity Coal
144	Gravity Electric
145	Gravity Gas
146	Gravity Oil
147	Gravity Solar
148	Heat Pump Electric
149	Heat Pump Gas
150	Heat Pump Hot Water
151	Heat Pump Coal/Wood
152	Heat Pump Oil
153	Heat Pump Solar
154	Hot Air Solar
155	Electric/Solar
156	Solar/Coal/Wood
157	Solar/Oil
158	Gas Solar
159	Central Forced Air Oil
160	Central Forced Air
161	Central Electric
162	Central Gas
163	Central
164	Central Partial
165	Wall Furnace Coal/Wood
166	Wall Furnace Oil
167	Wall Furnace
168	Wall Heat Pump
169	Wall
170	Wall Unit
171	Hot Air Oil
172	Hot Air
173	Hot Air Not Ducted
174	Steam Electric
175	Steam Gas
176	Steam Hot Water
177	Steam Oil
178	Steam Wood
179	Gas Steam
180	Hot Water Steam
181	Hot Water/Electric
182	Hot Water Gas
183	Hot Water Coal/Wood
184	Hot Water Oil
185	Hot Water Solar
186	Hot Water Wood
187	Electric/Hot Water
188	Radiant Ceiling
189	Radiant Electric
190	Radiant Gas
191	Radiant Hot Water
192	Radiant Electric/Oil
193	Radiant Wood
194	Radiant Hot Water Oil
195	Radiator
196	Radiant Steam
197	Electric/Radiant
198	Convection Electric
199	Furnace Electric
200	Hot Air Electric
201	Package Electric
202	Unit Electric
203	Wall Electric
204	Electric/Oil
205	Furnace/Stove
206	Stove/Space
207	Stove Gas
208	Wood Stove
209	Floor Furnace Electric
210	Floor Furnace Gas
211	Floor Furnace Coal/Wood
212	Floor Furnace Oil
213	Space Gas
214	Space Coal/Wood
215	Space Oil
216	Furnace Coal
217	Furnace Gas
218	Wood Furnace
219	None
220	Convection Gas
221	Convection Oil
222	Convection
223	Industrial
224	Jets
225	Not Ducted
226	Partial
227	Unit Gas
228	Unit
229	Coal
230	Gas/Wood
231	Gas
232	Oil
233	Coal/Wood
234	Wood
235	Oil/Wood
236	Yes
238	Central
239	Forced Air
243	NULL

HVACHeatingFuel

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	None
10	Butane
20	Bypass
30	Coal
33	Oil/Solar
40	Coal/Wood
50	Coal/Wood/Oil
60	Convection
70	Electric
80	Electric
90	Gas
100	Gas Public/Piped
110	Gas/Solar
120	Geo-Thermal
130	Heat Pump
140	Heat - Coal
150	Heat - Coal/Wood
160	Heat - Electric/Hot Water
170	Heat - Electric/Oil
180	Heat - Electric/Radiant
190	Heat - Gas
200	Heat - Gas Solar
210	Heat - Gas Steam
220	Heat - Gas/Wood
230	Heat - Oil
240	Heat - Oil/Wood
250	Heat - Solar
260	Heat - Solar/Coal/Wood
270	Heat - Solar/Oil
280	Heat - Wood
290	Kerosene
300	Liquefied Petroleum Gas
310	No Gas Public/Piped
320	Oil
340	Other
350	Propane
360	Solar
370	Solid
380	Type Unknown
390	Unknown
400	Wood

SewageUsage

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	None
102	Type Unknown
103	Bypass
104	Cesspool
105	Commercial
106	Private
107	Public
108	Septic
109	Storm
110	Developed
111	Sanitary
112	Public/Septic
113	Municipal

WaterSource

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	None
102	Type Unknown
103	Bypass
104	Cistern
105	Commercial
106	Private
107	Public
108	Public Well
109	Spring/Creek
110	Well

MobileHomeHookupFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Property has a utility hookup (electtric and/or water) for a mobilere home or RV

GrpIntStructInfo

Foundation

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Not Stated
1	No Foundation
100	Mat/Raft Foundation (Slab)
101	Concrete Beam & Slab
200	FOOTING
201	Footing - Continuous/Strip
202	Footing - Spread
300	Pile
301	Pile - Concrete
302	Pile - Wood/Timber
303	Pile - Friction
304	Pile - End Bearing
400	Pier/Post & Beam
401	Pier/Post - Wood
402	Pier/Post - Concrete
501	Raised (Unspecified)
510	Stem Wall/Crawlspace
920	Wood (Unspecified)
921	Stone (Unspecified)
922	Masonry (Unspecified)
923	Block (Unspecified)
924	Brick (Unspecified)
930	Retaining Wall
999	Type Not Specified

Construction

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	None Stated
1	Type Not Specified
10	Wood (Unspecified)
11	Wood (Unspecified) & Stucco
12	Wood & Steel (Unspecified)
13	Wood & Brick (Unspecified)
14	Wood & Stone (Unspecified)
15	Wood Frame
16	Wood Frame & Concrete Block
17	Wood Frame & Metal
19	Metal Frame
19	Metal Frame (Unspecified)
2	Frame (Unspecified)
20	Steel Frame
21	Steel Frame & Stucco
22	Aluminum Frame
23	Concrete
24	Steel & Concrete
25	Masonry/Concrete Masonry Units (CMUs)
26	Cinder Blocks
28	Concrete Blocks
29	Blocks (CMUs) & Metal
3	Frame (Unspecified) & Steel
30	Blocks (CMUs) & Steel
31	Brick
32	Brick & Block
33	Brick & Steel
34	Brick & Metal
35	Brick & Stucco
36	Brick & Stone
37	Brick & Concrete
38	Stone
4	Frame (Unspecified) & Masonry
41	Adobe
42	Log
43	Manufactured (Unspecified)
44	Metal, Prefabricated
45	Tilt-Up
46	Tilt-Up Concrete
47	Tilt-Up Brick & Metal
48	Tilt-Up Masonry
49	Flexicore/Flexible
5	Frame (Unspecified) & Stucco
50	Arched/Dome
50	Arched/Dome (Unspecified Type)
51	A-Frame
6	Frame (Unspecified) & Brick
7	Light Frame (Unspecified)
8	Heavy Frame (Unspecified)
9	Pole Frame
99	Mixed (Unspecified)
999	No Construction Present

InteriorStructure

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	No Interior Walls
101	Finished/Painted
102	Custom/Decorative
103	Combination
104	Composition
110	Paneling (Unspecified)
180	Firewall
190	Unfinished
199	Other
201	Wallboard/Drywall
202	Drywall & Plaster
203	Wood & Drywall
210	Cement Board
301	Wood (Unspecified)
302	Wood, Cedar
303	Wood, Hardwood
304	Wood, Pine
305	Wood, Redwood
310	Wood Paneling
320	Plywood
321	Plywood Paneling
330	Fiber/Woodboard
350	Log
360	Wood Shingle
401	Masonry (Unspecified)
402	Block (Unspecified)
410	Brick
411	Brick & Block
412	Brick & Stone
420	Stone
421	Stone, Marble
430	Concrete
431	Concrete Tilt-Up
432	Concrete Block
501	Tile
590	Acoustic Tile/Panels
601	Metal
602	Tin
603	Copper
610	Enameled Metal
701	Plaster
702	Plaster & Masonry
703	Plaster & Paneling
710	Stucco
720	Terrazzo
730	Wallpaper
740	Formica
750	Glass
760	Vinyl Panel/Coating
770	Adobe
790	Fiberglass
999	Type Unspecified

ConstructionFireResistanceClass

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Buildings having fireproofed structural steel frames carrying all wall, floor and roof loads. Wall, floor and roof structures are built of non-combustible materials.
102	Buildings having fireproofed reinforced concrete frames carrying all wall, floor and roof loads which are all non-combustible.
103	Buildings having exterior walls built of a non-combustible material such as brick, concrete, block or poured concrete. Interior partitions and roof structure are built of combustible materials. Floor may be concrete or wood frame.
104	Buildings having wood or wood and steel frames.
105	Specialized buildings that do not fit in any of the above categories.

SafetyFireSprinklersFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	The property is equipped with a fire-suppression sprinkler system

FlooringMaterialPrimary

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Not Stated
1	Type Unspecified
13	Wood (Unspecified)
14	Hardwood
15	Softwood
16	Parquet
17	Plywood
18	Wood Decking
19	Wood, Pine
2	Carpet
20	Wood, Oak
21	Wood, Maple
22	Wood, Fir
23	Wood, Teak
24	Cork
25	Cork Tile
28	Slate
29	Marble
3	Vinyl/Resilient
30	Granite
31	Stone, Other
32	Ceramic Tile
33	Ceramic Tile, Glazed
34	Mosaic Tile
35	Clay/Quarry Tile
36	Terrazzo
37	Concrete/Cement
38	Concrete Slab
39	Concrete, Precast
4	Vinyl Tile (VCT)
40	Tile (Unspecified)
41	Cinder Block
42	Brick
43	Asphalt
44	Gravel
45	Asbestos (Tiles, Sheet)
46	Rubber
47	Earth/Dirt
48	Acrylic/Epoxy
49	Carpet, Tile & Wood
50	Carpet & Wood
51	Wood & Tile
52	Carpet & Tile
54	Vinyl & Wood
59	Asbestos & Other
6	Vinyl Sheet/Linoleum
60	Combination, Other
8	Laminate Plank

GrpIntRoomInfo

BonusRoomFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Bonus Room

BreakfastNookFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Breakfast Nook

CellarFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Cellar

CellarWineFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Wine Cellar

ExerciseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Exercise Room

FamilyCode

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Family Room

GameFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Game Room

GreatFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Geat Room

HobbyFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Hobby Room

LaundryFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Laundry Room

MediaFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Media Room

MudFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Mud Room

OfficeFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Office

SafeRoomFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Safe Room

SittingFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Sitting Room

StormFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Storm Shelter

StudyFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Study

SunroomFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Sun Room

UtilityFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Utility Room

GrpIntAmenities

Fireplace

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Yes
2	Single
3	Backed
4	Stacked
5	Custom
6	Glass Log
7	Prefab
8	Flue Only
9	See Thru
10	Wood Stove
11	Electric
12	Raised Hearth
13	Masonry
14	Heatltr/Circle
15	Ceiling HI Brick
16	1 Story Brick
17	2 Story Brick
18	2 Story
19	Double
20	Type Unknown
21	Brick Chimney
22	Coal/Wood
23	Gas/Log
24	Steel
25	Masonry
26	Masonry 1 Opening
27	Cinder/Concrete Block Chimne
28	2 Openings Prefab
29	Stone
30	Metal
31	1 Metal Opening
32	Type Unknown
33	1 Opening
34	2 Openings
35	3 Openings
36	4 Openings
37	5 Openings
38	6 Openings
39	7 Openings
40	8 Openings
41	9 Openings
42	10 Openings
43	11 Openings
44	12 Openings
45	Masonry 2 Openings
46	Stone, Brick, Marble
47	1 Story Frame
48	1 Story Stucco
49	1 Story Prefab
50	1 Story Stone
51	1 Story
52	1 Story 1 Opening
53	1 Story 2 Openings
54	1 Story Extra Opening
55	2 Story Frame
56	2 Story Stucco
57	2 Story Prefab
58	2 Story Stone
59	2 Story 1 Opening
60	2 Story 2 Openings
61	2 Story 3 Openings
62	2 Story 4 Openings
63	2 Story Extra Opening
64	3 Story Brick
65	3 Story Frame
66	3 Story Prefab
67	3 Story 1 Openings
68	3 Story 2 Openings
69	3 Story 3 Openings
70	3 Story Extra Opening
71	Bypass
72	1.5 Story Brick
73	1.5 Story Stucco
74	1.5 Story Prefab
75	1.5 Story Stone
76	1.5 Story

AccessabilityElevatorFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Elevator

AccessabilityHandicapFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of Hanjdicapped Accessability Features Such As Ramps, Wide Doorways, etc.

EscalatorFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
1	Indicates the Presense of an Escalator

CentralVacuumFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Central Vaccuum System

IntercomFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Central Intercom System

SoundSystemFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Installed Sound System

WetBarFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Wet Bar

SecurityAlarmFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Security Alarm

GrpExtStructInfo

StructureStyle

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Conventional
2	Modern
4	Spanish
5	English
6	French
7	Colonial
8	Contemporary
10	A-Frame
11	Ranch
12	Other
13	Bungalow
14	Cape Cod
16	Split Entry
17	Split Level
18	Victorian
19	Mobile Home
27	Rambler
30	Dome
31	Duplex Single
33	Triplex
34	Quadraplex
36	Townhouse
37	Mansion
38	Cabin
45	Cottage
50	Traditional
51	Garrison
52	Tudor
53	Row End or Row Middle
56	Old Style
57	Gambrel
59	Antique
60	European
66	Low Rise
67	Mid Rise
68	High Rise
69	Condo/Apartment
76	Two Family
77	Federalist
78	Cottage House
82	Modular
83	Salt Box
85	Chalet
86	Custom Design
87	Farm House
88	Garage Apartment
89	TLog Home
90	Mediterranean

Exterior1Code

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0A	Unknown
10A	Asbestos
11A	Plywood
12C	Brick Veneer
13A	Stone Veneer
14A	Shake
15I	Logs
16A	Protective (Treatment)
17A	Vinyl
18V	Shingles
19A	Marblecrete
1L	Stucco
20H	Glass
21A	None
22A	Channel
23A	Tong & Groove
24E	Composition
25A	Rustic
26A	Bat & Board
27A	Masonite
28A	Ribbed
29A	Other (Not Classified)
2R	Siding
30A	Ribbed Aluminum
31A	Aluminum Lap
32A	Frame Brick
33A	8 Inch Paint
34K	Stone
35T	Adobe
36A	Steel Panel
37A	Pre-cast
38A	Strut Frame
39A	Comb
3B	Brick
40A	Curtain
41A	Wood/Steel Stud
42A	Single Wall
43A	Farm Single
44A	Buttressed
45A	Aspht Shingle
46A	Hardwood Siding
47P	Wood Shingle
48D	Block
49A	2x2 Frame
4Y	Brick/Stone (Brick And/Or Stone)
50A	2x3 Frame
51A	2x4 Frame
52A	2x6 Frame
53A	Modular
54A	Pole
55A	Baked Enamel
56A	Cedar
57A	Paper
58A	Cinder Block
59A	Diagonal
5G	Concrete Block
60A	Horizontal
61A	Vertical
62A	Drop
63A	Log 1/2 Round
64A	Lap
65A	Panel
66A	T111
67A	Frame/Stucco
68A	Masonry/Stucco
69A	Aluminum Siding
6A	Slump Block
70A	Board & Batten
71A	Frame Siding
72A	Frame/Shingle Siding
73A	Wood Frame/Siding
74A	Brick/Wood
75A	Brick Frame/Stone
76A	Frame/Masonry
77A	Frame/Stone
78A	Stone/Wood Frame
79A	Block/Masonry
7Q	Wood
80A	Concrete Block/Stucco
81F	Concrete
82A	Concrete/Cinder Block
83N	Precast Concrete Panel
84A	Frame/Wood
85A	Prefab Wood
86A	Wood Frame
87A	Frame/Aluminum
88A	Metal Siding
89A	Asbestos Frame
8A	Bevel (Finishing Style)
90A	Frame/Masonry/Veneer
91A	Aluminum/Vinyl
92A	Frame/Vinyl
93A	Tbd
94M	Tile
95O	Other
96S	Siding (Aluminum/Vinyl)
97W	Marble
98X	Combination
9J	Metal

RoofMaterial

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Unknown Or Not Provided
102	Wood Shingle
103	Shake
104	Tile
105	Composition Shingle
106	Roll Composition (Rolled Mineral Roof)
107	Gravel
108	Builtup (Layered Asphalt)
109	Asphalt
110	Slate
111	Aluminum
112	Metal
113	Enamel
114	Other (Not Classified)
115	Asbestos
116	Roll Paper (Rolled Smooth Roof)
117	Bi Metal (Two-Ply)
118	Heavy Composition Shingle
119	Light Composition Shingle
120	Average Composition Shingle
121	Fiberglass
122	Galvanized
123	Medium Shake
124	Bar Tile (Spanish Style)
125	Clay Tile
126	Synthetic Tile
127	Wood Shake/Shingle
128	Concrete Tile
129	Rubber/Elastometric
130	Slate Tile
131	Wood
132	Hardwood
133	Wood On Steel
134	Wood
135	Flat Wood Shake/Shingle
136	Gable Wood Shake/Shingle
137	Hip Wood Shake
138	Hip Wood Shake/Shingle
139	Gambrel Wood Shake/Shingle
140	Wood Shake
141	Cedar Shake
142	Wood Shake/Shingle - Wood Joist
143	Flat Tile
144	Gable Tile
145	Hip Tile
146	Mansard Tile
147	Shed Tile
148	Gambrel Tile
149	Cement Tile
150	Ceramic/Glazed Tile
151	Glazed Tile
152	A-Frame Composition Shingle
153	Flat Composition Shingle
154	Gable Composition Shingle
155	Hip Composition Shingle
156	Mansard Composition Shingle
157	Composition
158	Shingle
159	Composition Shingle/Metal
160	Compostion Shingle
161	Flat Composition Roll
162	Gable Composition Roll
163	Hip Composition Roll
164	Mansard Composition Roll
165	Gambrel Composition Roll
166	Composition
167	Flat Tar & Gravel
168	Gable Tar & Gravel
169	Hip Tar & Gravel
170	Shed Tar & Gravel
171	Gambrel Tar & Gravel
172	Tar & Gravel
173	Crushed Rock
174	Gravel & Rock
175	Rock
176	Rock & Gravel
177	Stone/Rock
178	Stone/Pebble
179	Stone
180	Roll Tar & Gravel
181	Flat Built-Up Wood
182	Built-Up Wood Joist
183	Built-Up Composition
184	Built-Up Gypsum
185	Built-Up Metal
186	Built-Up Rock
187	Built-Up Tar & Gravel
188	Built-Up Wood
189	Built-Up Metal/Gypsum
190	Built-Up Composition/Tar & Gravel
191	Asphalt Shingle
192	Asphalt Shingle - Wood Joist
193	Asphalt Roll
194	Asphalt Tile
195	Asphalt/Composition
196	Asphalt/Composition Shingle
197	Flat
198	Flat Slate/Slag
199	Gable Slate/Slag
200	Hip Slate/Slag
201	Mansard Slate/Slag
202	Gambrel Slate/Slag
203	Aluminum/Shingle
204	Flat Metal
205	Flat Copper
206	Gable Metal
207	Gable Steel
208	Gable Copper
209	Hip Metal
210	Hip Copper
211	Mansard Metal
212	Shed Metal
213	Gambrel Metal
214	Gambrel Copper/Shingle
215	Copper
216	Copper/Shingle
217	Metal Sheeting
218	Aluminum Steel
219	Copper/Metal
220	Corrugated Iron
221	Corrugated Metal
222	Corrugated Steel
223	Metal
224	Metal Tile
225	Metal/Shingle
226	Metal/Tar Paper
227	Metal/Tin
228	Modular Metal
229	Prefinished Metal
230	Tin
231	Corrugated Metal/Roll Roofing
232	Corrugated Metal/Tarpaper
233	Galvanized Sheet Metal
234	Metal Sheeting
235	Metal Pipe
236	Copper/Enamel Metal Sheeting
237	A-Frame
238	Barn
239	Canopy
240	Dormer
241	Frame
242	Flat Concrete
243	Flat Wood Beam
244	Flat Wood Truss
245	Flat Concrete
246	Flat Shingle
247	Gable Concrete
248	Gable Wood Beam
249	Gable Wood Joist
250	Gable Wood Truss
251	Gable
252	Gable Shingle
253	Gable/Hip
254	Hip Concrete
255	Hip Wood Beam
256	Hip Wood Joist
257	Hip Wood Truss
258	Hip
259	Hip Shingle
260	Geodesic
261	Mansard Concrete
262	Mansard Wood Beam
263	Mansard Wood Joist
264	Mansard Wood Truss
265	Mansard
266	Mansard Shingle
267	Barrel
268	Monitor
269	Contemporary
270	Shed Concrete
271	Shed Wood Beam
272	Shed Wood Joist
273	Shed Wood Truss
274	Shed
275	Shed Concrete
276	Shed Shingle
277	Pitched Concrete
278	Pitched
279	Pitched Composition
280	Pyramid
281	Arched
282	Sawtooth
283	Cathedral/Clerestory
284	Bubble
285	Gambrel Concrete
286	Gambrel Wood Beam
287	Gambrel Wood Joist
288	Gambrel Wood Truss
289	Gambrel
290	Gambrel/Shingle
291	Swiss Chalet/Alpine
292	Complex/Custom
293	Butterfly
294	Gambrel/Mansard
295	Steel Joist/Metal Deck/Slab
296	Bar Joist/Wood Joist/Sheath
297	Bar Joist
298	Concrete
299	Bar Joist & Wood Deck
300	Wood Frame
301	Bowstring
302	Bar Joist/Gypsum/Wood Joist/Sheath
303	Concrete Joist/Slab/Bar/Joist/Cored Ply
304	Bar Joist & Concrete Deck
305	Bar Joist/Gypsum
306	Flexible/Flexicore
307	Concrete Joist/Slab
308	Reinforced Concrete
309	Longspan Truss
310	Prestress Concrete
311	Bar Joist & Rigid Frame
312	Steel
313	Truss/Joist
314	Steel Joist/Metal Deck/Slab/Concrete Joist
315	Concrete Joist/Slab/Steel Joist
316	Wood Joist
317	Wood On Steel
318	Wood Truss
319	Custom
320	Concrete
321	Gypsum
322	Cement/Composition
323	Concrete Deck
324	Corrugated Composition
325	Concrete Concrete
326	Concrete Steel
327	Plastic/Urethane
328	Precast Concrete
329	Reinforced Concrete
330	Bermuda/Clay Tile/Wood Shingle
331	Synthetic
332	Bahama/Ceramic Tile/Built-Up Tar & Gravel
333	Shingle/Tar/Gravel/Roll Slate
334	Bermuda/Concrete Ply/Built-up Tar & Gravel
335	Gable/Shaped Wood Truss
336	Prestressed Concrete
337	Gable/Shaped Steel Truss
338	Wood Hip/Gable/Wood Truss
339	Gypsum Steel
340	Shingle Concrete
341	Irregular Wood Truss
342	Irregular
343	Lean-To
344	Salt Box
345	Dome
346	Flat Asbestos
347	Gable Asbestos Shingle
348	Hip Asbestos Shingle
349	Mansard Asbestos Shingle
350	Gambrel Asbestos Shingle
351	Asbestos Shingle
352	Asbestos/Wood
353	Asbestos/Wood/Shingle
354	Corrugated Asbestos
355	Flat Roll
356	Gable Roll
357	Hip Roll
358	Mansard Roll
359	Shed Roll
360	Gambrel/Roll
361	Roll
362	Tar Paper
363	Roll Metal
364	Roll Wood Joist
365	Tar Paper/Metal
366	Fiberglass/Plastic
367	Clay Tile/Glazed Tile
368	Clay Tile/Slate
369	Clay/Concrete Tile
370	Concrete Truss/Joist

RoofConstruction

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Dormer
102	Gable
103	Monitor
104	Sawtooth
105	Hip
106	Flat
107	Barn
108	Canopy
109	Frame
110	Shed
111	Gable/Hip
112	Gambrel
113	Gambrel/Mansard
114	Mansard
115	Butterfly
116	Complex/Custom
117	Contemporary
118	Pitched
119	Arched
120	A-Frame
121	Bubble
122	Geodesic
123	Cathedral/Clerestory
124	Barrel
125	Pyramid
126	Swiss Chalet/Alpine

StormShutterFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of Storm Shutters on the Main Structure

OverheadDoorFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Overhead Door

GrpExtAmenities

ViewDescription

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	None
1	Type Unknown
999	Bypass
A	Freeway Proximity
AAA	Bluff
B	Waterfront-Beach (Ocean, River, or Lake)
BBB	Territory
C	Contamination Site
D	Cul-de-sac
E	Corner
H	Historical
I	School Proximity
P	Proximity To Airport
R	Proximity To Railroad
S	Major Street/Thoroughfare
T	High Traffic Area
V01	Type Unknown
VAI	Airport
VAV	Average
VBA	Bay
VBE	Best
VBR	Better
VCA	Canal
VCI	City
VCL	Creek/lake
VCN	Canyon
VCP	Conservation/Protected Area
VCV	Canyon/valley
VEX	Excellent
VFA	Fair
VGC	Golf Course
VGO	Good
VGP	Greenbelt/Park
VGU	Gulf
VHM	Hills/Mountains
VHV	Hill/Valley
VIN	Inferior
VIT	Inland Waterway
VIW	Intercoastal Waterway
VLA	Lake
VLG	Lagoon
VLP	Lake/Pond
VMN	Mountain
VMO	Mountain/Ocean
VOB	Obstructed
VOC	Ocean
VPA	Park
VPD	Pond
VPG	Parking
VPI	Prime
VPL	Pool
VPM	Premium
VPR	Poor
VRC	Recreational
VRD	Road
VRR	River
VSD	Standard
VSN	Suburban
VSR	Superior
VST	Street
VTY	Typical
VWD	Woodland
VWR	Water
Z	Flood Plain/Flood Zone

PorchCode

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	NONE
1	Type Unknown
999	Bypass
AH0	Detached/Finished Porch/Carport
AQ0	Detached/Unfinished Porch/Carport
B00	Slab
B06	Concrete/Wood Slab
B0C	Concrete/Masonry Slab
B0T	Concrete/Metal Slab
BC0	Covered Slab
BE0	Enclosed Slab
BO0	Open Slab
BS0	Screened Slab
C00	Colonial Style
D00	Balcony/Patio
F00	Florida Room
P00	Porch
P01	Uncovered Porch
P05	Concrete/Vinyl Porch
P0A	Aluminum Porch
P0B	Brick Porch
P0C	Concrete/Masonry Porch
P0D	Metal/Wood/Screened Porch
P0E	Metal/Wood Porch
P0F	Flagstone Porch
P0I	Cool Deck Porch
P0M	Metal Porch
P0R	Frame Porch
P0S	Stone/Slate Porch
P0V	Vinyl Porch
P0W	Wood Porch
P0X	Wood/Screened Porch
P0Y	Glass Porch
P10	Finished/Screened Porch
P1C	Finished/Screened Concrete/Masonry
P1L	Finished/Screened Tile Porch
P1M	Finished/Screened Metal Porch
P20	Open/Screened Porch
P30	Open/Unfinished Porch
P40	Screened/Unfinished Porch
P4M	Screened/Unfinished Metal Porch
P50	Detached/Enclosed Porch
P70	Covered/Finished Porch
P80	Unfinished Open Porch
P90	Attached Porch
PBC	Covered/Enclosed Concrete/Masonry
PC0	Covered Porch
PCA	Covered Aluminum Porch
PCB	Covered Brick Porch
PCC	Covered Concrete/Masonry Porch
PCF	Covered Flagstone Porch
PCS	Covered Stone/Slate Porch
PCW	Covered Wood Porch
PCZ	Covered Terrazzo Porch
PD0	Detached Porch
PDD	Detached Cedar/Redwood Porch
PDR	Detached Frame Porch
PE0	Enclosed Porch
PEB	Enclosed Brick Porch
PEC	Enclosed Concrete/Masonry Porc
PEK	Enclosed Block Porch
PER	Enclosed Frame Porch
PES	Enclosed Stone/Slate Porch
PEV	Enclosed Vinyl Porch
PEW	Enclosed Wood Porch
PEY	Enclosed Glass Porch
PF0	Finished Porch
PFM	Finished Metal Porch
PFV	Finished Vinyl Porch
PG0	Enclosed/Finished Porch
PGC	Enclosed/Finished Concrete/Masonry
PGW	Enclosed/Finished Wood Porch
PH0	Detached/Finished Porch
PI0	Detached Open Porch
PJ0	Covered/Detached/Unfinished Porch
PK0	Covered/Detached/Finished Porch
PL0	Detached/Screened Porch
PM0	Detached/Finished/Screened Porch
PN0	Enclosed/Unfinished Porch
PNC	Enclosed/Unfinished Concrete/Masonry
PNF	Enclosed/Unfinished Frame Porch
PNW	Enclosed/Unfinished Wood Porch
PO0	Open Porch
PO1	Open Aluminum/Fiberglass Porch
POB	Open Brick Porch
POC	Open Concrete/Masonry Porch
POR	Open Frame Porch
PP0	Covered/Open Porch
PPB	Covered/Open Brick Porch
PQ0	Detached/Unfinished
PR0	Raised Porch
PS0	Screened Porch
PSA	Screened Aluminum Porch
PSB	Screened Brick Porch
PSC	Screened Concrete Masonry Porch
PSE	Screened Metal Porch
PSL	Screened Tile Porch
PSP	Screened Metal/Wood Porch
PSV	Screened Vinyl Porch
PSW	Screened Wood Porch
PU0	Unfinished Porch
PUV	Unfinished Vinyl Porch
PV0	Covered/Unfinished Porch
PW0	Detached/Unfinished/Screened Porch
PX0	Enclosed/Screened Porch
PY0	Finished Screened Porch
PZ0	Finished/Open Porch
PZC	Finished/Open Concrete Masonry
PZL	Finished/Open Tile Porch
S00	Stoop
S0C	Stoop
S0F	Frame Stoop
SC0	Covered Stoop
SCR	Covered Frame Stoop
W00	Breezeway
WE0	Enclosed Breezeway
WN0	Enclosed/Unfinished Breezeway
X00	Patio/Porch
X0A	Aluminum Patio/Porch
XC0	Covered Patio/Porch
Y00	Courtyard
Y0B	Brick Courtyard

DeckFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Deck

FeatureBalconyFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Balcony

BreezewayFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Breezeway

GrpParking

RVParkingFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a RV Parking Space/Surface

DrivewayMaterial

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
D	Driveway
DA	Driveway Asphalt
DB	Driveway Bomanite
DC	Driveway Chat
DK	Driveway Brick
DO	Driveway Concrete
DP	Driveway Paver
DR	Driveway Gravel
DT	Driveway Tile

GrpPool

Pool

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	No Pool
1	Not Stated
101	Public/Municipal/Commercial
110	Above-ground Pool
120	In-ground Pool
121	In-ground Vinyl Pool
130	Indoor Pool
210	Pool, Gunite
220	Pool, Fiberglass
230	Pool, Concrete
231	Concrete & Vinyl
241	Pool, Plastic/Vinyl Lined
242	Pool, Vinyl Lining & Steel Walled
243	Pool, Pre-Fabricated Vinyl
250	Pool, Brick/Masonry/Stone
251	Pool, Stone (Granite)
260	Pool, Metal
301	Multiple Pools (Unspecified)
302	Pools, Two (Unspecified)
303	Pools, Three+ (Unspecified)
330	Adult/Kiddie Pools
401	Pool (Unspecified), Heated
402	Pool, Solar Heated
403	Heated Pool (Gunite)
501	Pool w/Diving Board
502	Pool w/Hot Tub/Spa
503	Pool w/Cabana/Pool House
504	Pool w/Sauna
505	Pool w/Canopy
506	Pool w/Bar
507	Pool w/Fountain
508	Pool w/Waterfall
509	Pool w/Equipment
511	Pool (In-ground) w/Hot Tub/Spa
522	Pool (Concrete) w/Cabana/Pool House
528	Pool (Concrete) w/Equipment
531	Pool (Gunite) w/Hot Tub/Spa
601	Pool (Unspecified), Fenced
602	Pool (Concrete), Fenced
610	Pool (Unspecified), Enclosed
611	Pool (Gunite), Enclosed
620	Pool (Unspecified) w/Cover
630	Pool (Unspecified) w/Deck
632	Pool (Vinyl) w/Deck
634	Pool & Spa w/Deck
640	Pool w/Patio
642	Pool (Vinyl) w/Patio
643	Pool (Gunite) w/Patio
701	Pool, Irregular Shaped
702	Pool, Arrow-Shaped Pool
710	Pool, Kidney Shaped
711	Pool (Gunite), Kidney Shaped
712	Pool (Vinyl), Kidney Shaped
720	Pool, L-Shaped
721	Pool (Vinyl), L-Shaped
730	Pool, Oval Shaped
731	Pool (Vinyl), Oval Shaped
740	Pool, Circular
750	Wading Pool
751	Kiddie/Play Pool
760	Lap Pool
901	Lagoon
902	Fish Pond
903	Bumper Boat
904	Spa/Hot Tub (only)
905	Spa/Hot Tub & Deck (only)
906	Sauna & Spa (only)
907	Spa & Gazebo (only)
908	Sauna (only)
999	Type Unpecified

SaunaFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Sauna Room

GrpYardGardenInfo

TopographyCode

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
101	Gentle Slope
102	Level
103	Rolling
104	Steep Side
105	Low/Wet
106	Combo
107	Broken
108	Low
109	High
110	Wet
111	Steep
112	Steep/Low
113	Steep/Wet
114	Underwater
115	Other
116	Below Road/Slope
117	Above Road/Slope
118	Above Road/Steep
119	Below Road/Steep
120	Partially Developed
121	Needs Development
122	Rocky
123	Marsh
124	Mountain
125	Wooded
126	Brushy

FenceCode

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
F	Fence
FB	Barbed Wire Fence
FC	Chain Link Fence
FH	Hurricane Fence
FI	Wrought Iron Or Iron Fence
FK	Brick Fence/Wall
FL	Concrete Block Fence/Wall
FM	Metal Fence
FP	Picket Fence
FR	Rail Fence
FS	Stockade Fence
FT	Stone Fence/Wall
FV	Vinyl Fence
FW	Wood Fence
FX	Combo

CourtyardFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Courtyard

ArborPergolaFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Pergola

SprinklersFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Installed Lawn/Plantings Watering System

GolfCourseGreenFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Practice Green

TennisCourtFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Tennis Court

SportsCourtFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Sport/Basketball Court

ArenaFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Equestrian Arena

WaterFeatureFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Wqater Feature Such as a Fountain

PondFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Pond, Including a Koi Pond

BoatLiftFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Boat Lift

GrpExtBuildings

BathHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Bath House

BoatAccessFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Boat Access/Ramp

BoatHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Boat house

CabinFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Cabin/Rustic Dwelling

CanopyFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Canopy Area

GazeboFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Gazebo

GranaryFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Grainery

GreenHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Greenhouse

GuestHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Guest House

KennelFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Kennel/Animal Shelter

LeanToFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Lean-To

LoadingPlatformFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Loading Platform/Dock

MilkHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Milk House

OutdoorKitchenFireplaceFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of an Outdoor Kitchen/Brick Bar-B-Que

PoolHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Pool House

PoultryHouseFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Popultry House

QuonsetFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Quonset Structure/Hut

SiloFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Silo

StableFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Stables

StorageBuildingFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Storage Building

PoleStructureFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	Indicates the Presense of a Pole Building

ShedCode

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
Y	There is a shed on th eproperty
Numeric Value (Not 0)	The number of sheds on the property.

UtilityBuildingFlag

Code	Description
NP	Unknown or Not Provided
0	Unknown
1	The property has a utility (multi-purpose working building) building on it

Result Codes (Property)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

SmartMover

Overview

• U.S./Canadian change of address processing to update addresses of people or businesses that have moved.

• NCOA and CCOA Processing Requirements:

  • If US and Canadian records exists: Minimum requirement is 100 US and 100 Canada records

  • If US Only: Minimum requirement is 100 US records

  • If CA Only: Minimum requirement is 100 CA records

Tutorial

The following steps will guide you in the basic usage of SmartMover for SSIS.

Advanced Configuration

In the SmartMover Component, navigate to File > Advanced Configuration.

Melissa Cloud

For Melissa Cloud processing, you need the License Key issued to you by your sales representative. The other settings on this part of the Advanced Configuration screen should not be changed unless you are specifically directed to do so by Melissa Technical Support.

After entering the License Key, click the Show Details button at the bottom of this screen to verify that the License Key was entered correctly.

Warning

The following items should only be altered if directed by Melissa’s support staff.

Use Proxy	If your network uses a Proxy Server, check this box and enter the Proxy information below.
Proxy URL	If your network uses a Proxy Server, enter the Proxy URL information on this field in order for the SmartMover Component to communicate with the Melissa Cloud. The format is “URL:port”.
User Name	The user name for your Proxy Server, if any.
Password	The password for your Proxy Server, if any.
Maximum Threads	Specify the number of simultaneous requests to be sent to the Melissa Cloud Services to run in parallel.
Maximum Transaction Size	Specify the number of records to be sent to the Melissa Cloud per request.
Request Timeout	Specify the number of seconds for the SmartMover Component to wait before timing out. Some requests may experience connection lag or timeouts due to network problems.
Number of Retries	Specify the number of times the SmartMover Component should re-send a request to the Melissa Cloud due to any exceptions.
Abort on Critical Error	Will abort the process, in event of critical errors related to the Component such as the Web service code WSE00; Unexpected Error-Please Retry.

Test Configuration (SmartMover Cloud)

Either the version number or build number will assist Melissa Technical Support in determining if you have the latest software installed on your system.

SmartMover Component	Component Version	Displays the current SSIS component version.
	Build Number	Displays the current development release build number of the SmartMover Component for SSIS. This is usually a three or four-character string.
	License Expiration	Displays the date the License Key expires.
SmartMover Web Service	Service Response	Displays the Web Service response status with the number of retries and seconds to connect.
	Version	This box displays the version number of the SmartMover Web Service.

Add Component

To add SmartMover Component to your project, drag the component onto the Data Flow screen. This will snap the SmartMover Component into your workflow space.

Connect Input

Select a data flow source to be your input data. Many formats can be used as Sources, including Excel files, flat files or Access Input data sources. Connect this data source to the SmartMover Component by dragging the arrow from your data flow source to the SmartMover Component.

Configure Component

Double click the SmartMover Component to bring up the interface. See SmartMover Component Settings .

Connect Output

Add data destinations for downstream output. Connect the respective output filter pin to the output destination.

Save Settings

Click File and select Save Selected Items to save the project

Run Project

Now, the project is ready to run.

Settings

SmartMover Tabs

• Input Columns
• Output Columns
• Processing Options
• Pass-Through Columns
• Output Filter

The Input Columns tab configures the fields that will be used for the Change-of-Address lookup of the SmartMover Component, as well as the input for name splitting and address parsing.

To identify a changed address, the following fields are required for each record:

1. Either FirstName and LastName, FullName or Company

2. Address

3. Either City and State, and or ZIP

Existing field names are selected using the dropdown boxes.

Input Name

Name Format	Full Name	If this is an individual person’s address and the entire name is stored as a single string, pass the contents of that field here.If the contact Name is already parsed, the Component can use information via the fields below.
Parsed Components	Prefix	This would be a title or honorific such as “Mr,” “Miss,” or “Dr.”
	First Name	This field accepts the given name for each record containing an individual address.
	Middle Name	This field accepts an individual’s middle name if one exists.
	Last Name	This field accepts the family name for each record containing an individual address.
	Suffix	This field accepts any part of the name that follows the family name, such as degrees (“MD” or “PhD”) and generational indicators (“IV” or “Jr.”), if one exists.

Select Country

Default Country

The country to use if the country field is blank in the input.

Input Address

Company	If the database records may be business type, include the company field here.
Address	Select the field in the input database that contains the first line of street address infor­mation. It may also contain secondary address information such as suite and private mailbox numbers.
Address2	Select the field in the input database that contains the second line of street address information, if any.
City	Select the field in the input database that contains the city information.
State/Province	Select the field in the input database that contains the state information.
Zip/Postal Code	Select the field in the input database that contains the postal code information.
Suite	Select the field in the input database that contains the Suite address information, if any.
Private Mailbox	Select the field in the input database that contains the Private Mailbox number, if any.
Urbanization	Select the field in the input database that contains the urbanization information, if any. Urbanization is used to break ties between similar addresses in Puerto Rico. The urbanization name tells the address checking logic in which “neighborhood” to look, if more than one likely address candidate is found. If just one address is found, the address checking logic can correct the address and return the urbanization name.
Plus 4	Select the field in the input database that contains the Plus 4 extension for US ZIP codes, if this information is stored separately.
Country	Select the field containing the country of the input data.

The output section consists of various sets of return fields. Output Name returns the concatenated and or parsed Name parts of the input Name. Output Address returns the new change of address data or for non-moves, standardized address information. Additional Output Columns can be used to store additional address info and parsed address parts.

New field names can be created by typing the name into the box.

Content

Output Name Output Address

Move information Additional Output Columns

Use Input Fields For Output:

Selecting this option will automatically map your input Name and Address fields as the output fields, hence overwriting the original structure with new data. Caution: selecting this option will wipe out any new Output fields you have just created.

Output Name

FullName	This field returns the standardized FullName used to look up the change of address.
Prefix	This field returns any part of the name that precedes the given name, such as “Mr.,” “Ms.” or “Dr.,” for each full name detected.
First Name	This field returns the given name for each full name detected.
Middle Name	This field returns the middle names or initials for each full name processed.
Last Name	This field returns the family name for each full name processed.
Suffix	This field returns any part of the name that follows the family name, such as degrees (“MD” or “PhD”) and generational indicators (“IV” or “Jr.”), for each full name processed.

Output Address

Company	Map the field that will receive the Company information.
Address Line 1	Map the field that will receive the updated address or standardized street address that was used for verification. This may be the contents of the Address2 input field, if address swapping has occurred.
Address Line 2	Map the field that will receive the updated address or standardized street address that was not used for verification, if two address lines were present.
City	Map the field that will receive the city name. The information returned may be different than the contents of the City input field, if the preferred city name has been substituted for a vanity city name or if the address was coded to a different ZIP Code instead.
State/Province	Map the field that will receive the two-character state abbreviation.
Zip/Postal Code	Map the field that will receive the five-digit U.S. ZIP Code.
AddressKey	Map the field that will receive the AddressKey for the returned record. The Address Key was created by Melissa to uniquely identify an address and used as input to our other individual services like Geocoding.

Move Information

Effective Date	Map this field which receives the effective date (yyyymm) of a change of address.
Move Type Code	This code indicates the type of address record matched. For a list of these codes, see Component Result Codes.
NCOA Return Code	The SmartMover component includes a new field, NCOA Return Code (for U.S records only). The NCOA Return Code indicates the level of matching between the record and the NCOA Link database. For a list of the NCOA Return Codes visit: Component Result Codes

Additional Output Columns

The Next button navigates to page 2 of the Output Columns tab. Additional Output Columns allow you to map fields for returned data that goes beyond the standard change-of-address information.

Address Information	Suite	Map the field that will receive the updated or standardized suite information, if any.
	Private Mailbox	Map the field that will receive the private mailbox number. This field is populated if the primary address was identified as a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) and the secondary address information is present. This field would also be populated if the secondary address information contains the string “PMB”, thus identifying the address as a private mailbox.
	Plus 4	Map the field that will receive the four-digit extension from the ZIP + 4.
	Delivery Point & Check Digit	The delivery point is a two-digit number that combined with the ZIP + 4, generates a unique number for each address in that ZIP + 4. This number is used to generate barcodes, so if you plan you use this address data for commercial mailing, it would be necessary to map an output field for this information. Typically, the Delivery Point Code will be the last two digits of the street number, but the most accurate way to obtain this information is by submitting the address for Address Verification and storing the Delivery Point code for future use. The delivery point check digit is an additional one-digit number that is combined with the Delivery Point when generating barcodes for mailing.
	Delivery Indication	This column returns a one-character code indicating whether the submitted address is “R”, a residence; “B”, a business; or “U”, the status is unknown.
	Carrier Route	The Carrier Route is a four-character code that indicates which mail carrier delivers to the input address. The first character of this Carrier Route is always alphabetic and the last three characters are numeric. For example, “R001” or “C027” would be typical carrier routes. The alphabetic letter indicates the type of delivery associated with this address. B = PO Box C = City Delivery G = General Delivery H = Highway Contract R = Rural Route
	Urbanization	Map the field that will receive the Urbanization name, if any. See the entry for the Urbanization input field for more information on this field.
	City Abbreviation	If the name returned by the City field is longer than 13 letters, the City Abbreviation field will return the official abbreviation the Post Office(TM) has associated with that city or municipality name. For example, the City Abbreviation field will return the abbreviation “Rcho Sta Marg” for “Rancho Santa Margarita”. If the value returned by the City field is 13 letters or shorter, the City Abbreviation field will return the full city or municipality name.
	Country	Returns the full name of the country in which the address is located. Currently, only Canada and the United States are supported, although SmartMover Web Service will only update the U.S. addresses.
	Country Abbreviation	Returns the standard abbreviation of the country in which the address is located. Currently, only Canada and the United States are supported, although SmartMover Web Service will only update the U.S. addresses.
	DPV Footnotes	JSON: Records[index].DPVFootnotes The DPV footnotes indicate the level of matching between the current address and the USPS’s DPV database. The footnote may be up to six characters long. Refer to the table below for possible codes returned in this field.
		DPV Address Status Codes
		Code	Description
		AA	Input Address Matched to the ZIP + 4 file
		A1	Input Address Not Matched to the ZIP + 4 file
		BB	DPV matched (all components)
		CC	Primary Number Match – Secondary present but invalid
		F1	Address Was Coded to a Military Address
		G1	Address Was Coded to a General Delivery Address
		M1	Primary Number missing
		M3	Primary Number invalid
		N1	Primary Number Match – Secondary missing
		P1	Missing PO, RR or HC Box number
		P3	Invalid PO, RR or HC Box number
		R1	DPV matched to CMRA – PMB number not present
		RR	DPV matched to CMRA
		U1	Address Was Coded to a Unique ZIP Code
Address Keys	Standardized Melissa Address Key
	Standardized Base Melissa Address Key
	Base Melissa Address Key	A unique key assigned to the base address of a complex with apartments or suites.
	Melissa Address Key	(MAK) A unique key assigned to an address record.
Parsed Address Columns	These fields return street address information, split into its components.
	Address Range	This field returns the street number.
	Pre-directional	This field returns any directional indicators that precede the street name. The directionals are returned as one- or two-character abbreviations. If the input data contained “Southwest,” it would be shortened to “SW.”
	Street Name	This field returns only the street name, minus the suffixes or directionals. For “SW Main Street,” this would return “Main.”
	Suffix	This field returns the standard abbreviations for the street types: “RD,” “ST,” “AVE,” “BLVD,” etc.
	Post-directional	This field returns any directional indicators that follow the street name. The directionals are returned as one- or two-character abbreviations. If the input data contained “Southwest,” it would be shortened to “SW.”
	Suite Name	This field returns the descriptive portion of the secondary address: “SUITE,” “APT,” “UNIT,” etc.
	Suite Range	This field returns the valid Ranges for Suites for each inputted address.
	Private Mailbox Name	This field returns the descriptive portion of the private mailbox number. A private mailbox, or PMB, is a secondary address associated with a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA). Because the CMRA may itself be located in a suite, such an address may have both a suite number and a PMB number. The name portion of the PMB will normally be either “#” or “PMB.”
	Private Mailbox Range	This field returns the valid Ranges for Private Mailboxes for each inputted address.
	Route Service	A term used to refer to what the USPS would call a Rural Route address.
	Lock Box	the Canadian equivalent of a Post Office Box in the U.S. (The two terms are often used interchangeably in Canada).
	Delivery Installation	The post office facility responsible for delivering to the current address. It is often used for rural addresses or when multiple post offices service the same municipality.
	Extra Information	This field returns any text from the street address field that does not fit into one of the above categories.

The following fields set the necessary options to process a list of address records.

Processing Options	Processing Type	This setting controls the type of Processing that will be performed on the data.
		Standard Processing	Queries business, individual and family records. In other words, does not omit any move records from the query.
		Business and Individual Moves	Omits family records.
		Business Moves Only	Omits family and individual move records.
		Individual Moves Only	Omits business and family move records.
		Residential Moves	Omits business and return individual and family move records.
	Mailing Frequency	This field accepts an integer value from 1 to 52. This is the number of times per year that the current mailing list is used for mailing. If you use it monthly, enter 12; for quarterly, use 4, etc.
	Months Requested	This field accepts an integer value from 6 to 48. This is the number of months back that you want the Web service to search for a change of address.
Summary Reports	Check the box next to Summary Reports to enable their use.
	List Name	This is the name that identifies the current list. It will be included in the reports that SmartMover returns after processing.
	Save NCOA Summary in File	Specifying a file name will generate this report which will contain the PAF information you provided Melissa, identify the name of the processed list and summarize the Change-of-Address statistics.
	Save 3553 CASS Form in File	Specifying a file name will generate this CASS Summary Report which returns all of the information from processing your list that would be required to fill out a CASS 3553 form.
	Append JobId to the Reports file name	Check this option to append the Job ID to the Reports file name.
	(Advanced Options) Override default Job ID	Check this option if you want to override your existing job ID.
	Use a Job ID to Retrieve past Reports	If you want to retrieve previous reports, click on “Use a Job ID to retrieve past Reports.”
	Retrieve Reports	Job ID	Specify the Job ID here.
		Save NCOA Summary in File	Specify the file location to save the NCOA summary.
		Save 3553 CASS Form in File	Specify the file location to save the 3553 CASS form.
		Append JobId to the Reports file name	Check this option to append the Job ID to the Reports file name.

This shows a list of the fields in your input table. If you check the box next to a field name, the contents of that field will be passed to the output table without modification.

Column Name	The column names from the original input table.
Current Usage	Where the field is currently being used as input.

The SmartMover Component will output records in up to four streams. The Output Filter tab allows you to control which records go to which stream. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down.

Result Codes	The output status of a record is returned via result codes returned by the underlying objects. The Component will combine them into a single, comma-delimited string and write them to the field mapped here. New field names can be created by typing the name into the Output Results Code box. Returned Result Codes
Output Filter	Select a filter to determine which records will be directed to a particular output stream. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.
	No Filter	All records are written to a single output stream.
	Pre-built Filter	The Component comes with several pre-built filters for common applications: Moved Addresses - CS01 - The record is determined to have a Change of Address according to the supplied name and address. Valid Address or Changed Address - CS01 OR CS02 - The record is determined to have at a minimum, a verified address and possibly a Change of Address according to the supplied name and address.
	Custom Filter Expression	Records matching the filter will be directed to the designated file. For more information, see Custom Output Filters below.

Attention

Custom rules are an advanced subject. You should be comfortable with Boolean operations before using custom rules in a production environment

Custom Output Filter

SSIS components will output records in up to four streams. Names and usage can be done in any manner. Filters are evaluated from the top down. A custom filter may be created based on individual need, each pin filters the records in a cascading effect, where the results code is compared against the first expression (Pin 1) and then compared against Pin 2, and so on.

Customer Filter

Select Customer Filter from the drop down and click the ... button next to the Customer Filter Expression text box to open an Output Filter Expression dialog box. These rules use Boolean operators (“OR,” “AND,” and “NOT”) and the result codes to construct filters. Records matching the filter will be directed to the valid table while the rest are directed to the invalid table.

A custom rule example could be: “(AS01 OR AS02)”. This means that the conditions for the rules are met if either result code “AS01” or “AS02” were returned.

Validate Custom Rules

A custom expression may be tested by clicking on the Test Expression button. A pop-up dialog box will confirm whether or not the custom expression is acceptable.

Save as Custom Filter

Right-click the Custom Expression, then left-click Save as Custom Filter from the pop-up. Enter a name for the filter in the window and click OK. It will now be available as a Pre-Built Filter for subsequent components.

Remove Selected Rule

To remove a Pre-Built Filter, select the filter from the Pre-Built drop-down list, right-click the filter, and select Delete Filter. Click Yes. After saving this component, it will no longer be available in new component configurations.

Result Codes (SmartMover)

• SE##, GE##, and GW## Codes

• Record Level Result Codes

• Move Types:

  Code	Description
  F	Family
  B	Business
  I	Individual